Home

Maple T.A. User Guide

1. cecceecceecc ence eece ence eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeece seen esse esse eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaes 197 MathML m the Questions 5cos5ts8 csc tad eva wake ect eh ahora wh e E eng ST S ATONG 198 Simplified Math Expressions 1 03 ccscs eeccuete cocess erii n e o aE SEAE EEEE EEEE EAE O E Ees 199 10 8 Pl ttine Using Maple rn Geraisa resena E E E E EE e A EE EE 201 Displaying a Maple Plot vcni iepr a e EEE ee EE EEEE EE EEEE A E aE 201 10 9 Mathematical Functions amp Operations 0 cecc cece ence ence enceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeea seca eeaeeeaeeeaeeeeneeeeereneeees 204 10 10 Using a Table of Units nenons oeio seein a EEE Ea EEEE deueaondsoecdhebevcasdaed edges EESE EEES 205 Default Table of Physical Unit Equivalents 2 0 0 cccccecc cece eece ence eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeaeeee sess eeaeeaeeeaneeaaes 205 Custom Table of Equivalent Units cccecccece cece E E E E ga E E a a 211 10 11 Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers cccccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 212 Displaying the answer Field Formula 0 cecceecceece ence eeceeeceeeceeeee seca cece esas eeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeges 212 Displaying the Calculated Final Answer cccceccceecceeceeece cece cece ees eese eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeegas 212 Displaying Both the Formula for the Answer and the Final Calculated Answer cececeeeceneeeeees 213 10 12 Tutorial Formatting Integers and Reals c
2. var To use a system algorithmic variable in LaTeX do not specify the but instead enclose the name in a var command For example to display the variable n in the question statement use qutext What is the exact value of sin frac var n pi 4 For more information see Tutorial Using Algorithms in LaTeX Questions page 264 In addition each question type has its own set of LaTeX macros for defining properties of that type of question See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 The info Field page 128 11 4 LaTeX Style Sheets The Maple T A LaTeX macros can be used on a range of platforms and with a variety of TeX implementations To determine where to save your style sheets sty files refer to your LaTeX documentation 250 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX 11 5 Basic Question Types in LaTeX Blanks Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Blanks menu option The Blanks question type generates a fill in the blank question The text inside a blank menu command is removed and a list of choices is displayed in a drop down box Notes e You must provide the choices in a comma delimited list with the correct answer listed first The choices are permuted for the student e This option is similar to Multiple Choice but may be more convenient for some questions The main difference is that only text choices are supported TeX cannot be used in the list of choices e An
3. cccceecceeceeecceece seen eeeneeee cece eeeeeeee cena eee eeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeseeeges 30 Figure 3 6 Feedback Options sero e ea e aE EEE E cose ie iyate bude EEE A E adie deo eeee phage es 31 Figure 3 7 Assignment Properties s sesseesesseerssertestrstt setst ttet eee ttt estt tS ter S Er EESe SEESE streer treere nega 31 Figur 3 8 Sched lin pene oire osoa E E E EE E AE E gel dees EE a EEE E a E EE 31 Iarr Visibil D AEAEE E E E E E E E E E NT 32 Figure 3 10 Set Criteria for Assignments s usssesssersserssressressreseressrsssessersserssressreserestesseeestessresseesseest 32 Figure 3 11 Review Assignment DetailSin deinen ie doie iaaa i niai e aeieea i erotinio kiddos 33 Figure 3 12 Policies for Mastery Assignments ccceccceeceeece seca cece cece cece eee eeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeea sega tees 36 Figure 3 13 Assignment Annotations cccecceececneeeeueeeeeeecenueeeeeececaeeeeueeeeeesceaseeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaueseeaes 41 Figure 5 1 Create Import Export or Delete Course Modules cccececseeeeneeecceececeeeeeeececeeeeeaeeeeeesceaaeres 61 Figure 8 1 lt Aleorthm Editor 22 oine aeea is e a i a raae a aeaa aa eaa iae a aa riia 79 Figure 8 2 Create a Random Number Variable ccceeceececneeceneeeceeececeeeeeueeccaeeeeueeeesceaseseeeeceeseseeanees 80 Figure 8 3 Specify Acceptable Answer Format in a Numeric Question cseceeseeceeeeeeeecenueeeeueeeeeeeeeanees 85 Fi
4. 0 ccccceccceeccneeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 84 Editing Question Source Files voccc scccdetsceccaeh eiiie nE EAEE E EE EE EEEE EE Eai 84 Redefining Question Types siisi veces reiasa E AE E A ANE E SOE ESENES 85 Testing the Grading of a Question cccecceecc ee n E E EE EEE EEEE E E ETE a 85 Setting Answer Format in Numeric Questions esssseseeseeseesesserersserresersreserserressererssesresresresesserer gt 85 Setting Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions cccecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeaeeeaeeceeaeeeaeeeneeeanes 86 Images and Reference Files in Questions cceccceeceeecceeceeeceeeee cece cece eeae eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeges 87 Flash Movies and Java Applets in Questions ceccceeceeeceeeceeece cece cece eeae eee eee eeeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeegas 89 Graph Plotting Applet in Questions cccccecccnecce cece ee ce eeee eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseeeseeeaeeeeeeeanes 90 Using a Maple Repository esn sees nc ects ra e degen vans en ddde deceit vee ccuetins EEEE EE E i Ei 90 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 2 0 0 0 0c cccccecc cece eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeea esse sega esaeeeaees 92 Online Authoring in the Question Editor cccecc cece ence ence eeeeeeeeeeceeeee essa eese esse esse eee eeeeeeeneeeneseeegaes 92 Clickable Image Questions in the Question Editor cccccccecceeec cece cece eeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeaee
5. ccceceeeeeeeeececeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeueeeeueeeeaeeeeaaes 107 Table 8 4 Question Repository Available Actions ccceccceceeee cece eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeea essa sean eeaeeaeees 115 Table 8252 Question Fields 6 5 ova dds sasha dneeaceees bee nd e det nhs a a e Labad nae eke ves hata ah AR ES 122 Table 8 6 List of Question Types and Corresponding modes ccccececeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeees 124 Table 8 7 Answer Field Requirements by Question Type ccceccseceeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeees 127 Table 9 1 Math Question Types Comparison cccccccececeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeaeeeneeenaes 133 Table 9 2 Rules and Keys for Entering Chemistry Expressions 0ecceccceeceeeceeeceeece seca eee eesseeaneeaeeenaes 135 Table 10 1 Guidelines for Entering Chemistry Expressions eecceecceeceeeceeeceeeceeece seca eeceeaeeeaeeeaneenaes 186 Table 10 2 Keyboard Shortcuts for the Equation Editor 0c cecceecceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeea seca eeseeaeeaees 189 Tablesl0 3 Detinms Palettes 2ct0cc coind oe ecg a ise Ges ce ese cant wea heck Pear oboe eRe heen 193 Table 10 4 Options for the mathml Function 00 ccece cece cece ence ence ence ence eeeeeeeeeeee seca esse esse eeeeeeeneeeeerenenaes 200 Table 10 5 Mathematical Functions and Operators cceecceece ence eeeeeeceeeceeeee cece eece ess
6. code m rint 7 n int 2 S m 3 280 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX s switch m mmm mom mony The above code chooses the random integer coefficient n to be an odd integer between 3 and 15 The switch statement selects the correct sign for the answer end question Coordinates of Points and Vectors Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Ntuple The Ntuple question type accepts an ordered of numbers or formulas separated by commas It is designed for questions that accept vector or point coordinates as an answer Notes e This is an ordered list The entries in the student response must appear in the same order as in the correct answer The correct answer given should have parentheses for example 3 5 or 2 1 3 This is indicated in the in structions given under the answer box However a response without the parentheses is graded correct e This question type is graded in the same manner as the Formula List type The only difference is the instructions displayed Example 1 begin question Ntuple qutext Find the intersection of the lines y x 1 and y 2 x Separate the entries of the answer with commas Parentheses should be included answer 1 2 3 2 Note The response 1 2 3 2 is graded correct end question Example 2 begin question Ntuple This question uses randomized variables qutext Find the exact solution of the following system of
7. eee g ax a am x X Symbol Palette See Also Palette Questions page 165 Editing with the Equation Editor page 188 Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax When creating an Equation Editor for Palette based questions below is a list of possible palette entries Note All entries are case sensitive If the palette item syntax is not correct the text will display on the button instead of the proper symbol 10 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions 193 To create a new toolbar definition you need to create a question bank in plain text script format and add the toolbar definition at the beginning of the file using the qu env palette toolbarname structure see below You can define one or more toolbar definitions at a time A toolbar definition can define one or more palette entries at a time lt btn gt name of the palette item lt sub cols gt number of columns in the palette lt sep gt palette separator Table 10 3 Defining Palettes Palette Definition Palette lt btn gt SYMBOLPALETTE lt btn gt J lt sub cols 3 gt o0 lt btn gt pi lt btn gt lt btn gt e lt btn gt lt btn gt i lt btn gt lt btn gt I lt btn gt lt btn gt infin lt btn gt lt btn gt Sum lt btn gt lt btn gt Product lt btn gt lt btn gt int lt btn gt lt btn gt d lt btn gt lt btn gt lt lt btn gt lt btn gt gt lt btn gt lt btn gt le lt btn gt lt btn gt ge lt btn gt lt btn g
8. name Pi 0 1 editing useHTML Applet Questions Your question banks can integrate interactive learning objects in the form of Java applets For more information see Advanced Question Types page 178 Clickable Image Question Example Script The following example script creates a Clickable Image question qu 1 topic Clickable Image Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Clickable Image qu 1 1 name Locate Trachea qu 1 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 question Click on the lt b gt lt i gt trachea lt i gt lt b gt in the diagram below lt p gt 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 289 imageURL questionbanks physio respsys gif answer 1 width 578 height 394 region 1 288 198 278 235 278 270 289 272 290 237 300 203 1 region 2 293 166 302 171 311 178 309 186 306 195 299 202 288 194 292 188 293 174 qu 1 1 region 3 305 227 300 238 294 291 296 309 312 327 328 345 332 368 355 378 371 383 378 355 376 311 367 282 353 256 317 229 qu 1 1 region 4 256 225 268 232 271 244 267 260 274 277 280 303 274 320 275 344 268 358 239 376 192 377 189 358 190 331 197 283 205 270 224 244 PRPRPRPRPRP PRPRPRPP qu qu qu qu qu qu See Also Clickable Image Questions page 154 Essay Question Example Script The following example script creates an Essay question qu 1 topic Essay Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Essay qu 1 1 name Friction qu 1 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 question Contrast lt i gt
9. 2 Exact value and number of significant digits the student response must agree with the value given in the answer field and contain the specified number of significant digits Specify the number of significant digits using the di gits n command where n is the number of significant digits For example using digits 3 with answer 2 5 only 2 50 is graded correct 3 Absolute tolerance the student response must agree with the value given in the answer field to within a specified tolerance Specify the absolute tolerance using the err error command where error is the absolute tolerance For example using err 0 25 with answer 2 5 any response between 2 25 and 2 75 inclusive is graded correct For example 2 333333 is correct 4 Significant digits with tolerance the student response must agree with the value given in the answer field to within a specified tolerance in the nth significant digit Specify the tolerance using the err k and digits n commands where k is the tolerance in the nth significant digit For example using err 2 and digits 3 tolerance of 2 at the third significant digit with answer 2 5 any response between 2 48 and 2 52 inclusive is graded correct For example 2 4999999 is correct 5 Relative tolerance the student response must agree with the value given in the answer field to within a specified percent error Specify the percent tolerance using the pere error command where error i
10. For example if the answer field were 2 34 0 01 any response between 2 33 and 2 35 inclusive would be graded correct In other words the number following the operator is the margin of error For more information on tolerances see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 e As noted above blanks cannot contain TeX math mode content Blanks must not appear in math mode Only raw text can be used in blanks A limited amount of error recovery exists For example x blank formula sin 1 8 and int_0 blank formula sin 1 x dx generate conversion errors but x blank formula sin 1 converts correctly However it is recommended that you use a construction similar to x blank formula sin 1 8 Example 1 begin question Blanks qutext The derivative of the function f x 4x x 3 is Format blank formula correct answer in calculator syntax blank formula 4 3x 2 and the second derivative is blank formula 6x end question Example 2 begin question Blanks qutext The function 1 x 2 is positive for values of x in the range 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 269 blank formula 1 lt x lt blank formula 1 end question Example 3 begin question Blanks qutext The maximum value of the function f x displaystyle frac x 1 2x 2 is blank formula 0 353553 0 0001 and th
11. O O EEE 2 MapleTA Administer Classes p a Maplesort System Homepage Create Class Welcome Jack Day My Profile Help Logout Class Details Course ID Class Name Instructor Jack Day School Description URL Registration Locked Featured Class Inherit content from None 1 GEEWTED RES Maple T A Demonstration Class Calculus 101 Cancel Submit Figure 2 1 Inherit Content from a Featured Class 3 Your class is added to the list of Classes I Am Instructing 4 To access the newly created class click the link to the class to bring you to the Class Homepage The classes that appear on the list that you can inherit content from are called featured classes See Also Shared Classes Overview page 13 2 1 Class Manager 9 Create a Child Class In addition to inheriting content from a featured class you can create a copy of any class for which you are the instructor To create a child class to create that class that includes questions and pre populated assignments from the parent class 1 Go to the Class Homepage for the class you want to share 2 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select Add Child Class 3 If desired click Change Instructor and select a new instructor from the system users Select the radio button beside the user and click Update to change the instructor 4 Complete the class registration form
12. When an assignment is opened for edit the system checks whether the assignment has associated student records in the Gradebook or is currently in use by a student The number of students currently using the assignment is displayed in the Active field of the assignment list in the Assignment Editor Ifthe assignment is currently in use the Locked Assignment icon is displayed beside the assignment name The questions in the assignment are locked so that you cannot edit them You can edit some of the policies of the assignment such as the time limit It is possible to force grade incomplete assignments so that you can edit the assignment However if a student is actively in the process of taking an assignment you cannot force grade the student s assignment Ifthe assignment is not currently active the assignment is locked for editing so that new active tests cannot be started during the editing process Students who try to start the assignment while it is locked are notified with a warning message See Also Assignment Types Overview page 33 Overview Using the Assignment Editor page 26 3 1 The Assignment Editor 23 Options in the Assignment Editor Assignment Name Points Type Availability Modified Active A 1g Demonstration of the Maple graded Question Type 25 0 Practice Unlimited s20105 o fe 2 By Demunsitation of Question Types 63 0 Practice Unlimited 6 20 05 0 3 fq MCassianment 8 0 Homew
13. Example 4 begin question numeric This question uses algorithmic variables qutext Compute the value of log var a Your answer must be correct to at least 5 decimal places answer var ans err 0 00001 code Sa rand 1 100 4 Sans log a The above code chooses a random value a between 1 and 100 to four significant figures The value of log a is then calculated end question Example 5 begin question numeric qutext A man is on the top of a tower that is 800 feet above ground How far can he see newline newline Use 3960 miles for the radius of the earth newline Express your answer to an accuracy of at least 6 significant digits answer 34 64134750325308 mi err 0 0001 Note Using digits 6 would allow no tolerance and would cause 182906 ft and 34 6413 mi to be graded incorrect because the values do not match the correct answer end question Example 6 begin question numeric If the ability to convert units is not an important part of the question do not use units qutext A cat is on the top of a tower that is 800 feet above ground How far in miles can it see newline newline Use 3960 miles for the radius of the earth newline Express your answer to an accuracy of at least 4 decimal places newline Do NOT include any units in your answer answer 34 64134750325308 err 0 0001 end question Example 7 begin quest
14. MapleTA Calculus 101 Register Users in this Class Maplesort System Homepage Class Homepage User Manager Register Users Welcome Jack Day My Profile Actions Content Manager Gradebook Help Logout v User Search search for system users to register in this class First Name Last Name User Login Student ID Email Match Starting with O Anywhere O Exact Case Sensitive Match Case Reset Fields Search Basic Search Advanced Search Select the system users to register into this class with the specified role User Role Mi Proctor O Student Register o aagate Alex Agate mp test com 5214956 admin Admin Istrator admin 123 com 101010 C akholodoy Artemz Kholodoy aaa jjj com 4568741357 o awestwell Ashley Westwell awestwell maplesoft com 434232 oO behamplain Bill Champlain mp test com 652q645 Figure 2 3 Add a Proctor to Your Class Note A user with the role of Proctor set by an administrator or an instructor with additional privileges has proctor privileges in any class in which he or she is not registered as a student This means that such a user does not need to be registered into the class to perform proctor duties in your class 2 3 The Class Web Site Editor 17 Deleting a Proctor To delete a proctor 1 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select User Manager 2 From the Actions menu select Remove Users 3 In the Search panel select the Proctor radio button and click S
15. See Also Multiple Choice Question Example Script page 296 Multiple Selection Questions in the Question Editor 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen 102 e 8 Authoring Methods for Questions a In the Question Type drop down box select Multiple selection b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d Click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen a In the text box enter the question statement b In the Choices for the answers text fields enter the possible choices and select the radio buttons corresponding to the correct answers To add additional choice boxes click Add Choices c Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question See Also Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 284 Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 296 Numeric Questions in the Question Editor 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Numeric b It is recommended that you enter a description in t
16. This method of presentation can provide inline student response cells anywhere within the question The question in Figure 9 10 demonstrates the power and flexibility of the question designer question type There are 6 individual response cells included each of which requires a different type of student response Notes e Response cells can appear anywhere within the formatted question statement including within tables e Response cells can consist of any individual question mode including response cells that handle text lenient or stringent string matching numbers formulas or any other question variety e Partial credit can be allowed for exact graded text or menu style entry cells 9 8 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions e 157 Here is a question using a symbolic formula blank Let y x What is the derivative of y with respect to x B D Enter only the expression for the derivative omitting y Try it The answer is 8x7 Here is a numeric blank style of question 3 8 Numeric questions can specify margin of error and significant figure precision The following numeric blanks question reqires a number and a unit dimension in its response Ifa cat walks 20f in 2min how fast is the cat walking Num Units Most standard equivalent unit dimensions are graded correctly by the system or you can specify your own table of unit equivalents to apply to a question This next question grades input in the form o
17. This option specifies labels for the axes The values of x and y must be strings The default labels are the names of the variables in the original function to be plotted if any The strings must be entered using left single quotes labeldirections x y This option specifies the direction in which labels are printed along the axes The values of x and y must be horizontal or vertical The default direction of any labels is horizontal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase legend s A legend for a plot can be specified by either a string or a list of strings When more than one curve is being plotted then they must be specified as a list and not a set and there must be a legend for each curve where the ith curve is associated with the ith legend The strings must be entered using left single quotes linestyle n Controls the dash pattern used to render lines in the plot The linestyle can be specified as either an integer between 1 and 4 or a name from the following list SOLID DOT DASH or DASHDOT The value must be in uppercase numpoints n Specifies the minimum number of points to be generated The default is 50 Note plot employs an adaptive plotting scheme which automatically does more work where the function values do not lie close to a straight line Hence plot often generates more than the minimum number of points resolution n Sets the horizontal display resolution of the device in pixels the default
18. To share content using a course module first create a course module by choosing the items you wish to include After you have created the course module save the course module to your computer as a ZIP file You can then share the course module with others 5 2 Creating a Course Module 63 To create anew CM 1 From your Class Homepage select the Content Manager menu and then select Course Modules 2 Click the New button 3 A table displays all the questions assignments and web folders holding resources for example image files for your class Select the course components to be included in your new course module e You can highlight multiple items in a list using Shift click for contiguous selections or Ctrl click for multiple individual selections e Use the gt button to add your selections to the list of included elements for your new course module e You can include any combination of questions assignments and web folders in your selected list e To select web resources for example images and other files that are referenced by your questions and assign ments select the folders that contain your resources Subfolders are automatically selected 4 When you are satisfied that the list on the right contains all the elements to be included in your new course module click OK 5 Specify a name for your course module Optionally you can enter descriptions for each course component You can also select descripti
19. a end question In this code there are variable type issues e All variables are floating point variables unless they are wrapped in an int or rint statement to make them integers for example m int 14 5 or in double quotes to make them strings for example s north s The statement a rint 11 creates an integer variable but the line a rint 11 1 creates a floating point variable as a result of the 1 operation The same is true for the definitions of b and c Using the above question equations in the form 2 0x 9 0 4 0 which is correct but not as simple as possible Change the code so that a b and c are integers Example 3 Further refinement of Example 2 begin question Formula qutext Find the solution of the linear equation var a x var b var c answer var ans code Sa int rint 12 1 b int rint 12 1 c int rint 12 1 ans c b a end question There is one more problem The variable a can equal 1 in which case the equation has the form 1x 5 8 To avoid this situation impose the condition that a be an integer between 2 and 12 Although c can be 0 or negative if b is 0 or negative the equation is again unsimplified Generalize the code to allow e to be any integer between 12 and 12 Example 4 begin question Formula qutext Find the solution of the linear equation 266 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX var a x var b
20. e Plotting Options for 2 D and 3 D Maple Plots Many options are available when generating a 2 D or 3 D Maple plot For more information see Setting Plot Options page 235 Displaying a Maple Plot To display a plot within a question use the plotmaple command 1 From the Question Editor Select Question Type screen click the Algorithm Add button 2 Enter the plotmaple algorithmic variable using the structure algorithmic variable name plotmaple plotstatement libname filename lib plotdevice gif jpeg plotoptions options 3 Click Preview or Refresh to preview the plot image See Figure 10 3 4 Click OK to return to the Question Editor Select Name and Type screen 5 Click Next 6 In the text field for the question type enter the text of the question along with the algorithmic variable name defined in step 2 Note The algorithmic variable can also be used in the feedback or hints section Using plot options you can specify the height and width of the image without losing any quality in the image For example a range 1 5 S myplot plotmaple plot a sin x x Pi Pi plotoptions height 250 width 250 With the plotmaple command you can specify whether you want the image saved as a GIF or JPEG Maple animations are animated GIFs so you must use GIF for an animation For example Smyanimation plotmaple plots animate sin a x x Pi Pi a 1 4 plotdevice gif You can use another algori
21. 1 0 05 which defines a tolerance of 5 of 2 is different from 2 2 1 0 05 which defines a tolerance of 5 of the sum 4 See Also Answer Tolerance Example Script page 285 Controlling Answer Tolerance page 183 10 14 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities Algorithmic question generation allows you to write questions in which specified variables are assigned random values according to defined ranges and conditions each time the question is reused in an assignment Using algorithmically generated variables within questions allows you to generate multiple question permutations from the same question stem Thus you can write a single stem or template question that can be reused The numbers and wording change to use new randomly determined values in different assignment attempts by the same student or different students The system allows you to create variables that use mathematical logical arguments to generate random numbers in questions where the data used in a question is determined by random selection from an entire scenario s data and the variables are based on lists or to use a combination of mathematical logical and list based variables to produce a randomized question See Also Rules for Naming Variables page 221 Tutorial Algorithmic Question page 241 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 Tutorial List based Variables page 242 218 10 Authoring Mathematical Ques
22. 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen fav From the Question Type drop down list select Matching a In the Question Description field enter an appropriate description of the matching question To include complicated mathematical expressions click the Equation Editor icon c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d Click Next 3 The Question Statement amp Matching screen opens a In the Text of the question field you can overwrite the default text with appropriate information b Enter an item to be matched in The Item field c Enter the matching information in the Matches with field Q Click Add The matching items are displayed in a shaded background beneath the Display this question in __ columns field Note If you click Finish the system displays the following message A matching question makes no sense without at least two items Click OK e Enter the number of columns in which to display the information in the Display this question in __ columns field f Add more matching questions by repeating steps 3b 3d g Click Finish to place a copy in the web site cache and preview your question See Also Matching Questions page 161 Question Types Available in the System page 131 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor Formula questions ar
23. 1 question Move the red disk to the point x Sy 1 answer Sx y 1 width 400 1 height 400 1 algorithm range 1 8 range 1 8 name Graph Coordinates editing useHTML PRPRPRPRP PRP x Y TPO EEEELI 25 D De B Aa Flash Question Authoring To create a Flash movie you will need Flash development software for example Adobe Flash CS3 and some fa miliarity with Flash programming Your flash movie must implement the following features e A pair of variables called response and locked should be declared e Whenever a student interacts with the movie and brings it to a new state that state should be translated into a text string and assigned to the variable response You are free to decide for yourself how this translation is done e When the Flash movie starts it reads the variable response and finds a string that was returned by a previous call to GetVariable response You must program the movie to initialize its appearance to the state consistent with that response The Flash movie also reads the variable locked This variable determines when a student is allowed to modify his her response When the value of locked is equal to true this signals to the Flash movie that the question is in feedback mode in this case the movie should present in a form suitable for feedback After creating the Flash movie upload it to a folder on the class web site as described in Flash Movies and Java Applets in Ques
24. 12 1 Using Script Files to Author Questions You can author and edit all question types using the system plain text script file syntax To create advanced questions Advanced Question Types page 178 and other problems that use the system API to produce interactive content you cannot use the Question Editor To create or edit script files for a question bank use e A text or HTML editor LaTeX See LaTeX Authoring Overview page 247 For some question types you must use LaTeX Note You can edit the script file for a question not question bank in the system Question Editor using the Edit Source func tionality It is recommended that you use the Question Editor Edit Source functionality only for minor editing To edit a question bank that was created in the Question Editor in a text or HTML editor export the question bank to your hard drive You can export any question bank in its plain text script format as a file with a qu file extension After editing the plain text script file import it and save the question bank into your class web site See Also Topic Structure within Question Banks page 118 Exporting Work to Your Hard Drive page 116 Opening a Saved Question Bank File page 120 12 2 Library of Example Scripts This section provides example script files for Algorithmically generated figure labels inserted in your static reference figure Creating Algorithmic Graphic La bels page 284 Algorithm
25. 133 150 280 Ntuples 274 Number 124 132 146 179 184 221 N N N umber following 276 Yumbers within Questions 239 vumeric 146 in Question Editor 102 Numeric Free Response 169 Index 311 Numeric Question 171 Numeric Question Types 179 Numeric Questions 179 215 276 in Question Editor 102 Numeric formula 124 numfmt 227 O Online Authoring 92 Online Help 5 Open Response Text based Questions 253 Operations 233 Order Assignment list 26 Ordered 124 133 139 Overview xvii 1 Course Modules 61 P p Biserial 55 p Value 55 Palette Questions 165 in Question Editor 103 Palettes 168 Partial credit 27 Maple graded questions 97 Multipart Questions 113 Tutorial Multipart Questions 112 Partial Credit Multipart Questions 163 Partial marks 27 Pascals 205 Password 69 Forgotten 71 Penalties in Mastery assignments 43 Performance data 58 Performance Feedback 128 129 Phrase questions 160 291 Physical Unit Equivalents Table 205 Physics engineering 183 Plain Number 124 146 Plain text question bank files 75 283 Planning Your Question Bank Project 75 Platforms 73 plotmaple 203 227 Plotting 148 203 227 applet 259 Displaying a Plot 201 Student Response 187 plotting 2 D options 235 3 D options 237 PNG 87 Points column 42 Pop up HTML reference 105 Precision 86 183 Previewing Assignments 26 Questions for selection 39 Questions in as
26. 2 The optional decoy terms are presented as extra choices Take care that they are not possible alternate correct answers decoy x 1 x 2 decoy x 3 x 2 Optionally specify the number of columns in which to arrange the display of data cols 3 end question See Also Matching Questions page 161 11 5 Basic Question Types in LaTeX 255 Multipart Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Multipart To make a multipart question declare a question of type Multipart and include other questions in its body Notes e Multipart questions can be nested inside other Multipart questions The conversion tool accepts only four levels of nesting begin question multipart begin question multipart beginiquestionjim itipart begin question multipart begin question multipart end question end question end question end question end question e Multipart questions can contain any question types as parts The parts of a question are numbered using lower case letters regardless of nesting level To use different labels use the numbering macro Its argument must be one of alpha a b c d the default setting Alpha A B C D roman i ii iii iv Roman I ID D IV arabic 1 2 3 4 none no numbering e By default each part receives equal weighting when the question is graded To specify a non
27. 224 e 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions if le a b Red Green returns Red if a lt b and Green otherwise if ne a b Red Green returns Red if a and b are not equal and Green otherwise See Also if a b c page 225 fact n fact n Returns factorial n If n is not an integer returns fact int n If n is negative returns 1 For example fact 4 returns 24 frac a b frac a b The frac a b structure typesets x y as a fraction in its lowest terms For example the fractions 4 8 and 2 6 are presented as 1 2 and 1 3 in simplest form frac a b returns a string that expresses the fraction a b in its lowest terms For example frac 12 15 returns 4 5 frac 12 3 returns 4 Note frac a b can be combined with mathml s to produce nicely typeset fractions For example mathml frac 8 12 displays wt 10 18 Functions and Arguments 225 gcd a b gcd a b Returns the greatest common divisor of a and b For example ged 12 15 returns 3 gt a b It a b gt a b Returns 1 0 if a is greater than b that is a gt b Otherwise it returns 0 0 1t a b Returns 1 0 if a is less than b that is a lt b Otherwise it returns 0 0 if a b c if a b c If a is nonzero it returns b Otherwise it returns c indexof k a b c d Returns the index of an item within a list the first item is in position 0 the second in position 1 and so on For
28. 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Assignment Editor Step 3 Setting Policies In Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor screen you can e Select the type of assignment e Decide when to make the assignment available to your class e Set feedback options for the assignment e Establish other grading policies Type of Assignment Assignments for Credit Results are Recorded There are three assignment types that record students results This is an assessment style session that records performance in the class Gradebook after students click Grade For recorded assignments students can return to view their assign ment results with exactly the same algorithmic data values in the future e Homework or Quiz Assignments page 34 is the default assignment type Proctored Exams page 35 Mastery Assignments page 36 Assignment Options e Rework the Same Assignment Option page 34 Proctored Exams page 35 Setting Mastery Policies page 43 Practice Assignment Types Results are not Recorded There are two assignment types that allow students to practice For practice assignments graded results are not recorded in the Gradebook Students cannot return to view their results later Anonymous Practice Assignments page 35 Study Session Assignments page 37 Type of Assignment Login PW Results Anonymous practice No session results are recorded Not required Not recorded Homework or Quiz All session
29. 33 Assignment 2 Assignment Type Homework or quiz Send email to No mailing set Pass Fail The pass level is 2 out of 3 0 Time permitted Time limitis 30 minutes ery version of the assignment asks the questions in the sam Displa Show 1 question per page versionin ala of the assignment asks the questions in the same Start No start time specified End No ending time specified Restrictions A student may take this assignment if he she has not made one or more attempts at Assignment 2 Questions Question 1 Q1 Question 2 Q2 Question 3 Q3 Feedback Show the final grade of the assignment Show correct answers on incorrect responses Always show comments Pass Feedback You have passed Fail Feedback You have failed Figure 3 11 Review Assignment Details See Also Setting Assignment Types page 42 Scheduling Assignments page 45 3 3 Assignment Types Assignment Types Overview You can create graded assessments homework quizzes or exams ungraded practice tests or quizzes or tutorial as signments with set criteria For details see e Homework or Quiz Assignments page 34 Proctored Exams page 35 Anonymous Practice Assignments page 35 Study Session and Mastery Assignments page 36 To take any assignment students must be registered in the class You can configure the number of questions on a page create test instruction sheets and headers and set policies fo
30. 4 The ClasssHOMepagse s ascias tency EAA E EE T E big oad nev E A SEERE 4 Using the System in the Classroom e reee a a E a a a a eea ea e a A a 5 Getting a l o DANE EE E E AE E E T TET 5 2 Creating and Managing Classes Seerp a E E E T E A E E AEE 7 DAW ETTR Ee Ta e 1e a E A E E E A E AA EE E E EEE EN EE Bt Ets T EKET aTe New A A AE S E E E E T T Registering Na aE D E E E E E E ET 10 Shared Classes e E A E RE stl a heck need adeno ht vanadate T E REN Balise 13 22s Mana e POC O S e a E a a a a a aa aae donee a a aE gab n aE 14 PAETE TTEN s R016 KO PAA E EE E E A E H SATE 16 Deleting a Proctor 3 62 E EE he E a E E E edad tole ees eet ge 17 2 3 The Class Web Site Editor teien ecto ten cscs EEE EE R EEE EEEE EE ee ete bees Ase eke es 17 Uploading Single Files 00 5322 a id a aa dhs whet noe a daa cid ooseada ves aa wade ea ra a nig cosas deakes 18 Uploading Multiple Files r cece vscanaties O05 osteo eben A o5 de SSaR STE San AE a Ts oh das yaa tigobees Shae esas Ee hs 18 Viewing or Deleting Files a 5 3 2 4 oposite A Bethe Sav heads Gaon din ba obs Ged whee fie ge OS Raat T 18 Working with Folders in the Class Web Site cccccceccceecc seen cece cece cece eeae eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeges 19 3 Creating and Managing Assignments cccccceeeceeece eee ee eee eee eeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeea essa esa eeaeeeaees 21 321 The Assignment E dO e tates dsecedacciats soe beans poate dda e be bede a a Padua
31. 7t 1 134 9 Question Types Question Type Description Example Responses Formula List Accepts an ordered list of numbers or formulas Paren 2 4 8 16 theses accepted but not recommended Grading is same as for Ntuple Explanatory text tells students to enter an ordered list of formulas or numbers separated by commas Multipart Formula Multiple questions arranged in parts a b c Otherwise operates like a formula question Matrix A rectangular array of entry boxes that accept numbers 3 4x and formulas sin x 6 Dimensioned formula Accepts algebraic formulas unit dimensions numeric sin x responses or any combination of these s m 6m cos x m s Blanks formula Question Mode blanks formula option qu x y mode blanks blank lt blank_number gt lt math_expression gt grader lt blank_number gt formula Description The blanks question type is versatile It can provide three different types of student response cells text fields drop down boxes and mathematical formula cells The blanks formula option provides a means for asking a fill in the blank question in which the answer is a mathematical formula The text inside a blank is removed and a formula entry cell is presented to students The only difference between a blanks formula question and a formula or multipart formula question is the presentation of the entry cell For blanks questions the entry cell app
32. Blanks Questions page 153 Formula page 137 Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 Graph Plotting Example Script The following example script creates an Multi Formula question with a graph qu 1 1 mode MultiFormula qu 1 1 question lt p class noindent gt What are the lt math xmlns http www w3 org 1998 Math MathML display inline gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt math gt intercepts of the graph shown lt p gt lt applet code applets grapher Graph width 250 height 250 archive graphing jar gt lt param name y1 value x 1 x 3 gt lt param name gridLines value 12 gt lt param name xMin value 6 gt lt param name xMax value 6 gt lt param name yMin value 6 gt lt param name yMax value 6 gt lt applet gt qu 1 1 answer 1 3 qu 1 1 info See Also Graph Plotting in LaTeX Questions page 259 Graph Sketching Question Example Script The following example scripts create Sketch questions qu 1 1 mode sketch qu 1 1 question lt p class noindent gt Sketch the graph of the function lt math xmlns http www w3 org 1998 Math MathML display inline gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt 1 lt mn gt lt math gt lt p gt qu 1 1 gridlines 4 qu 1 1 axes 2 2 2 2 qu 1 1 axes labeled true qu 1 1 axes background ImageBase qu 1 1 example 2 1 1 2 qu
33. Case sensitivity 158 Changing grades 53 Checkmark icon 170 Chemistry 135 Child classes Gradebook 53 Choose Name tab 23 Advanced button 38 Assignment name 28 Class Homepage 1 Guidelines 4 Class Name 9 Class Registration Locking and unlocking 10 Class roster Creating and uploading 11 File type 11 Class web site Flash movie 89 Images and reference files in questions 87 Uploading images and references files 87 Uploading multiple files 18 Uploading single files 18 Viewing or deleting files 18 Working with folders 19 Clickable 252 Clickable Image Question 87 154 Example script 288 Clickable Image Questions 93 Clickable imagemap 124 Clone Question 114 Cloned Questions 117 Coaching 128 Comma delimited 58 commas 139 Comment Deleting 84 Comment Field 129 Comment Field for Maple graded 80 96 140 Comments 78 122 213 Condition 222 Constant 132 136 269 Content Updates 13 Controlling Answer Format 182 Coordinates 280 COPY From Maple Worksheet 96 Copying Assignments 23 Copying questions 77 Copyright 303 Cos 233 Course ID 9 Course Module Creating 63 Deleting 67 Exporting 64 Importing and installing 65 Relative web references 67 Course Modules Viewing Details 66 Course Modules Overview 61 Create Course Module 63 multipart 100 New Class 7 Shared Class 14 Create Multiple Selection Questions Using Scripts 296 Creating a Course Module 63 Creating Pop Up Referen
34. Field Description Current Total Points The total number of points Original Total Points The total number of points originally assigned Active Assignments The number of assignments that are currently in progress Class Average The average score of all assignments taken Last modified The date and time the assignment was last modified Attempts The total number of assignments taken by students This number might be greater than the number of students if the assignment allows for multiple submissions of work Average Attempts The average number of attempts per student Item Statistics Click this link to view the item statistics for the assignment Histogram of Student Assign Click this link to view a histogram of the assignment results The histogram opens in a new window ment Scores From the Assignment Grades you can e Change the options in View Panel and refresh the view without performing another search Export any generated table of grades to a file by clicking Export to CSV e Go to the Item Statistics for the assignment e View a histogram of student assignment scores e Change the total points on the assignment e View assignment results for a question group in the assignment e Preview a question on the assignment e Access question details for a question in the assignment e Access details for a question group in the assignment If the assignment includes question groups these are indicated by
35. In the Assignment Editor move the mouse over the assignment name to be copied Six option buttons are dis played See Figure 3 2 Select copy Click this copied assignment link Copy of lt original assignment name gt appears in Assignment Name list Enter a new name in the Choose a name for your assignment field Make changes as necessary to the question set Select Questions tab and policies Set Policies tab Click the Review amp Finish tab and then Finish to save the assignment with the new name and updates 24 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Deleting Assignments Considerations BEFORE you delete an assignment e After scheduled assignment deadlines have passed the assignment is listed on the student s view of the assignment menu for your class but cannot be selected e Hiding an assignment or scheduling an assignment for a specific time period may allow you to achieve most of your objectives for deleting an assignment To delete an assignment Inthe Assignment Editor move the mouse over the assignment name to be deleted Six option buttons are displayed Click delete and a confirmation prompt appears If you click Yes the program removes the assignment from the list in the Assignment Editor screen and from lists of assignments elsewhere in the system Students will not be able to select the assignment from the list of assignments in the Class Homepage and you will not be abl
36. MathML tags are recommended for special scientific characters such as e Algebraic symbols e Greek letters and other variable labels e Equation elements including operators and arrows The system uses a cross platform MathML rendering technology to ensure that special characters rendered in MathML appear consistently on W3C compliant browsers To generate MathML tags that encode a specific character use one of the following authoring methods LaTeX Authoring Overview page 247 MathML Authoring with MathType page 197 e Editing with the Equation Editor page 188 For other special characters for example non English characters you can use any acceptable HTML tabs employing the Unicode expression for the character Note that some platforms and browsers that are non standard do not map Unicode HTML expressions correctly so results can be unpredictable Therefore it is recommended that you use MathML tags for all math and science content For more information see http www unicode org Important In other question fields not listed here you must avoid HTML and MathML tags and limit field content to plain text only Specifically HTML and MathML tags in the answer and algorithm field values are rejected by the system Typically these fields are used to provide commands to the system for processing the question or grading Hence they must be formatted according to the system command syntax 9 Question Types 9 1 Quest
37. Starting with O Anywhere O Exact Case Sensitive C match Case Authorization Mode Start Re enter Grade Startand Grade O Deny Access Unfiltered Assignment Filter Clear Selection Reset Fields Search Basic Search Advanced Search Authorize Authorize Which Assignment Permission to be Given start O Re enter O Grade Start and Grade O Deny Access a hpotter Harry Potter 697 false M hgranger Hermione Granger 519 false M rweasley Ronald Weasley 705 false 3 items found displaying all items 1 Authorize Figure 2 2 Proctor Tools For a list of proctors in your class select the Actions menu and then select User Manager In the Search panel select the Proctor User Role radio button and click Search A list of proctors is displayed See Also Proctored Exams page 35 16 2 Creating and Managing Classes Adding a Proctor To add a proctor to your class From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select User Manager From the Actions menu select Register Users Search for or select a user from the list to be registered as a proctor in your class Select the Proctor User Role radio button Click Register NH nA A U N e Now that user will be able to access your Class Homepage and use the Proctor Tools utility
38. inclusive For information on other Maple commands see your Maple documentation The Maple command randomize is included so that a different value is generated for each question instantiation You must include the randomize command in every Maple based variable definition That is it is required in the definition of exponent and coeff The Maple command int x exponent x calculates the correct answer which is displayed using the comment statement if the student response is incorrect The examples in Tutorial 1 can be converted to Maple Syntax questions by changing the type field value from formula to maple and changing allow2d to 0 for text entry mode For Maple Syntax questions it is recommended that you attempt to prevent a student from calculating the correct answer using Maple commands For more inform ation see Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions page 185 For an example plain text script that defines a Maple question with Maple plotting of the student response see Plotting a Student Response page 187 246 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Tutorial 2 You can also use Maple based algorithmic variables in other question types Formula Question The following plain text script defines a Formula question that uses Maple based variables EEEE sl PRPRPRPP WWWW Ww question What is the sum of a and b mode Formula name Maple based Variables in For
39. n rint 8 x rand 1 10 ans sig n x 240 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions qu 3 7 question Express the number x to n significant places qu 3 7 answer Sans See Also Controlling Answer Tolerance page 183 decimal n x sig n x int x page 223 Formula page 137 rand m n rand m n k page 228 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 230 Displaying the Dollar Sign in Questions The use of the is reserved for variable definitions in algorithms in the Maple T A question syntax To display a character in the text of your question use Displaying the Backslash Symbol in Questions The use of the backslash character is reserved in the Maple T A system question syntax To include a character in the text of your question use Text Strings in Variable Statements Statements defining variables can also include text strings Strings must be enclosed in double quotes Example qu 4 1 mode Formula qu 4 1 algorithm Sanimal switch rint 2 cat dog mass if int eq Sanimal cat rand 2 15 2 rand 10 30 2 velocity rand 2 5 2 qu 4 1 question A mass kg animal is running at velocity m s What is its kinetic energy qu 4 1 answer 1 2 mass velocity 2 In the test for the type of animal in the definition of mass it is required that the variable animal be enclosed in quotes Note The strings in the example
40. you also have access to the plotting capabilities of Maple You can use Maple to plot a student response or a function derived from a student response for example the definite integral of the student response for a Maple graded question type or display a plot for any question type You can assign partial grades allowing you to find common errors and reward partial credit You can also use functions and routines that are contained in a separate Maple Repository Maple Library You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions Maple graded Formula amp Maple Syntax Subtypes The Maple graded question type has two subtypes e Maple graded Formula e Maple Syntax Both the Maple graded Formula and Maple Syntax subtypes allow you to use Maple functions and expressions for example trigonometric functions log10 In abs sqrt diff int and Linear Algebra Determinant In addition to the full range of Maple functions you can use programming constructs to evaluate responses Difference Between Maple Formula and Formula Question Types Formula questions are very useful when the correct response is a straightforward mathematical expression using standard common functions and when the correct answer is easy to describe and easy to evaluate The Maple graded Formula subtype differs from the Formula question type e When writing a Maple graded Formula question you can use Maple functions and expressions in
41. 0 If m is an integer then this option controls the number of tickmarks that are placed on the x axis If m is a list of numeric values then tickmarks are placed only at the specified values If m is a list of equations v t where v is a numeric value and tis a name or string then a tickmark with the label t is placed at v If m is the name default then the default tickmark placement is applied Similarly n specifies the placement of y axis tickmarks This option can be replaced by the xtick marks m or ytickmarks n option if you wish to specify tickmarks for one axis only title t The title for the plot The value t must be a character string The default is no title You can create multi line titles for standard plots Use the characters n in the character string to denote the start of a new title line The strings must be entered using left single quotes 10 21 Setting Plot Options 237 Option Description view xmin xmax ymin ymax This option indicates the minimum and maximum coordinates of the curve to be displayed on the screen The default is the entire curve xtickmarks m ytickmarks n See the description for the tickmarks option See the description for the tickmarks option See Also plotmaple text page 227 3 D Plot Statement Options Options to the Maple plot3d function are given after the first three arguments as equations of the form option value F
42. 1 0 025 specifies a margin of error of 2 5 The system grades correct any response between 1 444 and 1 596 Example 5 50 1 1 1 specifies a margin of error of 110 The system grades correct any response between 5 and 105 Algorithmic Variables You can use a margin of error with answers that are algorithmic variables Consider a question in which the correct answer is assigned to answer Note The operator cannot be used in an algorithmic variable definition or other algorithmic statement Example 6 To specify an absolute margin of error of 0 1 use Sanswer 0 1 Example 7 To specify a percentage margin of error of 3 use answer 1 0 03 Using the Operator in Complex Expressions You can use the operator in complex expressions It is an arithmetic operator Example 8 2 1270 01 matches any response between 2 11 and 2 13 and 2 2 1220 01 matches any response between 4 22 and 4 26 Example 9 The ordinary rules of arithmetic for example the distributive rule apply 2 2 1220 01 is equivalent to 2 2 12 2 2 0 01 Example 10 You can specify very complicated ranges of numbers 10 14 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities 217 2 17 0 01 e 1 0772 03 1 0 5 Important If the exact answer is an expression not a simple formula number or variable ensure that you use parentheses to generate the correct answer Example 11 2 2
43. 1 There is no student Maple T A username or Maple T A password Students only need their university username and university password to log in to Maple T A 2 As the Maple T A administrator you don t have to worry about usernames passwords or resetting passwords Your IT group will do that Basic user profile information comes from the LDAP directory Your system administrator configures which information in the LDAP profile will be made available to Maple T A 7 2 Login and Forgotten Passwords with LDAP Login Anyone in the LDAP directory can use Maple T A The user simply logs in to Maple T A using his university username and password 1 A user enters his or her username and password 2 Maple T A presents these credentials to the LDAP server and the LDAP server performs authentication 3 If the credentials are rejected by the LDAP server login is denied If the credentials are accepted a If the user is already known to Maple T A profile information is acquired from the LDAP directory Maple T A s database is updated to reflect any changes b Ifthe user is not known to Maple T A the user is added to the Maple T A database retrieving profile inform ation from the LDAP directory Maple T A then displays a validation page for the user The user is given the opportunity to add profile information not supplied by the LDAP directory and must confirm the final profile information The login username and password are
44. 1 2 check linear check goes_through 0 1 end sketch end question Example 2 This example uses randomized variables begin question sketch code a int rand 2 6 a2 int Sa Sa Sxmax int 2 Sa x sqrt 2 S a qutext Sketch the graph of the function y x 2 var a2 begin sketch 4 var xmax var xmax 4 4 example var x 2 var a 1 0 0 var a 1 var x 2 check goes_through 0 0 amp amp goes_through var a 1 amp amp goes through var a 1 check slope_at 0 0 check var x 0 decreasing check 0 var x increasing check concave_up end sketch end question 262 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Including Graphic References in LaTeX Questions Including Graphics Using image You can insert an image in a LaTeX question The image macro is the recommended method for including graphics in a question If the file is available locally as an Encapsulated Postscript eps or epsf file it is included image calls epsfig to include the graphic You can also embed Maple plots in questions using the Question Editor Important Do not explicitly call epsfig Using epsfig directly does not ensure that proper Maple T A code results To include graphics 1 Select a location in your Maple T A class web site for graphics files It is recommended that you use a distinct folder for the images in each question bank Upload the graphic to your class web sit
45. 350 height 350 archive graphing jar gt lt param name y1 value x 1 x 3 x 5 gt lt param gt lt param name xMin value 2 gt lt param gt lt param name xMax value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name yMin value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name yMax value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name gridLines value 12 gt lt param gt lt applet gt qu 1 2 answer 3 1 5 eee se aes es See Also Graph Plotting Applet in Questions page 90 Plotting a Student Response page 187 Authoring Questions with Embedded Plots Example Script page 297 Graph Plotting in LaTeX Questions page 259 150 9 Question Types Restricted Formula Question Mode Restricted formula qu x y mode Restricted formula In the Restricted formula question type the correct answer is a formula that uses only basic operations for example arithmetic operations and sqrt You can use this for questions that require a formula without physical units that does not include trigonometric functions log In or abs and which is not an equation When authoring in the system Question Editor if you include a restricted function in the correct answer the system warns you that the function is not allowed in restricted mode Note If the answer is a number that is does not have any variables it is recommended that you specify in the question text whether an exact answer or an approximation is required In the case of an approxi
46. 82 8 Authoring Methods for Questions You can also use a Maple repository when generating random variables Click the Maple Repository button to import and link to a Maple repository Establishing Conditions Between Variables Ensure the variables always satisfy the condition equals v expr expr Set Conditions Between Variables You can also use the Algorithm Designer to set conditions that must be met when the system generates variable values 1 Enter the condition by a Entering two expressions b Selecting the relation Notes i Each expression you use must be a e Variable name for example x or monthly totals You do not need to use the or notation e Number for example 5 or 2 67 e Math expression or formula for example x 2 1 ii You must define variables referenced in the condition before defining the condition statement 2 To add the condition statement to the algorithm text box click OK 3 You can use the Algorithm Designer to define multiple condition statements See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 221 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 233 Working with Variable Data page 218 Adding and Editing Information Fields When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit information fields Information fields allow you to add information subfields to a ques
47. Algorithms 219 G G 205 ged 225 Getting help 5 Getting Started 2 GIF 87 93 243 Gif file Including in LaTeX Questions 262 Labeling in LaTeX 263 Global proctor 35 Grade 85 Grade in course computation 57 Grade reports 57 Gradebook 1 Add External Assignment 58 Assignment grades 51 Class grades 53 Deleted results 24 Item statistics 55 Overview 49 Search 50 Security 69 snapshots 57 Student statistics 52 Graded Free response 179 Grades Changing 53 Grading Essay questions 53 Free Response Text Questions 158 Math Input 181 Multiple selection question 164 Testing 85 Grading policy Grade report 57 Graph Plotting Applet 149 Graph Plotting in Plain Text 290 Graph Sketching Question Example Script 290 Graph sketching 260 Graphic Labels 284 Graphic eps 262 Graphic gif 262 Graphic jpg 262 Graphic pct 262 Graphics Creating pop ups 105 Including 262 Labeling 263 Graphics Elements 259 Graphing 148 260 Graphing Questions Authoring 297 Greater than condition 225 Greek Letters 130 Group Questions in the Question Repository 115 Gt 225 H Hide assignment 24 46 Hide assignment from view 24 Hints 83 122 128 129 Deleting 84 Hints during assignment 43 Homework or Quiz 34 HTML 130 168 HTML Formatting 107 Hz 205 l if 225 Image 87 Image files 73 Images 93 154 167 252 262 file names 87 Img src 87 Importing and Installing Course Module 6
48. Criterion 1 rule based field opens Specify the desired criteria 3 Save Changes to Criterion After you have specified the desired criteria click Back to save changes made to the criteria and return to the Set Policies tab Criterion Options The first drop down list gives a choice between has and has not The drop down list in the middle lists a range of states and actions as shown The drop down list on the right lists all of the assignments for the class including the assignment currently being edited e Adding an OR Criterion Click the Add alternative criterion button immediately below the list of assignments The program adds the list fields for another criterion e Adding an AND Criterion Click the Add additional criterion button at the bottom right of the form below the frame that encloses the criterion fields The program adds another criterion group in a separate frame Deleting a Criterion To delete an OR criterion click on the Remove criterion button inside the frame for that criterion group The program deletes the last criterion from the group You may have to change the settings for the remaining criteria in the group to set the requirements that you want To delete an AND criterion group click on the Remove criterion button at the bottom of the form below the last criterion group The program 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor 47 deletes the last group You may have to change the settings for th
49. Deselect all Ad 4 2 Completing the Square Definition and Examples Determining One to One Functions Algebraically Determining One to One Functions Graphically z _ Domain and Range of the Inverse Function o Completini Solving Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square Solving Quadratic Equations by Factoring View Questid C Completi testquestion The Quadratic Formula O COMMON vertex of a Parabola Select Question Group 2 Expand the groups and select the questions you want using the check boxes on the left Preview the question if ne cessary 3 Add individual questions e Click the add link to the right of the question e Select several questions using the check boxes and click the Add as Items button e Click the check boxes beside the topic name to select every question in the topic and click the Add as Items button Individual questions are included in every version of the assignment served to a student and you control question weighing individually 3 2 Tutorial Using the Assignment Editor 29 Deselect all Add as Items Add as Group Gr oup name View Question groups O Selected questions vi Y Completing the Square Completing the Square a 1 add Common Factoring and Completing the Square add Completing the Square a 1 add Completing the Square ax 2 bx c 4 add Completing the Square ax 2 bx c o add Figure 3 3 Add Questions to Assignment 4 Add a grou
50. E EEE A EE 177 Question Mode True False inne e a a a a a e a aa Eaa aaae 177 9 19 Advanced Question Types cocci ii oe a EEE E EAEEREN E E A iea 178 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions esssseeeesseseessesreserseestsserrrsserrrsresrrsersresessererssererseesresesreresseree gt 179 10 1 Authoring Mathematical Questions esneseeseesesseeeesseseessesreserserrrsrerrrssesreseesreseserressereesseseeser 179 Fundamental Capabilities seisein aaa ad a dedesdbeds aaa eneee elai 179 Mathematics Question Types nsesccseeciiii iii e EEEE EEE E EEEE E E pa 179 10 2 Basic Math Syntax in the System essssuseesseseessesresersersrsserrrssrsrrssrsresersertrsserressesersersresesererse 180 Writing Mathematical Expressions 0 secceeceeece ence eeeeeeceeeeeeeee cece cece eeae eee eeueeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeaeegas 180 Variable Names scxisvcctast anan ect davutbiet e a a e a a a iael ent detested aeS 180 Operator and Function Syntax sessioni eee eis inei E E E EEE EEEE E E A E p a 181 viii Contents 10 3 Understanding the Math Capabilities in the System cccceecceeceeecceeceeeceeeee seca secs eeaeeaeeaneennes 181 10 4 Student Responses and Grading ccc cece cece ence ence eeceeeceeeceeeceeeen essa eeea seca cess eee eeaeeeneeeeneeeneseeegaes 182 Student Responses np hank eats ee eGo oh Tea Aa IA ns eh eee 182 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions 0 cecceeceeeeeeeceeeceeeceeeceeece esse eeceea
51. Editor page 98 Matching Questions page 161 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Edit or page 98 Formula with Units page 139 dimensioned formula Equation page 137 e Formula page 137 Formula List page 139 Constants of Integration Questions page 136 formula mod c Multipart Formula page 146 Vectors of Formulas page 150 ntuple Restricted Formula page 150 Chemistry page 135 Multipart Questions in the Question Editor page 100 Multipart Questions page 162 Multiple Choice Questions in the Question Editor page 101 Multiple Selection Questions in the Question Editor page 101 Multiple Choice Questions page 163 Multiple Selection Questions page 164 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 93 Numeric Questions in the Question Editor page 102 Numeric page 146 with or without units Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions in the Question Edit Palette Questions page 165 or page 103 Question Designer Questions in the Question Editor page 104 Question Designer Questions page 166 True or False Questions in the Question Editor page 105 True or False Questions page 177 The online authoring module allows you to include complex content such as tables and other display formatting by using HTML in question files Important For information about system time outs and loss of data see Avoiding System Ti
52. In the Choose File dialog select the course module on your hard drive a network drive or an Internet resource and click Open Click Import to initiate the file upload The speed of the upload process depends on your internet connection Elements contained in your uploaded course that are also contained in your class are highlighted in yellow background with red type with a warning message WARNING The course module you have uploaded contains resources which will overwrite components that you already have installed The components which will overwrite your existing course components are highlighted in the table below If you do not want these course components erased and replaced with new ones press Cancel or ensure that they are not selected in the table below To proceed select the components that you want to install from the table below and press Install At this point you can install the new components in your class overwriting the original components or you can clear the check box adjacent to the duplicate element in the CM details prior to proceeding You can also select or 5 4 Importing and Installing a Course Module 65 clear other elements of the course module for installation into your class The default installation behavior is to install all course module elements however by clearing individual parts you can choose the specific elements you want to install Click Install to copy and install all the selected cou
53. LaTeX Questions page 263 e Graph sketching questions Graph Sketching Questions in LaTeX page 260 Graph Sketching Question Example Script page 290 e Applet questions Applet Questions page 151 Note While these question types cannot be created in the Question Editor it is possible to embed an applet graph in a question that is created in the Question Editor using the Edit Source functionality to edit the source code directly For more information see Graph Plotting Applet in Questions page 90 See Also Questions with Plots page 148 Graph Plotting in LaTeX Questions page 259 Graph Plotting Applet page 149 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions 10 1 Authoring Mathematical Questions Maple T A provides cross platform support for learning content that includes numeric or symbolic mathematics ex pressions and chemistry equations and expressions Fundamental Capabilities Integrated mathematics parser and Math Syntax for expressions Maple graded expressions Graded free response mathematics questions containing numeric responses equations formulas physical units and combinations of numbers formulas and units MathML support Inline expression rendering from graphing calculator syntax to formatted MathML expressions System evaluation of equivalent symbolic numeric equation and unit expressions Automatic recognition of scientific notation in the answer field and in student responses Control over precision sig
54. Maple page 201 80 8 Authoring Methods for Questions The Algorithm Designer Use the Algorithm Designer to simplify adding algorithmic variables 1 You can add any type of algorithmic statement In the appropriate section of the Algorithm Designer enter and select the required information in the template 2 To add the statement and refresh the values in the algorithm text box click OK 3 Repeat the above steps to add other statements For detailed information see the appropriate section Generating Random Number Variables page 80 Generating Condition based Variables page 80 e Using Maple to Generate Random Number Variables page 81 Establishing Conditions Between Variables page 82 Generating Random Number Variables is a random whole number between and in steps of var expr expr expr Figure 8 2 Create a Random Number Variable You can use the Algorithm Designer to create range based variables 1 Enter the variable name in the first cell You do not need to use the or notation 2 Select the type of number to generate whole number or decimal number generation with 1 to 8 decimal places 3 Enter the minimum and maximum values for the range and the increment step Note For each expression you can enter a e Variable name for example x or monthly totals You do not need to use the or notation e Number for example 5 or 2 67 e Math expression or formula
55. Names with braces 213 Variable Data 219 Algorithmic 284 In Algorithmic Questions 218 Tutorial Algorithmic Questions 241 With range 229 Variable group 243 Variables Conditions 223 e 221 In LaTeX 265 List based 240 Lists of variables 232 Setting conditions 222 Variables in Questions 229 Variables within variable statements 239 Vectors 124 132 Formulas 150 Vectors Questions 280 Versioning Scramble questions 42 Viewing Details of a Course Module 66 Viewing files 18 Visible assignment property 46 W Wb 205 Web files 73 Weber 205 Weighting Question 42 What s New xvii Exe ee CS Index 315 Windows 303 Worked Solution 83 WYSIWYG 168 Y Your Question Bank Project Planning 75 316 Index
56. Precision e Accept all answers that agree with the correct answer to 3 or another positive integer significant figures that is any response between 2 765 and 2 775 is correct For more information see Setting a Margin of Error For Maple graded questions see Significant Digits in Maple Questions page 185 Setting the Precision For the numeric question type you can specify that the student response exactly match the correct answer or specify that in addition to matching the value of your correct answer the student response have a specified number of significant digits Student responses that are correct up to the specified number of significant digits receive 50 credit For information on setting the precision for a numeric question in the Question Editor see Setting Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 86 For related plain text script file examples see Answer Tolerance Example Script page 285 For other formula questions unless a margin of error is specified the value of the student response must match that of the correct answer up to the tolerance specified by the tolerance field which is by default is the system floating point limit 1 0E 9 Setting a Margin of Error You can specify a margin of error in one of two ways e Percentage x This requires the student response to be within a specified percentage of the correct answer e Absolute x This requires the student response to be within a specified
57. Proctors e All clients require a Java enabled browser JavaScript and cookies must be enabled Instructors require Sun Java JRE 1 5 0 or later e Students require Sun Java 1 5 0 or later 303 304 e Appendix A Additional Information Windows 32 bit e Platforms Windows XP 2003 Vista 7 e Browsers Internet Explorer 6 x Firefox 3 0 300 MHz processor or better e 64 MB RAM or better Windows 64 bit e Platforms Windows XP Vista 7 Browsers Internet Explorer 6 x Firefox 3 0 300 MHz processor or better e 64 MB RAM or better Macintosh e Platform Mac OS X 10 5 or later e Browsers Firefox 3 0 Safari 5 0 333 MHz processor or better e 64 MB RAM or better The new question editor is not available on Safari In order to use the new editor on a Macintosh we recommend using Firefox On Safari you can only access the authoring environment from 2 5 1 Linux 32 bit e Platforms SUSE 10 3 11 1 11 2 Red Hat Enterprise 5 Ubuntu 8 04 10 04 e Browsers Firefox 3 0 300 MHz processor or better e 64 MB RAM or better Linux 64 bit e Platforms SUSE Enterprise 10 SUSE Enterprise 11 Red Hat Enterprise 5 Ubuntu 8 04 10 04 e Browsers Firefox 3 0 300 MHz processor or better e 64 MB RAM or better Internet Access e 56K Modem Dial up Connection Broadband Cable Modem or DSL Internet connection is recommended for optimal performance See Also Copyrights and Trademarks page 3
58. Required for ex act_sigd and tol er_sigd grading modes in numeric questions perc optional internal directive Percentage error or tolerance Required for toler_perc grading mode in numeric ques tions err optional internal directive Absolute error or toler ance Required for toler_sigd and tol er_abs grading modes in numeric questions tolerance optional internal directive Absolute tolerance for formula questions in cluding subtypes choice i optional Yes display can contain variables Contains the ith choice in a multiple choice or multiple selection question The values of i in a question must start at 1 and be consec utive comment or comment i optional Yes display can contain variables Contains feedback provided to students upon grading The comment i field provides response spe cific comments in mul tiple choice questions The values ofi in a question must start at 1 and be consecutive 124 8 Authoring Methods for Questions qu x y Required or optional lt field name gt Can include HTML or MathML Field Type Description Func tion hint i optional Yes display can contain variables Contains a hint The values of i in a question must start at 1 and be consecutive solution optional Yes display can contain variables Contains a worked solution Shown only in Study S
59. Using MathML to Create Formatted Math Expressions 197 MathML Authoring with MathType The Maple T A system can display and process MathML expressions as part of questions answers and feedback However creating MathML expressions in a plain text or HTML editor is extremely complicated so this topic discusses how to use Design Science MathType Version 6 to create expressions that can then be exported into MathML ex pressions for importing into your Maple T A content Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X users can use the Design Science MathType Version 6 to create MathML ex pressions To do so follow these steps 1 Launch MathType 2 Set the MathType MathML translator to export MathML as follows a From the menu select Preferences gt Translators to set MathML export b Set the options exactly as indicated in the MathType Dialog box below then click OK Select Translator MathML 2 0 no namespace radio button e Clear Include translator name in translation check box e Clear Include MathType data in translation check box I i x Please choose the type of data that will be placed on the Clipboard by the Cut and Copy commands Cancel C Equation object Windows OLE graphic Help S Translation to other language text Translator MathML 2 0 no namespace x Description MathML 2 0 no namespace translator v1 00 by Design Science Inc File MathML2 no namespace tdl Include tra
60. a Enter the text of the question To include complicated mathematical expressions click the Equation Editor icon in the toolbar This launches the Equation Editor In the Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer region The last line of code must evaluate to an expression that is stored to the variable SANSWER A Maple graded question must use valid Maple code to evaluate the answer Complete each line of code with a semicolon Add parentheses when appropriate for example x y 2 Use the long form name for all package functions for example VectorCalculus ArcLength In the Enter Maple code to grade the student response region A Maple graded question must use valid Maple code to evaluate the answer The last line of your question code must evaluate to a Boolean value true or false or a floating point number between 0 0 and 1 0 for partial grading By default use the Maple command evalb ANSWER SRESPONSE 0 as indicated where RESPONSE represents the student response and SANSWER represents the correct answer If you choose to alter the default grading syntax complete each line of code with a semicolon Use the long form name for all package functions for example VectorCalculus ArcLength Use RESPONSE to represent the student response in your code Before your code is processed by Maple RESPONSE is replaced by the student response Use SANSWER to represent the correct answer as you have
61. a EE EEST 42 Review amp Finish Tab 2 cceveyctaessveccntas divakev r g EE TE EE E EIEEE EEEE EE eee EE 47 4 Working with the Gradebook isseire a aae r een E E KE E OEN i aE Eaa eeh 49 4 Overview of the Gradebook oseni en el eee pa E EEN ides a AEA ee ee 49 Viewing Scores and Performing Gradebook Searches ccccccceeeceeece cece seca eec cess eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 49 Generating Grade Reports cccc255 cccnedig eisni Eoee EEEE EE EEEE EEES EE tte vcuvad veceustivedcuetie 49 4 2 Performing Gradebook Searches ccc cccccceecnee cece cece eee eee eee eee saaie NKA aa Eua kaei 50 Setting Search Criteria nerse oi ce eae vg een Sav EEEE AA EEE E daa EE E AE Queue ouNes 50 Setting View Critenar ts corcetsesieeds cra a a nese aah Mawar nh a aba ad REAN E EE TE ES 51 4 3 Searching for Class Grades oireeni ioei i in E E EAEE E E EEEE ddeaeus EEEE EE E 51 Viewing Assignment Grad S ssn eiae e a a r E E e AE E AN S eE 51 Changing Grades and Adding Comments c cecceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee secs esau eee eeneesneeeneeeeenaes 53 Changing the Total Points for an Assignment cccccceecceeceeeceeeceeeceeecaeece cece esse eee eeaeeeneeeneeeeenies 55 4 4 Searching for Item Statistics occis eisrean iiie as e SEEE oy ocaeh SEEE EEE EEEE EEE A E vied 55 4 5 Working with Grad REpoTtS oense nenea n a a aa ae ane t EuN eane iei 56 Creating New Grade Report anue iii EE vga EEEE E tek E E eee dete esl E
62. a Maple Syntax question As the author you can verify whether the student is using a Maple command to calculate the answer For details see Maple Syn tax page 143 Difference Between Text Entry and Symbolic Entry for Student Response in Maple Syntax Questions With a Maple Syntax question you can choose whether the students enter responses using Text mode or Symbol mode In both cases the response is sent to Maple where you can apply sophisticated grading methods to evaluate the student response e A student can enter math expressions including Matrices in a natural way using Symbol mode For example a student can enter a Matrix using a palette e A student is required to use Maple commands and expressions in a response to a question generated using Maple Syntax with the Text entry response option For details see Maple Syntax page 143 Guidelines for Using Maple Code for Maple graded Questions e A Maple graded question must use valid Maple code to evaluate the answer Complete each line of code with a semicolon The last line of your question code must evaluate to a Boolean value true or false or a floating point number between 0 0 and 1 1 for partial grading In many cases it is recommended that you use the Maple evalb com mand e Use the long form name for all package functions for example VectorCalculus ArcLength For an example that uses partial grading see Applying Partial Grading to Maple graded Questions p
63. a a A 57 Viewing a Grade RepoTtes sirenes a as E a oo es E A E EAE OEE AEAEE RTR 57 Publishing a Grade Report for Students cccceceeeceeeceneceeeceeeee cece cece eeae eee eeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeges 58 4 6 Exporting Reports and Performance Data ccc ceceeeccnecc eee eeee ence eeeeeceeeeeeecaeeee ceca eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaneranes 58 4 7 Adding an External Assignment cecceecc ence ence ence eeeeeeeeeeea cece eeseeeseeeae cena eeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeges 58 Adding External Grades using a Roster 0 ccccseceeecc ence eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeee cess ees eeueeeaneeneeeeeeeeeges 58 Adding External Grades Individually 0 0 0 0 0 ccccccecccecce cece eece cece eee ee se eeee een eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesegeeeaeeeaeegas 59 Modifying External Assignment Grades cccceceeec eee eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeecseeeaeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeranes 59 4 8 Forced Grading oeiia rio e ii voce don cy oe dds eds cada nevoddes bs adeuenbey Godda Via EEE E a cs eeeee Vie oecea Vee 59 S Course Modules si ctaveee a teen caus ie Ratt ahead stanton oat beens sh a Bede seseen cease sbens ese auaeade stad weimedanatueen a EAEI 61 5 1 Course Modul s Overview moci eecetess sean ccd eed vce o E EEE I E EE EEA Mi EEEE EEEE ECEE ER 61 Technical Information Expected Behaviors of Course Modules 0 cecceeceeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseaeeees 62 5 2 Creating a Course Module sescca iE E oc EAE R E vee vida Gedea da
64. a location in your Maple T A class web site for graphics files It is recommended that you use a distinct folder for the images in each question bank Upload the graphic to your class web site For information on uploading see Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site page 87 2 Insert the setImageBase directive near the top of your question bank TeX source file to specify the path to this location For example if your Maple T A classname is calculus205 and your graphics folder is the chapter folder of your Maple T A class web site use the directive setImageBase classes calculus205 chapter1 Note The final slash is optional To incorporate your image file into the question use the clickableimage environment The begin clickableimage command takes three arguments 1 The name of the image file ii The width of the image file in pixels iii The height of the image file in pixels To determine the width and height of the graphic use a third party graphics application for example Mi crosoft Paint To define the hotspots use the region macro The argument to the region macro is a comma delimited list of points specifying the vertices of the clickable region e The x and y coordinates are measured from the upper left corner of the graphic e More than one region command can be used Mark the correct region with an asterisk e Note that begin clickableimage end clickableimage must appea
65. a student s grade based on effort improvement or other subjective measure e You might choose to apply a curve based on the performance of the entire class As you change grades keep in mind the total and passing scores you have set for the assignment To change a student s grades 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook and click Class Grades 2 Select the assignment with the grade s you want to change 3 Click Submit 4 From the resulting report do one of the following e Click the name of a student that requires grade changes In the Student Assignment Details view click the Details link beside the assignment that requires changes e Click the name of a question that requires grade changes to view the Question Responses 5 Each question is displayed along with the student s response 54 4 Working with the Gradebook To update one grade e Locate the grade to be changed In the corresponding New Question Grade text box enter the new grade The grade should be a number between 0 0 and 1 0 with 1 0 meaning fully correct e You can add a comment in the Comment on Grade text box This region becomes writable after a new grade has been entered This comment is for your reference and is not seen by the student e Click Update Grade to save the change To update multiple grades at once e Select the questions using the check boxes on the left e Enter the new grade in the Update selected grades as field e Cli
66. agggaagaaaa 1 2 grader relaxed display text answer 1 Einstein credit 1 1 0 comment 1 Yes but you should specify his first name too answer 2 Albert Einstein comment 2 Exactly correct credit 2 1 0 answer 3 Stephen Hawking credit 3 0 25 comment 3 Your answer is partially correct Hawking helped to extend Albert Einstein s General Theory of Relativity qu 1 2 mode List qu 1 2 editing useHTML 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 293 Example 3 List Question Menu Display Exact Grader Options Sets a question with a menu list response object that uses the exact grader Specifies credit for each option in the list and a comment for each qu 1 3 question Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity 1 1 1 1 1 1 Herne aagggapagaga 1 23 3 3 3 3 23 3 grader exact display menu answer 1 Sir Isaac Newton credit 1 0 comment 1 No Sir Isaac Newton formed the theory of Newtonian gravitation that preceded lbert Einstein s General Theory of relativity answer 2 Albert Einstein comment 2 Correct credit 2 1 0 answer 3 Stephen Hawking credit 3 0 25 comment 3 Your answer is partially correct Hawking helped to extend Albert Einstein s General Theory of Relativity qu 1 3 mode List qu 1 3 editing useHTML See Also List Questions page 160 Maple graded Formula Question Example Script The following example
67. an answer or after submitting the question to be graded When the system grades a question in a Study Session assignment it states whether the response was correct or incorrect It does not display the correct answer The solution can be an essential teaching component in the session Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recom mended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits Example qu x y mode formula qu x y question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 1 qu x y answer 2x 3 130 8 Authoring Methods for Questions y hint 1 Differentiate the expression term by term y hint 2 The derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt is 2x y hint 3 The derivative of the constant term is zero x y solution d dx x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 1 d dx x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt d dx 3x d dx 1 2x 3 ages Special Characters in Questions The system supports the use of text HTML and MathML for the display of special characters and formatting in the following question fields topic name question choice hint e solution comment For maximum compatibility use only character tags from the HTML 4 0 specification
68. an interactive plot that is added to a question for dynamic plotting The applet displays axes for the graph even when the axes lie outside of the viewable area e Click and drag the graph area to bring up a cursor that displays the coordinates of the current point e Shift click and drag the graph area to shift the viewable area e Ctrl click and drag the graph to re scale the image topic Plot 1 mode Multi Formula 1 name X intercepts 1 editing useHTML 1 question lt p class noindent gt What are the lt math xmlns http www w3 org 1998 Math MathML display inline gt lt mi class MathClass ord gt x lt mi gt lt math gt intercepts of the graph shown lt p gt lt applet code applets grapher Graph width 350 height 350 archive graphing jar gt lt param name y1 value x 1 x 3 x 5 gt lt param gt lt param name xMin value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name xMax value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name yMin value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name yMax value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name gridLines value 12 gt lt param gt lt applet gt answer 3 1 5 mode Multi Formula name X intercepts editing useHTML question lt p class noindent gt What are the lt math xmlns http www w3 org 1998 Math MathML display inline gt lt mi class MathClass ord gt x lt mi gt lt math gt intercepts of the graph shown lt p gt lt applet code applets grapher Graph width
69. answer e Change uppercase Roman letters to lowercase Roman letters e Remove punctuation characters Do not change lowercase Roman letters or numbers 0 9 Replace all other characters with the ASCII space character e Convert strings of spaces to a single space character e Compare the modified student response to the answer field string indicated in the question Spaces in the response must correspond to spaces in the answer value For example if the answer field value is Albert Einstein then the following responses are graded correct Albert Einstein albert einstein 9 8 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions 159 e a lbert Ein stein However e Albert Einstein is incorrect as is Aleister of course Note The relaxed grader rules are not appropriate for international languages since non Roman characters are removed Exact Grader Rules The optional exact grader style that can be specified in List questions and Blanks questions modifies the above rules to recognize and enforce capitalization punctuation and other characters but still applies the above algorithm for handling spaces Again assuming the answer field value is Albert Einstein then the following answer is graded correct Albert Einstein However e aLBert eiNsteiN or albert einstein or a lbert Ein stein is graded wrong Palette Grader Rules The Palette question type is intended for use in chemistry content area
70. available score for the assignment for example out of 10 which varies according to the composition of your assignment For Homework and Proctored Exams if you choose to set a passing grade and you have selected to receive email notifications when students complete the assignment the emails will included information on whether the student meets the passing criteria You can customize the message students receive by clicking the Edit feedback messages link You can use the drop down menu to specify when the feedback is displayed Always Never or If the final grade is shown 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor 45 Setting a Time Limit You can set a time limit for an assignment or test If you set a limit the program shows the student the time remaining during the course of the test If the time limit expires during the test the system informs the student and does not allow the student to answer any more questions However the student can submit the test for grading Note The timer does not stop until the student runs out of time or clicks Grade The timer will continue to run even if the student clicks Quit and Save Setting the Number of Questions per Page By default the program displays one question per page when presenting an assignment to students You can use this option to deliver more than one question per page If you set the number of questions to be greater than 5 a warning dialog will appear If you have used q
71. can make on a particular assignment configure the assignment properties e As students work through a Mastery assignment they are shown information about their progress along with the requirements for the learning objective and the assignment This information is shown ina Progress Report box that updates each time they complete and grade a question Study Session Assignments Study Sessions draw from a bank of questions and serve repeated practice to students one question at a time These assignments are principally a teaching tool whereas other types of assignments might be considered testing tools al though all assignment types do both to some degree This assignment type is ideal for anonymous student driven self paced review Although you can create a specific content structure for study session assignments you can also allow the system to randomly select questions from a pool of questions Consequently Study Session assignments typically draw from Question Groups Students work at their own pace on questions drawn from a pool of instructor selected questions Where hints and solutions are part of the question content students can use them during Study Sessions Grading Questions are graded one at a time and results are not recorded in the Gradebook When the system grades the question it does not tell students the correct answer but simply whether they got the question correct If they answered correctly it proceeds to the ne
72. case sensitive You may use any combination of upper and lower case Maple T A stores the username as found in the LDAP directory and that username will appear in web pages and reports Forgotten Passwords If a user forgets his or her password the user must contact your university s IT group In an LDAP environment Maple T A does not manage passwords and the Maple T A course administrator cannot reset or retrieve passwords 71 72 7 Integrating Maple T A with an LDAP Server 7 3 User Manager Add Users with LDAP The Add User action on the Administer Users page allows you to locate individuals in the LDAP directory who are not in Maple T A and add them to Maple T A The effect is the same as if the user had logged in You can search for users by attribute username first name last name or email address You can use a as a wildcard For example Last Name an will display all names that start with an that are in the LDAP directory but not in Maple T A These searches are not case sensitive so an produces the same results as An Once you have created a list of users in this way you can select those you want to add to Maple T A 7 4 User Manager Import with LDAP When you import users in an LDAP Maple T A environment user information is verified and updated from the LDAP directory The roster import file must follow the specifications for Roster File Upload The usernames in the import file are used to match u
73. cece cecc cece eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeaeeea esse eeaeeeaneeaneeaaes 214 10 13 Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions seeeeeeececneeceueeeeeeecenaeeeeaes 215 Absolute ErrOTS 2 5 s2ccsccerseebeuy stecebedssoetetepdareeascestiny iitabend a e a a dabsbuds lech ctesantebbertevtaedens 215 Percentage Errors oeieo teo tek Fs Seach He RE E oes Rae as Seva ORL eae aes 216 Algorithmic Varia blesis 22 2505 ecc5 lt 5 o aie evens eiaal cea E an eeu ne Win Soot ous caadh a a SRS ae Seek abe 216 Using the Operator in Complex Expressions cccccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeegeseeseneegas 216 10 14 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities ccecceecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeca essa esse eeaeeeaeeaneeaees 217 10 15 How Does an Algorithmic Question Work in an Assignment cccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 218 Authoring eaae a e Scanetu cues steht ed enomieh xh E RE N AE uhh E E Ea T EA ER reat eet 218 Assignment Creation oeiioey enore g o EEE EEEE EEE dev caddie EEE SEEE E E ER E iaa 218 Assienment USeissys elein a ada teh cee a a aa iae a eia 218 10 16 Working with Variable Data nsnesessuesnsssesesseseeserseeserseesrsserressesresrrsresrsserrrsserreseesresersererssere 218 Types of Variables cisen oo his E et ates etic eda Aa E A ees Sond hee ance 218 Functions within Algorithms cccccic coceeate cceneds cc ov cane Ea EEEE cceeactbcceegeavanvcou
74. check the syntax of the student response e Ifthe answer is entered in Text mode it is sent directly to Maple for parsing The student is expected to enter syntactically correct Maple expressions Shortcuts such as 2x are marked incorrect As the author you can verify whether the student is using a Maple command to calculate the answer For more inform ation see Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions page 185 Maple Syntax with Symbolic Entry Response Option qu x y mode Maple type maple allow2d 2 For a tutorial on creating a Maple Syntax question with Symbolic mode response see Tutorial Maple Syntax Questions with Matrices page 107 Syntax Maple T A parses the student response entered in Symbol mode to convert the entered expression into Maple syntax which is sent to Maple Note that since a translation of the symbolic entry into a Maple Input expression takes place the technique of using RESPONSE to check whether students entered a specific command may not be appropriate This technique is only recommended for Maple Syntax questions with the Text entry response option Variables The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Matrix Question Mode Matrix qu mode x y matrix The Matrix question type generates an n by m matrix of text fields each
75. create a question that uses randomly generated data in a question you must define variables Maple generated plots to be included in questions are also defined in the Algorithm Editor using the plotmaple command When you define a plot in the Algorithm Editor you can use Preview to see the plot image verify the plot statement is correct and edit it if necessary For more information see Plotting Using Maple page 201 When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit algorithms To add or edit algorithms 1 In the Question Editor screen click Add or Edit in the Algorithm area 2 The Algorithm Editor opens See Figure 8 1 The buttons above the algorithm text box perform the following tasks e Cancel discards your additions or edits to the algorithms and returns you to the Question Editor screen e Clear removes all variable statements in the algorithm region Show Designer displays the Algorithm Designer After you click the Show Designer button the system replaces it with the Hide Designer button Clicking the Hide Designer button hides the Algorithm Designer Only one of the buttons is visible at a time e Refresh evaluates your variable definition and control statements and returns a value for each variable in the Variable Value region located below the algorithm text region If you define a plot in the Algorithm Editor the plot image is displayed You can verify the plot statement is correct and edit it if neces
76. e Update the Maple T A database with any new information in the roster by uploading a new class roster for an existing class e Remove students from a class by deleting a roster To view your user privileges click the My Profile link on the top right of the screen To create and upload a class roster 1 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select User Manager 2 From the Actions menu select Roster gt Import 3 Click Browse to find the text file containing the class roster The text file for example txt and rst can contain fields delimited by comma or tab characters You can upload an Excel spreadsheet which has been saved to a text file The file must have e One line for each student e A header for each included column that matches the specified headers Note If your university uses LDAP authentication the usernames in the import file should be their LDAP usernames In this case the passwords will be the LDAP passwords See LDAP Authentication page 71 4 Click Submit The records are displayed If there are any errors these are displayed 5 Click Enroll Roster The students are added to the system if appropriate AND registered in your class Print this list to record login and password information or click Create CSV to save this information to a file Important If this page is not printed automatically generated passwords will be lost Attributes Login must be at least one
77. ee en eeeaeeca cece esse esse een eeaeeaneeeneeeeegaes 72 7 4 User Manager Import with LDAP 0 00 0 0c ccc cicc cece cece cece cee c eee EEES EEEE EE EE E s 72 8 Authoring Methods for Questions cccceecceece eee ee cece eee eee eee nee ne ee ee ee eee eeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeee essa eeaeeeaeeenaes 73 8 1 Advanced Instructor Help icc cseceie ccna badeav codecs ed sces EE E EEEE EE crocs vdaves 73 8 2 Navigating the Question Repository cccccccecc eee eee eee eee eec eee eee eeeeeeaeeee esse esse esau eee eeeeeeeeereeegaes 73 8 3 Overview Authoring Methods for Question Banks 00 ccccccecceeece cece cece eece een eese eeu eeueeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 73 Question Banksin sochese steenen aso suede tsateoont a caveebed si tebereteadeboa slave dedeastobedd bebenctesscbesines 74 Uploading files ccccye e iii E Uae oc dt veeeedea Vehceu saves degen Sis AEE E EE tes cy aes Fla weave 74 File Formats Browsers and Platforms cccccecceeccneceneceeeceeeceeeeceeca seca eese esse esse eeueeeeeeeesereeeeeeeges 74 Which Method is Best for my Project cecceecceecc ence ence eeceeeeeeece cece cece eeae cess eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeseaeeges 74 8 4 Project Elements senera seveabeesd vebagus savesuude aehuet te cedhgelanebend saan deeds a aE Leceebev cwvheer AN tinh 75 Authoring When to Use the Question Editor ccc ccecceeeceeeceeeceeece cece cece eese eens eeee eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeneeaes 75 Authoring When to Use
78. equations begin align var a x var b y amp var e var c x var d y amp var f end align newline Your answer should be an ordered pair x y answer var ans1 var ans2 Note The amsmath package is needed to use the align environment code Saa int rint 5 2 b int rint 5 2 Sc int rint 5 2 d int rint 5 2 Se int rint 5 2 f int rint 5 2 detl int aa d b c Sa int if det1 aa Saat1 det int a d b c x int e d f b y int a f c e Sansx x S det Sansy y S det Sansxint int x det Sansyint int y det Sdetabs int abs det Sxabs int abs x yabs int abs y 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 281 Snumx int if int lt ansx 0 xabs xabs Snumy int if int lt S ansy 0 Syabs yabs ans1l if int eq ansx ansxint ansxint Snumx S detabs ans2 if int eq Sansy ansyint S ansyint Snumy S detabs The above code chooses random integer coefficients a b c d e and f a is modified if necessary so that the determinant of the system is nonzero The solution is calculated using Cramer s Rule Care is taken to display the answer coordinates correctly end question See Also Formula List Questions in LaTeX page 271 282 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX 12 Plain Text Script Authoring
79. extra instructional benefit to be derived from showing the student the correct formula instead of the final answer If you do not use the comment field in your question definition the default system behavior after grading is to display the value of the answer field To return the formula assign it to the answer field If the answer field is defined by a formula using variables the system displays a formula with algorithmically generated data substituted for the variables Example 1 If a student gives the wrong answer to the question qu 1 topic Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers qu 1 1 mode Formula qu 1 1 name Kinetic energy of random object qu 1 1 algorithm Smass decimal 1 rand 1 10 velocity decimal 1 rand 10 15 qu 1 1 question An object of mass mass kg is moving at a speed of velocity m s What is its kinetic energy in joules qu 1 1 answer 1 2 mass velocity 2 the system displays the correct answer as Correct answer 1 2 5 4 11 3 2 assuming that the randomization set mass 5 4 and velocity 11 3 Displaying the Calculated Final Answer In some cases you will prefer to return only the final answer To return only the final answer 1 Do not use the comment field in your question definition 2 Create a variable ans that holds the formula for the answer 3 Use the ans variable in the answer field instead of the formula for the answer Example 2 If a student gives the wrong a
80. for full credit and then allow more vague criteria for low credit Updating Example 1 on List Question Example Script if the answers and credits are changed to qu 1 1 answer 1 E e instein qu 1 1 credit 1 1 0 qu 1 1 answer 2 Ele qu 1 1 credit 2 0 1 woe then Einstein and einstein receive full credit and any other response beginning with E or e receives 10 If the order of the two criteria is reversed it is impossible to receive full credit See Also Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 List Question Example Script page 292 9 11 Matching Questions Question Mode Matching qu x y mode Matching Matching questions display two lists A student must match each element of the first list with an element in the second list Matching question types allow only 1 to 1 matches in the correct answer Matches of 1 element to many are not available in the system As an alternative consider using Multiple Choice or Multiple Selection questions The elements can be HTML compatible reference objects for example images The system displays the elements of the first list in rows of 3 by default Each element has a drop box that contains numbers relating to the elements from the second list which are listed below Example The following algorithmically generated Matching question uses images not text for matching pairs mode Matching name
81. gcd e ee 21 Overview The Assignment Editor Screen cccceecceeceeeceeeceeeceeeee ceca cece eeae esas eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeges 21 Options in the Assignment Editor gerseen a cece eee E EEE seca eeee esse esse eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeges 23 Adding New Assignments sereins s nieee erann pnas eee eee eee een een eE anie EEE roaa raan ENEA EAE E EERS 23 Copying Assignments E a a aa oa Does Soh a E A E e a ea 23 Deleting Assignments AA E E E E E E E 24 Editing Assieninents pisos nee a a a aa a E Ilene eae 25 Previewing Assignments re e a a a a e e a e a a a io Ea eiaa 26 Printing ASS A S A a As Bae clap Balak Fee A a hs 26 Controlling the Sequence of Listed Assignments sses eseesessesserersserresersresrrserrrssererssesresresrerrsseree gt 26 Overview Using the Assignment Editor cccecccecceecc ence eeceeceeeeeeeceeeca seca sees eeee eeu eeneeeeeseneeeeeges 26 Assigning Partial Credite mie eee odor aa a ede Oost a sold SateuiG Oda os wed Sea A cage cede S aeaa En eee 27 3 2 Tutorial Using the Assignment Editor 0 cccccecccece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeea esse eeaeeaeeeaneeaaes 28 Assignment Editor Step 1 Choose a Name for the Assignment ccsceceeecenneeeeeececeeeeeueeeeeeseeaueees 28 Assignment Editor Step 2 Select Questions cccccccecceeec cece eece ees eeee een eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeges 28 Assignment Editor Step 3 Setting Policies ccc cece cece cece e
82. graded Questions You can modify Maple graded questions to allow grading between 0 0 and 1 0 for partial credit Note grading must be done using a floating point number Rational numbers are not accepted Table 8 1 shows a simple application of the partial credit feature Table 8 1 Maple graded Question with Partial Credit Text for the question Solve for x in the following equation 3x 6 12 Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer solve 3 x 6 12 x Maple code to grade the student response if SRESPONSE 6 then 0 5 else evalb RESPONSE SANSWER 0 end if Copying Content from the Maple Worksheet to Maple T A 1 From a Maple worksheet select the code to be copied 2 From the Maple menu select Copy 3 In Maple T A right click Control click on Macintosh and paste the contents into the appropriate box 4 Rename the response value to RESPONSE 5 Add to all algorithmic variables See Also Creating a New Question or Editing an Existing Question page 76 Displaying a Maple Plot page 201 Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 294 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 204 98 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Matching Questions in the Question Editor The Matching question type allows only 1 to 1 matches One to many matches are not available in the system with this question type To create a Matching question
83. gt To upload an updated roster for a class You can update profile information through roster uploads Follow the same steps as for creating and importing a roster To update a roster only the login username field is required To remove students from a class From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select User Manager From the Actions menu select Roster gt Delete Select the file containing the users you want to remove from your class roster To export a roster Click on Export options CSV to open or save the class roster to a CSV comma delimited file The User Manager You can select students to register in your class from a list of system users All the students you want to register must already have an account in the system You can search for users that satisfy particular criteria To register users using search criteria 6 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select User Manager From the Actions menu select Register Users 7 Enter search criteria to narrow the list of users down or to search for a particular student 8 Select the check boxes beside the students you want to register in your class 9 Click Register 2 1 Class Manager 13 Shared Classes You can share your questions resources and assignments with other instructors Class sharing is an ideal way to manage multiple class sections of a large course using common questions and assignments ranging from pra
84. gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt mi gt dx lt mi gt lt math gt is qu 1 1 part 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 part 1 answer Sk qu 1 1 part 1 mode Multiple Choice qu 1 1 part 1 choice 3 zero qu 1 1 part 1 choice 2 negative qu 1 1 part 1 choice 1 positive qu 1 1 part 2 part 2 question Use the indefinite integral above to compute lt math gt lt msubsup gt lt mo gt amp Integral lt mo gt lt mn gt a lt mn gt lt mn gt a lt mn gt lt msubsup gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt mi gt dx lt mi gt lt math gt qu 1 1 part 2 weighting 1 1 qu 1 1 part 2 question In the second part check your answer by computing the integral qu 1 1 part 2 editing useHTML 296 12 Plain Text Script Authoring qu 1 1 part 2 numbering roman qu 1 1 part 2 part 1 mode Formula Mod C qu 1 1 part 2 part 2 mode Formula qu 1 1 part 2 part 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 part 2 part 2 answer S a nplus a nplus nplus qu 1 1 part 2 mode Multipart qu 1 1 part 2 part 2 editing useHTML qu 1 1 part 2 part 1 question Evaluate lt math gt lt mo gt amp Integral lt mo gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt mi gt dx lt mi gt lt math gt qu 1 1 part 2 part 1 answer x nplus nplus qu 1 1 part 3 question The geometric argument in the first part was based on the fact that lt math gt lt
85. hand side of the equation and a formula that does not involve that variable on the right hand side That is you cannot specify an implicit for mula This restriction does not apply to students enter ing their answers Blanks formula option One or more entry boxes that accept numbers and for in line formula mulas inserted into a section of text Blanks can be in expressions serted into any standard HTML including tables Numeric Accepts numbers in decimal form Scientific notation 4 7 10 is allowed but formulas are not allowed Also allows you to specify required physical units Maple For information see Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Formula Mod C Numbers and formulas Accepts two answers as equi x ln x valent if they differ by a constant number x ln x 1 Multi Formula Accepts an unordered list of numbers or formulas as a 4 5x 3 list of numbers and formulas separated by semicolons The answer must match the terms of the list in any or der Explanatory text tells students to enter any order of numbers or formulas separated by semicolons Ntuple For questions about Cartesian coordinates or vectors Accepts an ordered list of number or formulas separated by commas for example a Cartesian point or a vector Parentheses are recommended but not required Explan atory text tells students to enter a list of formulas separ ated by commas enclosed in parentheses 2 4t
86. in name This allows you to use multiple word names without the underscore character Note The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Functions within Algorithms page 219 10 17 Generating Random Numbers in Questions The algorithm syntax in the system allows you to generate random numbers in a variety of ways depending on your requirements and preferences This table summarizes functions related to random number generation Table 10 9 Random Number Generators m m k m 2k m q k where q is the largest integer rint m n k Function Range of Operation Example Description rint n 0 n 1 rint 3 Returns a random integer between 0 and n 1 inclusive Generates n 0 1 or2 variati ons rint m n m n 1 rint 3 6 Returns a random integer between m and n 1 inclusive Generates 3 4 or 5 n m variations rint 3 12 3 Returns a random integer between mand n 1 inclusive in steps ofk such that m q k lt n k 7 3 6 0r9 Generates approximately n m k variations range n 1l n range 3 Returns a random integer between 1 and n inclusive Generates n 1 2 or3 variations range m n m n range 3 6 Returns a random integer between m and n inclusive Generates n 3 4 5 or 6 m 1 variations m mt k m 2k m q k where q is the largest integer such that m
87. into multipart question only after you are finished For details on editing multipart questions see Tutorial Working with Multipart Ques tions page 112 Multipart Questions Partial Credit Assigning partial credit in multipart questions is closely related to establishing point values for the individual parts during construction of the question in the Question Editor As you build a multipart question in the Question Editor you can assign a question weight to each part of the question In this way you control partial credit in multipart questions See Also Multipart Questions in the Question Editor page 100 Partial Credit and Weighted Scoring page 113 Tutorial Working with Multipart Questions page 112 Multipart Questions Sequencing Parts When creating a multipart question identify the source question for each part e To select questions as parts you can add them individually or select multiple questions from a single topic using the check boxes beside the questions e Ifyou select multiple questions from the same topic during the same authoring session the multipart question authoring tool in the Question Editor inserts each question part in the same order in which it appears in the source topic See Also Multipart Questions in the Question Editor page 100 9 13 Multiple Choice Questions Question Mode multiple choice non permuting multiple choice qu x y mode multiple choice qu x y mode non permuting m
88. is n 200 The value of n is used to determine when the adaptive plotting scheme ter minates A higher value results in more function evaluations for non smooth functions sample A list of values which is to be used for the initial sampling of the function s When coupled with adaptive false this option allows explicit control over the function evaluations performed by plot scaling s Controls the scaling of the graph as constrained or unconstrained The default value is unconstrained The value can be in lowercase or uppercase style s symbol s The interpolation style must be one of line patch patchnogrid or point The default is line The value can be in lowercase or uppercase The point style plots points only line interpolates between the points patch uses the patch style for plots containing polygons and patchnogrid is the patch style without the grid lines Symbol for points in the plot where the value s is one of box circle cross dia mond or point The value can be lowercase or uppercase Note If the style is set to point the default symbol is plot device specific symbolsize n thickness n tickmarks m n The size in points of a symbol used in plotting can be given by a positive integer This does not affect the symbol POINT The default symbol size is 10 This option specifies the thickness of lines in the plot The thickness n must be a non negative integer The default thickness is
89. k page 230 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 221 Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k The range function return random integers range n The range n function generates a random integer in the range 1 n inclusive There are n numbers in that range Hence it is a selection of one number from a choice of n range m n The range m n function generates a random integer in the range m n inclusive range m n k The range m n k function generates a random integer in the range m m k m q k inclusive where q is the largest integer such that m q k lt n That is range n range 1 n range 1 n 1 Examples range 3 returns 1 2 or 3 range 2 3 returns 2 or 3 range 0 7 3 returns 0 3 or 6 range 0 8 3 returns 0 3 or 6 range 0 9 3 returns 0 3 6 or 9 Note The rint function returns random numbers in the range 0 n 1 inclusive See Also rand m n rand m n k page 228 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 230 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 221 230 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions rank n a b c d Returns the nth largest element item from a list Numbering starts at 1 For example rank 3 2 4 6 5 7 returns 5 See Also indexof k a b c d page 225 switch n a b c page 232 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k The rint function
90. kinetic lt i gt and lt i gt static lt i gt friction See Also Ungraded Essay Questions page 155 Fill in the Blank Question Example Script The following example script creates a fill in the blank Blanks question This question uses the in line style of presenting the student response entry cell To place the student response entry cell on a separate line following the question use the Short Phrase question mode qu 1 topic Blanks Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Blanks qu 1 1 question Select red from the drop down box lt 1 gt lt br gt Enter red or green in the text field lt 2 gt lt br gt Enter 3 or 4 in the formula box lt 3 gt blank 1 red green blue blank 2 red green blank 3 3 4 grader 1 menu grader 2 text grader 3 formula agaraae Notes e To display multiple entry cells use the lt n gt structure in the text of the question where n corresponds to the number of the entry cell The drop down box in Blank 1 allows the student to select from a list of options red green or blue The text field in Blank 2 requires that the student enter a text response that exactly matches the correct answer Note The text question subtype can contain a list of correct answers to allow for more than one correct answer e The formula text field in Blank 3 requires that the student enter a formula or number without units 290 e 12 Plain Text Script Authoring See Also
91. msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt math gt is an lt 1 gt function 1 1 part 3 extra Sothertype 1 1 part 3 editing useHTML 1 1 part 3 blank 1 S type 1 1 part 3 mode Complete Sentence a2aa See Also Multipart Questions page 162 Multiple Choice Question Example Script The following example script creates a Multiple Choice question topic Multiple Choice Question Example Script mode Multiple Choice name Type of Point editing useHTML question For f x x 4 x 1 x 3 classify the point with x coordinate 2 3 1 3 37 1 2 answer 2 choice 1 global minimum choice 2 local minimum choice 3 inflection point choice 4 local maximum choice 5 global maximum choice 6 none of the above aagauggaaaas See Also Multiple Choice Questions page 163 Multiple Selection Question Example Script The following example script creates a Multiple Selection question 1 topic Multiple Selection Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Multiple Selection qu 1 1 name Characterization of function at a point qu 1 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 question Classify f x x 3 3x 2 4 at the point with x coordinate 2 lt p gt lt i gt Choose all that apply lt i gt lt p gt qu 1 1 answer 2 5 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 297 choice 1 negative choice 2 zero choice 3 positive choice 4 increasing choice 5 extrem
92. must be presented with exactly this number of significant figures C Accept i erl E g To accept any number between 2 74 and 2 76 set erto be 0 01 Accept i kin nth place nfi E g Set amp to 2 and nto 3 to accept only 2 73 2 74 2 75 2 76 and 2 77 Accept perc E g To accept any number within 10 ofthe correct answer enter 10 for perc Figure 8 4 Specify Answer Precision and Tolerance in a Numeric Question Specifying Precision To require that the student response exactly matches the value of the correct answer to floating point limits approximately 8 decimal places select Require absolute accuracy For example if the correct answer is 2 77 the response 2 7701 is graded incorrect e To require that the student response contains a specific number of significant digits and exactly matches the value of the correct answer select Figures and then select the number of significant digits from the drop down box Student responses that are correct up to the specified number of significant digits receive 50 credit Important Figures does not specify a margin of error If you specify a correct answer value in the answer value text field with more significant digits than the number selected in the Figures drop down box all student responses are graded incorrect For example if you specify 2 771 as the correct answer value and select 3 in the Figures drop down box 2 77 is incorr
93. number always comes first For example x 2 becomes 2x e Multiplication by 0 becomes 0 For example 0 x becomes 0 e Multiplication by 1 and 1 handled correctly For example 1 x becomes x e Division of two numbers simplified e Denominator is always positive For example 3 2 becomes 3 2 e Quotient of two integers is always put in lowest terms For example 3 6 becomes 1 2 and 6 3 becomes 2 200 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions The best place to use these functions is in in line expressions For example consider the algorithm a range 10 10 b range 10 10 c range 10 10 d range 10 10 condition ne a c b d You can set the question as follows Solve the simultaneous linear equations mathml a x Sb y 0 and mathml c x Sd y 0 Exceptions to Automatic Simplification There may be situations in which the simplifications performed by mathml f may go beyond what you want For example you might want to typeset 2 3 4 x literally Automatic simplification is the system default To override the system defaults use the optional numeric arguments for the mathml f function which indicates that it is not to simplify math as follows There are two pieces of mathml f behavior that can be controlled by a numeric argument e Whether to enclose the generated MathML in lt math gt tags the default is to do so e Whether to simplify math expressions the default is to do so Syn
94. of which accepts a number or formula It is similar to the blanks formula question type 9 2 Math Question Types 145 Matrix questions must be created in LaTeX or in a plain text qu file You must specify a unique matrix as the correct solution Note It is recommended that you use the Maple Syntax question type for questions that will have a matrix response Maple Syntax questions provide more flexibility than the Matrix questions in question authoring and grading With the Maple Syntax question type e Rather than showing the student with a specific size of matrix with a blank for each entry the student can select the appropriate size of the matrix in their answer for instance using a Palette e By sending the entire matrix to Maple for grading you can evaluate properties of the matrix such as whether it is invertible or symmetric e Partial grading is possible See Also Matrix Questions in LaTeX page 274 Multi Formula Question Mode multi formula qu x y mode multi formula In the multi formula question type the correct student response is an unordered list of formulas Use this for any unordered list of formulas or numbers You can use the full range of functions in the formulas that is all trigonometric functions log In abs and sqrt Important You must use semicolons to separate the items in the correct answer for example 1 12 12 If you use commas in the correct answer the system treats the quest
95. or otherwise relate em with the base SI unit m in your table Include Table specific Help Optionally there can be a line qu env numeric tablename help http myhelpurl where myhelpurl is the URL of a page with help information on the units in the table Using a Custom Table of Unit Equivalents in a Question To use a table of units include the following statement in the question definition of any Numeric question in your question bank qu lt topic_number gt lt question_number gt units lt tablename gt Replacing Derived Units with Custom Units in Units Table When custom units are used in a question the custom units are automatically appended to the table of base and derived units available to students To instead replace the derived units in this table with the custom units base units are always displayed include the following statement in the question definition qu lt topic_number gt lt question_number gt appendUnits false See Also Using a Table of Units page 205 212 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Numeric page 146 10 11 Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers After grading for questions answered incorrectly you can display the e calculated value of the answer field e formula used to define the answer Depending on your instructional objectives you can display one or both Displaying the answer Field Formula In some cases you may feel that there is
96. privileges in those classes in which he or she is enrolled as a student and he or she will have instructor privileges in the class that he or she is instructing School optional The name of your school Description URL optional You can provide the URL of a web page with additional information about the class Registration Locked Registration is locked by default preventing students from enrolling themselves in the class Open registration allows students in the system to enroll themselves in the class 10 2 Creating and Managing Classes Featured Class Marking a class as a featured class allows for the creation of child classes that inherit content from this class Inherit Content From You can inherit content from a featured class This gives you access to questions assignments quizzes and tests from the featured class Registering Users in a Class You can register users in a class by e Allowing students to register themselves for your course e Creating and uploading a class roster e Using the User Manager If you allow self registration students can register for you class using the Find classes open for registration link on the System Homepage Class rosters are an efficient way to add a large number of students to your course at once The user manager can be used to search for and add selected students individually To register students in your course they must have an account in the system Generally your s
97. provided in the previous field From the Select the type of expression you want to accept field select Formula or Maple Syntax To learn about the differences between Formula and Maple Syntax expression types see Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 If you selected Maple syntax from the Text Symbolic entry field select Text entry only if you want students to type their response in a text region or Symbolic entry only if you want students to use the Equation Editor to enter their response For more information on this option and the advantages of each entry mode see Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Optional Upload a Maple repository For instructions see Using a Maple Repository page 90 Optional Enter code to enable plotting of the student response Use RESPONSE to represent the student response in your code Before your code is processed by Maple RESPONSE is replaced by the student response The last line must be a Maple plot command 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 97 h Note You can copy content from a Maple worksheet or a Maple code text file to be used in a Maple graded question See Copying Content from the Maple Worksheet to Maple T A below i Click Finish For more information on Maple code refer to your Maple system documentation See Also Editing with the Equation Editor page 188 Plotting a Student Response page 187 Applying Partial Grading to Maple
98. q k lt n range m n k range 3 12 3 3 6 9 or 12 Returns a random integer between m and n inclusive in steps of k Generates approximately n m k variations rand m n rand 0 5 9 5 all real numbers between 0 5 and 9 5 inclusive Returns a random real number between m and n inclusive 222 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Function Range of Operation Example Description rand m n k m n expressed to k signific rand 0 5 9 5 3 Returns a random real number ant figures between m and n inclusive ex all real numbers between 0 5 and 9 5 inclusive expressed to 3 significant figures pressed to k significant figures For details on each of these functions see Functions and Arguments page 222 In addition to Maple T A s built in functions you can access Maple commands Maple provides many randomization commands The following table lists selected randomization commands in Maple For more information on Maple functions that can be used to generate random numbers refer to your Maple documentation Table 10 10 Maple Randomization Commands Maple Function Use rand generate a random 12 digit non negative integer or a random integer within a spe cified range inclusive randpoly random polynomial generator LinearAlgebra RandomMatrix construct a random Matrix LinearAlgebra RandomVector construct a random Vector Ra
99. reference URLs inside your questions are converted to a portable format so that when you install the CM in a new class these can be automatically set to the new class web site address by the system as part of the installation process Access Course Modules from the Class Homepage by selecting the Content Manager menu and then selecting Course Modules In the Course Modules screen a list of the currently installed CMs for your class is displayed along with these options The list is empty initially See Figure 5 1 Ma leTA Jack s Class Course Modules oY amp Map Manlesoft System Homepage Class Homepage Course Modules Welcome Jack Day My Profile Actions Content Manager Gradebook Help Logout New View Details Import Export Delete The following course modules are installed in your class o Course Module Description Jem i assignments Oo CM2 tests and quizes Figure 5 1 Create Import Export or Delete Course Modules 61 62 5 Course Modules New Create a new CM View Details Select one or more existing CMs from the list and view their individual contents questions assignments and resources Import Upload a CM from your hard drive Export Select one or more existing CMs from the list and save them to your hard drive Delete Select one or more existing CMs from the list and delete them The advantage of using course modules rather than question banks or featured c
100. results are recorded Required Recorded C Always rework the same assignment on return C offer printable version of assignment Proctored Exam Requires proctor authorization to grade Required Recorded O Also require proctor sign in to start session Mastery dialog Control progress question by question Required Recorded Edit mastery policies Study session dialog Flashcard style learning Not required Not recorded Figure 3 5 Setting the Assignment Type Feedback During the assignment you can e Provide hints e Show the question comment if they exist e Allow students to check grades and receive feedback 3 2 Tutorial Using the Assignment Editor 31 After the assignment is graded Show the final grade and show the correct answer are default settings Other options for after the assignment include e Receiving email reports whenever a student completes an assignment of type Homework Quiz or Proctored Exam The email will contain the class name assignment student name and their grade e Showing the question comment if it exists e Restricting feedback until a specified date Restricting feedback until the assignment due date is useful if you want to prevent students who finish the assignment early from giving answers to other students Feedback During the assignment C Show hints C Allow students to check grades and feedback Foreach question Never show the correctanswer Never show
101. script creates a Maple graded question using the Formula subtype PRPRPHPP PP PR sarees eeeeeeeee topic Maple Formula Question Example Script PRPRPHPRP PPP NNNNNDNDN question What is the derivative of x 2 with respect to x maple evalb SRESPONSE diff x 2 x type formula mode Maple allow2d 1 comment The correct answer is 2 x name Derivative Maple Formula editing useHTML question What is the integral of 2 x with respect to x maple evalb diff S RESPONSE x 2 x type formula mode Maple comment The correct answer is x 2 name Integral Maple Formula editing useHTML To return feedback to a student if the response is incorrect you must use the comment field For more information see Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 294 See Also Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Plotting a Student Response page 187 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 294 e 12 Plain Text Script Authoring Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question The following example script returns feedback to the student including a comment in a Maple formula question Note When a student response is incorrect Maple question subtypes can return feedback You must enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer by using the ANSWER variable See Maple graded questions in the Question Editor topic Maple Comment Exam
102. set its value in the assignment as 10 points the value for the question parts would be Part 1 5 7 x 10 total points 7 14 points Part 2 1 7 x 10 total points 1 43 points Part 3 1 7 x 10 total points 1 43 points Total 10 00 points See Also Multipart Questions in the Question Editor page 100 Multipart Questions Sequencing Parts page 163 8 7 Question Repository To access the question repository from the Class Homepage select Content Manager gt Question Repository The question repository is used to create organize and search for questions The default view of the question repository shows your private questions organized by groups and subgroups You can also search public shared questions either from a specific class or by all authors Searching for Questions in the Question Repository You can search for questions by group question type keyword or info fields group view questions within a particular question group in the question repository question type find questions by question type e keyword search all questions for any question that contains a keyword within the text of the question This is a case sensitive search e info field search the information fields of questions Some questions may not belong to any group To search for these questions select Questions not in groups You can also view your shadowed questions and inherited questions To perform a search s
103. sign in by giving a login name and password Note To give authorization remotely the proctor must login and access the Proctor Tools utility under the Actions menu See Also Adding a Proctor page 16 Managing Proctors page 14 Anonymous Practice Assignments Anonymous Practice assignments are similar to Homework or Quiz assignments however results are not recorded in the Gradebook Any number of questions can be included and the assignment is delivered in an instructor specified sequence or scrambled Graded assignment reports are produced upon conclusion of the assignment but results are not recorded in the Gradebook Students can view their results at the end of the session no permanent record is maintained Results can be printed but are only available for as long as a student displays them 36 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Study Session and Mastery Assignments Study Session and Mastery assignments usually draw from a large pool of assignment material often algorithmically generated to produce limitless question permutations There is no pre established number of questions for either Mastery or Study Session assignments questions are drawn from pools throughout the study session Assignments are delivered one question at a time and the student submits each question for grading individually and immediately instead of having the entire test graded at the end These assignments are also sometimes
104. that can be applied better control over the specification of multiple correct answers and the ability to return partial credit for answers that are not 100 correct Authoring Free Response Questions The easiest way to create Blanks free response questions is by using the Question Editor but you can also author List questions using the LaTeX authoring or plain text scripting methods Key Word or Phrase Questions Although similar to these question types key word or phrase questions use a different grading approach for evaluating student responses in which student responses are evaluated for the presence of an identified word or phrase anywhere within the student response See Also Blanks Questions page 153 Free Response Fill in the Blank Questions in the Question Editor page 95 Palette Questions page 165 Key Word or Phrase Questions page 160 List Questions page 160 Math Question Types Overview page 132 Short Phrase Questions page 177 Fill in the Blank Question Example Script page 289 Rules for Grading Free Response Questions By default text based free response question types including List Questions Blanks Questions and Short Phrase questions apply standard rules when grading student responses Standard grading behavior applies the relaxed grader style Relaxed Grader Rules The process for evaluating student responses against the correct answer is as follows With the student response and correct
105. the Assignment Editor list of assignments for your class where your new assignment is displayed in the list of all class assignments Additions or changes you have made during this session are also displayed Canceling Assignment Creation To cancel assignment creation 1 In the Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor click Cancel 2 You are asked to confirm that you want to discard the assignment and modifications you have made To discard the assignment click OK You return to the Assignment Editor list of assignments The assignment is not saved To continue editing the assignment click Cancel Reviewing Assignment Details In the Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor you can review settings for your assignment and preview the assignment questions To change settings 3 Click the appropriate Assignment Editor tab to return to the tab where the option is set If you click on the high lighted link for a policy it will tell you where this setting can be accessed 4 Make the desired modifications and proceed to the Review amp Finish tab 48 3 Creating and Managing Assignments 4 Working with the Gradebook 4 1 Overview of the Gradebook The Gradebook has four primary functions e Viewing and analyzing scores and statistics for students assignments and question items e Reviewing student results e Creating customized grade reports that reflect your grading policy These grade reports can b
106. the Maple graded question screen the Select the type of expression you want to accept field lists the Maple graded Formula option as simply Formula Guidelines The student should not use Maple commands in the response For an explanation see Syntax and Student Responses below The instructor must write code such that the student does not have to use a trailing semicolon in the response For example evalb RESPONSE factor x 2 1 as a single line of code allows the student to respond with x 1 x 1 omitting the trailing semicolon This is especially important as questions created using the Maple graded Formula question subtype are not obvious Maple questions from the student s perspective A non Maple student user can answer a Maple graded Formula question type without knowing Maple syntax Syntax Maple T A verifies the student response using a basic syntax checker e Ifthe answer is entered in Text mode the formula syntax checker assesses the response changes expressions to Maple syntax for example 2x becomes 2 x and reports errors if the expression is not a formula It then generates a Maple statement e Ifthe answer is created using the Equation Editor a MathML expression is parsed the syntax checker is run to ensure the answer is of type formula and then a Maple statement is generated Student Responses You do not need to explicitly check that the student response is a formula For example you do not need
107. the comment field For more information see Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 294 See Also Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Plotting a Student Response page 187 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 295 Multipart Question Example Script Multipart questions can consist of any combination of questions as parts including nested multipart questions The following example script creates a Multipart question that contains a nested Multipart question qu 1 topic Multipart Question Example Script mode Multipart name lt b gt Full multipart question featuring nested multipart lt b gt editing useHTML qu 1 1 algorithm n int rand 5 15 Sa int rand 1 10 Snminus int n 1 Snplus int n 1 isEven int eq n 2 int n 2 k if S isEven 1 3 PPR PPP 22g type if isEven even odd Sothertype if isEven odd even qu 1 1 question This question concerns the integral of the function lt math gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt math gt qu 1 1 weighting 1 1 1 qu 1 1 numbering alpha qu 1 1 part 1 question In the first part use a geometric argument to decide whether lt math gt lt msubsup gt lt mo gt amp Integral lt mo gt lt mn gt a lt mn gt lt mn gt a lt mn gt lt msubsup gt lt msup gt lt mi
108. the most common ones for people to use in addressing images that are stored in their class but it is possible that you have used a different addressing scheme You might also want to delete strings if there are addresses you do not want to be replaced For example if you intend to always refer to the copies of images stored on that particular class that is you are not copying the images you might want to leave the URLs like http server name classes yourclass in place 68 5 Course Modules 6 Administering Maple T A 6 1 Changing Your Password 1 From the System Homepage click the My Profile link located above the Logout link 2 Click the Password Update button 3 Enter your new password confirm your new password and click Submit 6 2 Editing Your Profile You can change your password but only an administrator can change your profile information 6 3 Deleting Student Records To delete a student record 1 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select User Manager 2 From the Actions menu select Remove Users 3 Select the check box next to the user s you want to remove from the class Click Remove Important Removing a user from your class removes all of that student s records from the Gradebook See Also Class Rosters page 11 6 4 Security Issues to Consider It is important to protect your Gradebook and test questions Review the following security suggestions for Instructor Passwo
109. the numeric list Click Enter again to display a third hint and so on 4 Click Save 5 To add your changes to the cached question proceed to the Question Display screen by clicking Next and then click Finish See Also Hints Coaching and Performance Feedback page 128 Adding and Editing a Solution When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit the worked solution Note Information in this field is only presented to students when the question is worked in a Study Session assignment 84 8 Authoring Methods for Questions To add or edit the solution 1 On the Question Editor screen click Add or Edit in the Solution area 2 Enter or edit the solution in the Text Editor region 3 Click Save 4 To add your changes to the cached question proceed to the Question Display screen by clicking Next and then click Finish See Also Using Complete Solutions Study Session Assignments page 129 Deleting a Comment Information Field Hint or Solution To remove a comment hint information field or solution Open an existing question from the Question Repository Click the Edit button Click the Edit in the Feedback Information Fields Hints or Solution area Delete the text in the entry region Click Save Dy ee RS Se The system returns to the default behavior when grading the question See Also Question Fields page 122 Editing Question Source Files It is not recommend
110. the system from this pool during your assignment Question groups are useful in designing a Mastery assignment To add questions as a group 1 In the Assignment Editor Select Questions tab select a source test bank from the Question Group drop down list 2 Expand the groups into individual questions 3 From the left frame of the Select Questions tab select questions using the check boxes 4 Enter a name in the Group name box Note For a Mastery assignment these names are shown to the student in the progress report shown after each question is graded 5 Click the Add as Group button to add the questions into your assignment as a group or question pool See Also Mastery Assignments page 36 Expanding Groups to View Individual Questions After selecting a source question bank the groups for that bank appear in the eft frame of the Select Questions tab of the Assignment Editor screen To display questions in a group 1 Click the p icon to expand the group When expanded the icon changes to w 2 To close the group and its question contents click w Delete Questions from Assignments To delete questions that have been selected for inclusion in an assignment 1 In the right frame of the Select Questions tab select questions using the check boxes to the left of the question name 2 Click Delete Merge Questions into Question Groups You can merge individual questions or question groups into a single question gro
111. the text of the student response is checked for key words The system ignores other text extra white space and capitalization in the student response In the correct answer identify keywords by enclosing them in parentheses The complete text of your correct answer omitting parentheses is used as feedback if the student response is incorrect The following example script creates a Key Words question qu 1 topic Key Words Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Key Words qu 1 1 name lt b gt Translation into French four houses lt b gt qu 1 1 question lt b gt Translate into French lt b gt lt p gt four houses lt p gt e qu 1 1 answer The French phrase for four houses is quatre maisons See Also Key Word or Phrase Questions page 160 Labeling Graphics in Questions Example Script The following example scripts create an Numeric question with a labeled graph qu 1 5 mode Numeric qu 1 5 question lt p class noindent gt A ball is thrown upward from the top of a 40 foot high tower at an initial velocity of 64 feet second The graph of the height of the ball versus time is shown below What is the maximum height of the ball in feet Express your answer to an accuracy of at least 3 significant figures 292 e 12 Plain Text Script Authoring lt p gt lt applet code applets labelImage LabelImage width 250 height 200 gt lt param name image value ImageBase ball gif gt lt param n
112. this box is checked Figure 3 9 Visibility Optional Create Rules between Assignments You can restrict access to an assignment so that only students meeting certain criteria can take the assignment Set criteria by clicking the Advanced button When you have completed your assignment rules and policies go to Step 4 Review amp Finish Criterion 1 has passed Assignment 1 v or has made one or more attempts at Assignment 2 v Add alternative criterion Add additional criterion Figure 3 10 Set Criteria for Assignments Assignment Editor Step 4 Review amp Finish In the Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor you can review assignment summary information including e Assignment Type Questions Selected e Scheduled Availability e Rules and policies you established Previewing Questions To preview a question click the related link while in the Assignment Editor Editing Options If you want to make a change clicking the link for each category returns you to the appropriate Assignment Editor tab e If your assignment is ready to save click Finish to return to the Assignment Editor where you will view your list of assignments with the new assignment displayed in the list Your edits are immediately saved to your class records If you set up your assignment to be immediately available to students it appears in the list presented to them in the Class Homepage 3 3 Assignment Types
113. times you can select which result to include in your report For example if you select all best the search results display each attempt but only the best grade is used when computing the mean median and item statistics e Progress show completed assignments assignments in progress or assignments that need to be reviewed e Date Range specify a date range Assignments completed within that date range are included 4 3 Searching for Class Grades 51 Setting View Criteria The view panel is used to specify what data is included in the results After performing a search you can change the options in View Panel and refresh the view without performing another search Customize the display of the search results using these options e Rows control the number of rows of students displayed per page e Class Name show the class name e Style indicate the presentation style for grades number percent or letter grades e Grade Data display assignment details such as the date and time the assignment was started and finished the time used to complete the assignment and the number of attempts e User Data specify what student identification information to display e Summary Data display assignment summary data such as total points number of attempts mean and median for the assignment You can export any generated table of grades to a file by clicking Export to CSV Note The mean and median are cal
114. toolbar 2 In the Equation Editor dialog right click Control click on Macintosh the 2 D editor region to launch the Equation Editor palette You can also add an expression using keyboard shortcuts 3 Click OK Keyboard Shortcuts The Equation Editor accepts keyboard shortcuts Table 10 2 Keyboard Shortcuts for the Equation Editor Result Shortcut Characters Fraction Superscript caret Subscript _ underscore key Pre superscript Ctrl Pre subscript Ctrl _ Template Shortcuts A second set of keyboard shortcuts handles the insertion of templates The Tab key cycles the cursor through the open template blanks in an expression 190 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions e Enter the first few characters of an expression or symbol name and select Ctrl Space Command Space on Macintosh to insert the expression or symbol name or to display a list of commands to complete the entry Equation Editor Palette The Maple T A system uses a Equation Editor for creating and displaying symbolic characters and expressions The palette question type enables you to use customized Math editor toolbars and palettes in creating student response objects Using the Equation Editor Palette The palette is used to insert equation templates and symbols The standard palette contains one main panel organized into four categories layout templates expression templates relational palettes and symbol pal
115. uniform weighting use the weighting macro prior to the begin question for the first part The weighting macro requires one argument a comma delimited list of non negative integers specifying the relative values assigned to each part Example begin question Multipart weighting 1 2 The value of part b is twice that of part a qutext Answer the following questions part a begin question Formula qutext Differentiate the function displaystyle f x frac x 1 x 2 answer 1 x 2 1 x 2 2 end question part b begin question Multipart The 2 3 of the points assigned to part b are split evenly between its subparts because weighting is not used numbering roman These are subparts i and ii part i begin question Ntuple qutext Find the absolute minimum point on the graph of the function displaystyle f x frac x 1 x 2 answer 1 1 2 end question 256 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX part ii begin question Ntuple qutext Find the absolute maximum point on the graph of the function displaystyle f x frac x 1 x 2 answer 1 1 2 end question end question end question See Also Multipart Questions page 162 Multiple Choice Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Multiple Choice Nonpermuting Multiple Choice The Multiple Choice and Nonpermuting Multiple Choice question types create a question and a
116. var c answer var ans code Sa int rint 11 2 b int rint 12 1 Sc int rint 25 12 ans c b a end question There is another minor problem The answer ans is a floating point number The system grades the question properly but the displayed feedback may not have the correct form If the student gives an incorrect response the correct answer is displayed as a potentially inexact floating point number for example 666666667 instead of 2 3 To solve the problem use a string variable to display the answer as a fraction Example 5 begin question Formula qutext Find the solution of the linear equation var a x var b var c answer var ans code Sa int rint 11 2 b int rint 12 1 c int rint 25 12 num int c b Sans S num a end question Note Writing ans c b a displays answers of the form 11 6 3 First calculate the numerator and store it as an integer in num and then create the fraction with the string num a This last change introduces a new problem The system displays correct answers of the form 4 2 or 3 3 To make integer answers display as integers implement one more change Example 6 Final refinement of the question begin question Formula qutext Find the solution of the linear equation var a x var b var c answer var ans code Sa int rint 11 2 b int r
117. version of your question You can also upload a saved version of your question from your hard drive to your client 78 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Important If you stop interacting with the system for more than a few minutes it is recommended that you save your question to the repository The question persistence time is controlled by the system administrator To change its value contact your administrator Adding and Editing Comments When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit the comment To add or edit a comment 1 On the Question Editor screen click Add or Edit in the Feedback area 2 Enter or edit the comment in the Text Editor Comments can include HTML formatted text J avaScript symbolic math expressions algorithmic variables inserted objects and more To add or edit HTML formatted text click the Source button E Source in the menu bar 3 Click Save 4 To add your changes to the cached question proceed to the Question Display screen by clicking Next and then click Finish See Also Text Formatting in Questions page 107 Comments and Performance Feedback page 129 Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 294 Adding and Editing Algorithms For every question type you can use algorithmically generated variables in question statements answers hints or feedback Using variables in questions you can generate variations on a single template question To
118. wish to use and click Add to Groups Select one or more question groups By adding a public question to one of your question groups you shadow the question To clone a question 1 In the Question Repository find the questions Public or Private that you wish to clone 2 Click the clone icon 4 located beside a question Or select the check box beside the questions you wish to clone and click Clone Note Newly cloned questions may not belong to a group In that case you can find these questions by selecting Questions not in groups You can then add them to a group Inherited questions are not obtained individually A child class inherits content from the parent class Thus in a child class inherited questions automatically appear in your question repository For more information see Shared Classes Overview page 13 See Also Course Modules page 61 Creating a Shared Class page 14 8 9 Question Banks What is a Question Bank Question banks are plain text files with a qu extension which store sets of Maple T A questions Question banks are organized into topics which contain individual questions Use topics to organize questions for example to match the structure of your course Topics can also indicate learning objectives key topics or other organizational schemes Using the questions in question banks you can create assignments Topic Structure within Question Banks Each question bank consists of topic
119. 03 Index Symbols dollar Sign 240 qu files 75 116 qu files for question banks 283 2 D plot options 235 2 9E8 204 3 D plot options 237 operator 127 215 233 A Absolute Value Function 204 Accessing the Assignment Editor Screen 21 Add External Assignment 58 Adding and Deleting Elements in a Course Module 66 Adding assignment 23 Adding Questions in Assignment Editor Add individual questions 38 Add questions as a group 39 Advanced button Assignment Name tab 38 Set Assignment Policies tab 46 Text on Results Page field 38 Advanced Question Types Applets 178 Algebraic Symbols 130 Algorithm 233 241 Algorithm authoring 218 229 Algorithm Editor 219 Algorithmic Question Capabilities 217 Algorithmic variables Details evaluation 239 Algorithmically generated 78 219 Formula question 284 Multiple selection question 284 Algorithmically generated Variables 245 Algorithms 78 122 176 219 221 243 265 Defined in the Algorithm Designer 80 allow2d 143 Annotations Creating an assignment annotation 40 Uses 40 Anonymous practice 35 Answer Field 127 Answer field evaluation 239 Answer Region 170 Answers 85 122 125 127 184 213 215 233 239 Defining correct responses 181 API 178 API for Questions 288 Applet 89 124 plotting 259 Applet Questions 151 Authoring 288 Applets grapher Graph 297 Arccos 180 233 Arcsin 180 233 Arctan 180 233 Assigning partial credit
120. 08 J e The plain text script for this question created algorithmically is qu 1 1 mode Multipart Formula qu 1 1 algorithm m decimal 1 rand 0 5 1 0 v decimal 0 rand 10 15 Sansa decimal 2 m S v Sansb decimal 2 1 2 m v 2 qu 1 1 question A ball of mass m kg is thrown at a speed of v m s lt br gt a What is its momentum lt br gt b What is its kinetic energy qu 1 1 answer Sansa Sansb qu 1 1 comment Sansa kg m s is its momentum lt br gt ansb J is its kinetic energy Note that the algorithm field and variable definitions have been added e The variables are represented by alphanumeric names that must start with a followed by an alphanumeric sequence that consists of at least one letter The first character in the name of the variable must be a letter not a number e Variables are defined in a series of statements resembling equations of the form Svariable lt formula gt 242 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions e Each variable definition is separated by a semicolon the final semicolon in a series of variable definitions is optional The syntax of the formula is similar to the standard graphing calculator syntax used throughout by the system with the addition of some new functions In this question the randomized variables are mass m which varies between 0 5 and 1 0 and velocity v which varies between 10 and 15 The decimal argument is used to trun
121. 1 10 24 Tutorial List based Variables ceinion iinei eieiei oia EEEE EET EEE E EEE 242 Examples aran a e a a A aN aa sa E a eaa e aa taweetetest 242 10 25 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring ccccccececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 244 Using a Textor ATMEL Editor iepene aee aaea te aa TEES EE EEE EEE E E S E ER E S 244 Using the Question Editor scssi oroesi vee cut aeeoa E E od och EEE AEE EAA EE a a E a eS 244 T tomal Vrece stenens e an ae ea a da a aea eras dala aaa a 244 Tutorial 25 2 ee ne a os oes E E E A Fe as ee Y E a 246 11 Authoring Que stions in LaTeX meeste cies Gav E bs ohana e obec de oii saben eae EEE NEST 247 11 1 LaTeX Authoring Overview cc ccics coecdss iiciin oe gant vec cuadevocuts Ves dew eden s cogent vecueed efosede o venetuaddeqenteceds 247 Requirements Aseem eean aT a V weheet N eaS NE A Jevecueetwelead EE aR Sa 247 Authoring Proessor E E E os Has ed a EE E EE EEE AE E EE E A EE 247 11 2 LaTeX Question Bank Document Structure cccccc cece cece sensos erererseresesrrseserererrereseserreserererrrrese gt 247 11 3 Question Structure ev eccisc torches senai E S EEE A EASKE ESE TEE Wevsus lav cuceedeucvaeteseueaead og aeeene 248 Available Fields in LaTeX Questions s yusesed onairea a a n e EN ana 248 11 4 LaTeX Style Sheets neen eiee ois EEA EE ch wie cones EEE E de E EEE a 249 11 5 Basic Question Types m LaTeX rrenen s E a E E E EE EO EEEE 250 Blanks Questions in LaTeX nessie
122. 1 1 answer check linear 1 amp amp goes_through 1 0 1 qu 1 1 info qu 1 2 mode sketch qu 1 2 algorithm Sa int rand 2 6 a2 int a a xmax int 2 Sa x sqrt 2 a qu 1 2 question lt p class noindent gt Sketch the graph of the function lt math xmlns http www w3 org 1998 Math MathML display inline gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 291 lt msup gt lt mrow gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mrow gt lt mrow gt lt mn gt 2 lt mn gt lt mrow gt lt msup gt lt mo gt amp 8725 lt mo gt lt mn gt a2 lt mn gt lt math gt lt p gt 1 2 gridlines 4 axes xmax xmax 4 4 axes labeled true axes background ImageBase example x 2 S a 1 0 0 a 1 x 2 answer check goes _through 1 0 0 amp amp goes_through 1 a 1 amp amp goes_through 1 a 1 amp amp slope _at 1 0 0 amp amp decreasing restriction 1 x 0 amp amp increasing restriction 1 0 x amp amp concave _up 1 qu 1 2 info NNNN DN qu 1 qu 1 qu 1 qu 1 qu 1 qu 1 See Also Graph Sketching Questions in LaTeX page 260 Key Word or Phrase Question Example Script There is no Question Editor interface for Key Words or phrase questions To create a key word question you must use a text or HTML editor or LaTeX to produce script files In Key Words questions
123. 1 1 format columns 5 qu 1 1 question Sort the molecules below from highest to lowest pKa qu 1 1 term 1 1 lowest pKa Most acidic qu 1 1 term 1 def 1 a qu 1 1 term 2 2 qu 1 1 term 2 def 1 b qu 1 1 term 3 3 qu 1 1 term 3 def 1 c qu 1 1 term 4 4 qu 1 1 qu 1 1 qu 1 1 See Also Matching Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Multiple Choice Questions page 163 Multiple Selection Questions page 164 Question Types Available in the System page 131 9 12 Multipart Questions Multipart Questions Question Mode multipart qu x y mode multipart A multipart question can contain a variety of related question materials data even case scenarios for different types of assessment and learning Although the multipart mode is a question type its component question parts can be of any question type including multipart This allows nested multipart questions The Question Editor is the recommended method for authoring multipart questions However you can also use the plain text script file path or the LaTeX authoring path See Also Multipart Questions in the Question Editor page 100 Multipart Question Example Script page 295 Question Designer Questions page 166 Tutorial Working with Multipart Questions page 112 9 13 Multiple Choice Questions 163 Multipart Questions Adding or Editing Parts It is recommended that you organize and edit question parts in a topic and then build the topic
124. 18 K degree Celsius degF kaga 32 27315 K degree Fahrenheit 10 10 Using a Table of Units 211 Custom Table of Equivalent Units You can specify a table of custom equivalent units which you can use in any Numeric question in the question bank You can define new units or add additional names or symbols for base units Defining a Table of Equivalent Units for a Question Bank To define a table of units for a question bank you need to create a question bank in plain text format and include an equivalent units table at the beginning of file This table requires the following structure qu env numeric lt tablename gt lt table _definition gt where lt tablename gt is a string of lower case letters without spaces identifying the table Once the table of units is defined you need to upload the question bank Table Structure A table of unit definitions lt table_definition gt has the general structure lt new_unit1 gt lt new_unit2 gt lt numeric_multiplierl gt lt old_unitl gt description1 lt numeric_multiplier2 gt lt old_unit2 gt description2 For example Im grain metric 0 00006479891kg grain troy gr Gr Note All unit definitions must reduce to the base SI units m meter kg kilogram s second A amp K kelvin and cd candela Units can be derived in terms of other units for example micron 0 0001cm provided that you include the line cm 0 01m
125. 2 Basic LaTeX Question Structure esccc sects sa a eos eaves cases Soca seae vauebe bie oda E E EEE NO i E 248 Table 11 3 Arguments and Option for a Graph Plotting Applet ccc cceccceccc nese eece seca cece eeee ees eeeneeaeeenaes 259 Table 11 4 Arguments and Option for a Multigraph ccc cece cece seceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea sees eeeeeaeeaeees 259 Table 11 5 Arguments and Option for a Sketch ccc cecccecccece cece cece eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeea essa eeaeeaeeae ees 260 Table 11 6 Basic Sketch Criteria ecce sees sec clgetees S05 coals vac custa ays been Gan Doss Se agen ved oud a Sec dvaides So aaa nese 260 Table 11 7 Statements for Additional Sketch Criteria cccecceecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeea esse eeaeeeeeeaeeenaes 260 XV xvi List of Tables Preface Overview of the Instructor Help amp MapleTA Release 7 Maple T A has three components e Question Repository collection of questions e Assignments tests containing questions from the question repository with policies that control their form and availability e Gradebook results of student assignments For more information see the Overview Question Repository Assignments and Reports page 1 The Class Homepage is the starting point for instructors students and proctors To learn more about the Class Homepage see How the System Works page 1 The Instructor Help System in Maple T A inclu
126. 20 hour In each case the system grades the response correct In a test the input field for the answer appears with a link provided to a list of the recognized units See Also Formula page 137 140 9 Question Types Using a Table of Units page 205 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Maple graded Question Type Overview The Maple graded question type uses the Maple computer algebra system to generate algorithmic variables in questions generate plots and evaluate student responses The Maple graded question type gives you access to the computational power of Maple It includes facilities for algebra calculus differential equations discrete mathematics graphics nu merical computation and many other areas of mathematics Since the Maple engine is used when grading student s responses Maple T A will give credit for any response that is mathematically equivalent to the correct answer Using the Maple graded question type you have access to many different kinds of mathematical objects not just simple expressions You can use Maple to create questions whose responses require sets differential equations unevaluated integrals groups and many other types of mathematical data The Maple graded question type allows for questions with complicated answers questions with different possible answers and questions requiring a powerful answer equivalence checker With the Maple graded question type
127. 239 Sigma 168 Significant Digits 185 226 Controlling 183 Significant figures 223 Simplified Math Expressions 199 Solution 83 122 Deleting 84 Solution field 129 Sound files 73 Special Characters 130 Sqrt 180 233 Square Root 204 Statistical Operations 231 streat 232 Student Changing grades 53 Deleting student record 69 Student Menu Assignment name 37 Student Response Plotting 187 Student result Adding comments 53 StudentResponses Grading 187 Study Session Assignments 37 128 129 Study Session and Mastery 36 Success rate 55 Sum 232 Support 5 Switch 232 243 Symbol mode in student response 143 182 187 System System Homepage 4 System Requirements 303 System Time outs During Authoring Sessions 77 T Tab delimited 58 Table Assignment types overview 33 Physical Unit Equivalents 205 Telsa 205 Test Bank in Assignment Editor 28 Add questions as a group to assignments 39 Adding individual questions to assignments 38 Previewing questions for selection 39 Testbank 120 Installation 120 Testbank qu 116 Testing Grading 85 Text Formatting within Questions 107 Text mode in student response 143 182 187 Text strings within variable statements 240 314 Index Time outs During Authoring Sessions 77 Tips Formatting 168 Tolerance 86 122 146 183 184 215 226 285 Topic 122 125 129 Open 121 Topic Structure within Question Banks 118 Trademark 303 Trig Functi
128. 27 Assignment set prerequisites 46 Assignment Editor 27 28 Choose Name tab 37 Details 47 Options 23 Review amp Finish tab 32 Select Questions tab 28 Set Policies tab 30 Assignment Editor Main Menu Add button 23 Backup button 47 Delete button 24 Move Up Move Down buttons 26 Print button 26 Shared content icon 27 Assignment grades 51 Assignment name Choose Name tab 28 Student Menu 37 Assignment Options Feedback 43 Final grade 43 Hints during assignment 43 Send email reports 43 Assignment properties Passing score 44 Questions per page 44 Time limit 44 Assignment type Anonymous practice 35 Homework or Quiz 34 Mastery 36 Proctored exam 35 Setting 42 Study session 37 Assignment types 35 Assignment visibility 46 Assignments 1 Deleting questions 39 Forced grading 27 59 Header 38 List order 26 Reviewing Details 47 Author question banks 247 305 306 Index Author Questions 73 Using Script Files 283 Authoring 73 Applet Questions 288 Graphing 297 Mathematical 179 multipart 100 Pathways 92 Authoring Path 75 Authoring with Question Designer 167 Axes Display in Interactive Plots 90 B Backing up questions 116 120 Backslash symbol Displaying 240 Basic Math Syntax 180 Behaviors 169 171 Blanks 124 133 289 Blanks Questions 134 158 250 253 and Short Phrase Questions 159 formula option 268 Browser 73 C C 205 Canceling assignment 47
129. 5 124 131 169 274 289 Drop down List 153 Equation 137 Fill in the Blanks 153 159 Free Response 159 in the Question Editor 113 Key Word 160 List 160 Maple graded 140 Math 149 Matrix 144 Multipart 162 Short Phrase 177 Question weighting 42 112 Questions 233 save to hard drive 116 120 Sharing 117 Questions menu 73 Questions with Images 106 Questions with Interactive Plots 90 R r Biserial 55 Rad 205 Random Integer 221 265 Random Integer Generation 230 Random number generation 221 228 229 Randomized Formula 124 297 Range 229 rank 230 Reals 214 Redefining Question Types 85 Reference Files 87 Reference Sources 87 Register students in a class 10 using class rosters 11 using the User manager 12 Registration Locked 9 Registration code 14 Reinstalling Question Bank 121 Relative Web References in Course Modules 67 Release xvii Reports 1 d Value 55 Exporting 58 File types 58 p Value 55 Required Question Elements 125 Resequence questions 163 Resequence topics 163 Response Area Properties 171 Response Areas 167 Response specific 101 122 129 163 Hints 128 Restricted Formula 124 150 Restricted Formula Questions 279 Review amp Finish tab 32 Canceling assignment 47 Finishing and Saving assignments 47 Reviewing assignment details 47 Reviewing Assignment details 47 Rint 221 228 230 Roster 11 Roster add External assignment 58 Rules 158 1
130. 5 Indefinite Integrals 136 Index 309 indexof 225 Info Field 82 128 Information 82 Inherit Content From 9 Inherited Questions 117 Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions 196 Inline Variable Expressions 220 Insert Algorithm 176 Response Area 170 Insert Algorithm 176 Insert Edit Response Area 170 Inserting MathML 168 Install Bank 121 Instructions amp Links Question annotations 40 Instructor Changing your password 69 Login 3 Name 9 Password security 69 Instructor Help xvii Advanced 73 Integer 223 228 239 Random 230 Integers Formatting 214 Integration 124 132 136 Integration Questions Constants 269 Internal Directive 122 Internet Access 303 Inverse Cosine 204 Inverse Sine 204 Inverse Tangent 204 Item statistics 55 J J 205 java 225 Java applet 178 JPEG 87 K Kelvin 205 Key Word 160 291 KHz 205 KiloHertz 205 KiloJoules 205 KiloWatts 205 KJ 205 KW 205 L Labelgraphic 263 Labeling Graphics 263 Labeling Graphics in Questions Example Script 291 LaTeX 75 144 159 247 297 Maple Questions 272 question fields 248 Question Structure 248 Question types 257 Question Using Algorithms 265 LaTeX Authoring Overview 247 LaTeX Question Bank Document Structure 247 LaTeX Style Sheet Tips 249 LDAP 71 Add user 72 Import 72 Least significant unit 183 226 Linux 303 List 160 List Question 171 List Question Example Script 292 Lis
131. 8 Multipart Formula page 146 MultiFormula page 145 Formula with Units page 139 Numeric page 146 Formula Form Variant Question Mode Formula with form grading qu x y mode Formula qu x y grading form The Formula Form Variant question type is a restricted grading variant of the Formula question type In this mode the student response is required not only to be mathematically equal to the correct answer but also to be expressed in the same form Thus would be graded the same by an standard formula question However with the form submode set only the first two would be graded as equivalent Authoring of this question variant is not directly available using the Question Editor To invoke this grading variant you must create a formula question and then edit the source by adding a line grading form You can also specify it in LaTeX or the source for a question When editing the source include a line of the form qu 1 1 grading form 9 2 Math Question Types 139 See Also Formula page 137 Formula List Question Mode Formula list qu x y mode Formula list The Formula list question type requires an ordered list of formulas in the student response Use this for a list of for mulas or numbers that is required in a particular order You can use the full range of functions in the formulas that is all trigonometric functions log In abs and sqrt Important You must use commas to separate it
132. 80 Math formula 132 Mathematical Fill in the Blanks 268 Mathematical Formula Free Response 169 Mathematical Formula Question 284 Mathematical Formula Questions 98 Mathematical Functions 233 Mathematical Questions Authoring 179 Mathematics Question Types 179 Mathematics Questions 179 Answers 239 MathML 122 130 199 271 276 Mathml 168 MathML Authoring 197 MathML support 75 mathml f 226 MathType 197 Matrices Create Maple question using palette 107 Matrix 124 132 144 Matrix palette 107 Matrix Questions 274 max 227 Merging questions into question groups 39 Metadata 122 128 MiKTeX 249 Min 205 min 227 Misc 205 Mol 205 Move Up Move Down 26 Movie clips 73 Multi Formula 132 145 Multiformula Questions 274 Multipart 124 137 146 163 authoring 100 Multipart Questions 100 162 163 255 295 Editing 112 Multiple Choice 101 124 169 171 Multiple Choice Question Example Script 296 Multiple Choice Questions 163 256 Multiple Selection 124 169 Multiple Selection Question Example Script 296 Multiple Selection Questions 101 164 257 284 296 Multiple choice 163 177 My Profile 69 N Name 122 126 Natural Logarithm 204 New Class Create 7 New Question Create 76 Nm 205 Nonpermuting Multiple Selection 257 NOT Celsius 205 not equal to condition 227 Not equals condition 223 not a 227 Ns 205 Nth 226 Nth item 232 Ntuple 124
133. 88 Mastery assignments 36 Naming variables 221 S S 205 Save back up questions to hard drive 116 120 Saved Question Bank File Opening 120 Saving 121 Saving assignments 47 Saving shared assignments 25 Index 313 Saving table from Gradebook 58 Scenario based variables 243 Scheduling assignments 45 School Name 9 Scientific notation 132 146 179 180 276 Scramble questions 42 Script file authoring 283 Script Files 73 288 295 301 Search for Questions 114 Security Proctors 69 Student account management 69 Select Questions tab 38 Add questions as group 39 Add questions to assignments 38 Annotations 40 Merging questions into question groups 39 Points column 42 Scramble questions 42 Select Test Bank 38 39 Select Test Bank in Assignment Editor 28 Self registration 10 semicolons 145 Send email reports 43 Sequence of listed assignments 26 Sequencing Parts 163 Set Policies tab 30 Advanced button 46 Assignment options 43 Feedback options 44 Scheduling assignments 45 Set assignment type 42 SetImageBase 262 Setting Answer Format in Numeric Questions 85 Shadowed Questions 117 Share Question 114 Shared assignments Saving 25 Shared content icon 27 Shared class Behavior 13 Create 7 Creating 14 Shared Class Content Updates 13 Shared Class Overview 13 Shared content icon 13 27 Sharing questions 117 Short Answer Questions 177 300 Short Phrase 124 177 300 Sig 214
134. Add Response Area in the Question Designer 2 The Edit Response Area dialog opens You can select from Formula Maple Multiple Choice Numeric List or Essay question types 9 16 Question Designer Questions 171 3 Define the properties for the question type and click OK See the next section for details on specifying these prop erties 4 The response area is now displayed in the Text of the question panel Text of the question El Source C Beo cA t EAB sz U mj HE E ei a A iTar r i Font algez z Ml I i HOH S ire Who introduced the Arabic number system to Europe list Edi Sample Question in the Question Designer with a List Response Area See Also Authoring with the Question Designer page 167 Question Types and Properties page 169 Response Area Properties Essay Question To create an Essay question 1 Enter the essay question in the Text of the question panel 2 Click Insert Edit Response Area 3 Select the Essay question type in the Edit Response Area dialog 4 Indicate the number of rows and columns length of the response area for the essay question and click OK e You can define the size of the essay blank using rows and columns A typical screen width size is 65 70 columns wide Rows directly correspond to the lines of text you want to provide in a typical response Ifa student enters more text than will fit in the preconfigured text window the cell will automati
135. Also Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 233 mathml f Returns a string consisting of the formula f typeset in MathML Note The system renders MathML the MathML tags do not appear on the screen when the value of the string is dis played Instead the rendering appears For example mathm1 x n returns x By default mathml f automatically simplifies the formula To prevent auto simplification use the nosimplify option For example mathml x 2 4 8 nosimplify returns 10 18 Functions and Arguments 227 e oo If you want to include the function in another function use the notags option sum0 infty var mathml 1 a x 2 b notags See Also Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 196 Simplified Math Expressions page 199 max a b c d min a b c d max a b c d Returns the largest of the arguments For example max 3 5 7 4 8 1 returns 7 min a b c d Returns the smallest of the arguments For example min 3 5 7 4 8 1 returns 1 not a not a Returns 1 0 if a is equal to 0 0 Otherwise it returns 1 0 numfmt fmt x Returns the value of x formatted according to the template fmt For example numfmt 00 20 9 returns 20 90 plotmaple text Maple T A uses Maple plotting features to display plots Maple provides many ways of representing data and mathematic
136. B raj ape x x iT J Font 7 Size Give the coefficient matrix of the following system xt2y 3z 7x yr2z Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer The last line must evaluate to an expression that will be stored as the variable ANSVVER The variable SANSVVE printf MathML ExportPresentation ans Enter Maple code to grade the student response The last line must evaluate to a Boolean value true or false or a floating point value between 0 and 1 The varia Lineardlgebra Equal RESPONSE fans Select the type of expression you want to accept Maple syntax e g difff2 f0dad Text Symbolic entry Symbolic entry only v Figure 8 8 Defining a Simple Matrix Question To answer this question students interact with the Equation Editor A student can right click Control click on Macintosh in the Equation Editor to open the palettes From the Matrix palette the student must select the appropriate size of matrix see Figure 8 9 Then they must fill in the values for the matrix entries 110 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Question Name Coefficient matrix Give the coefficient matrix of the following system xt2y 3z 1 Fx ytaz 4 Equation Editor This question accepts formulas in Maple syntax Plot Help Figure 8 9 Using the Matrix Palette Note One of the skills tested with th
137. Class Homepage from the Content Manager menu select Web Site Editor 2 Navigate to the appropriate subfolder on the web site or click the Create new subfolder icon to create a new subfolder For maintainability it is recommended that you create a subfolder and place your images in it 3 Click the Upload file s to this point icon 4 To navigate to the file to upload click Browse 5 You can upload a single file or a zip archive 88 8 Authoring Methods for Questions To upload a single file a Select the Single File radio button b To specify a new name for the uploaded file on the web site enter it in the Save As text field The default name is the filename on your computer c Click OK to upload the file To upload a zip archive a Select the Zip Archive radio button b To extract the files from the selected zip archive and upload them to the web site click OK This is the recommended method for uploading multiple files If the file is not a zip archive the system does not upload the file The system returns to the Web Site Editor screen The uploaded file s appear in the web site explorer 6 To upload additional files repeat steps 3 to 5 Important The maximum size of a file that can be uploaded is 5 MB Example of Reference to Image on the Class Web Site To include an image in a question using the Question Editor 1 Create or edit a question in the Question Editor 2 In the field wher
138. E E e cecaas E 234 10 21 Setting Plot Opttons cc lt 22 00 303 echoed ede eebetetevhanetdesaogeds vehosd ed eetbuds leckaucsdedeageds eheadedeahbeds EU EnS 235 2 D Plot Statement Options ss ccinn ade vpn Sec hed esc es E cose ad ca Eada HAs wen Sa adieu cea vga eee db ves Seuss Hus con Sates 235 3 D Plot Statement Options sco 2 acess aa a ies aaa eek abated se Sa Sano eases ate eee ened 237 10 22 Details on Using Algorithmic Variables cccceccceeceeeceeeceeeee seen cece eece sess esau eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeegaes 239 The Answer Field Evaluation and Requirements cccccccceeece eee eece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeegas 239 Controlling Display of Numbers within Questions ccccceecceece seen eee eece eee eese ees eeueeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaes 239 Variables within Variable Statements ccceccceceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeea esse sees eeaeeaeeeaeeenaes 239 Displaying the Dollar Sign in Questions ccccccce cece cence eee e eee ee ee ee cena nett aa ee ea nets ae essen eeaaeeeeaas 240 Displaying the Backslash Symbol in Questions ceccceeceeeceeeceeece seca cece eece cess eee eeuserneeeneeeeeenes 240 Text Strings in Variable Statements cccccceccceee cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeaneenaes 240 10 23 Tutorial Algorithmic Question cccccccececece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeea sess esse esse eeaeeeeeeeeeereeegees 24
139. EA A E E a ES ite a A 304 Eao G42 aT i EETA EAS EE TT ESAT NE TEE Oe EE EA SEA T 304 Internet ACCESS oi feccecis r oiiaii EEA EEEE EEE ETE ETE EA TE EEE EA EOE A Ea A E 304 xii Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 System Homepage with Classes I Am Instructing ccsececeeeceneeeeeececaeeeeueeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeenaeeeees 4 Figure 1 2 Class Homepage with Assignment List 00 cceeeeeeececneeceeececneeceaeeeeeescecaeseeueeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeea 4 Figure 2 1 Inherit Content from a Featured Class ceccceececeeeceneeeeececeeeeeueeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeecaeseeueeeeeeeeeaeeeees 8 Figure 2 2 Proctor Toolsin sosea cease ala eich seein AA EEE E E EE E REEE E E ee adel iinet es 15 Figure 2 3 Add a Proctor to Your Class oshini nii oeenn a aeaa an a aao onia a Aaea id Se iain aei ti 16 Figute 2 4 Web Site Editor seren os re iai a nea AEEA EE EEE EKE SEESE NE A SEE EE E AE EE E Eai 17 Figure 3 Assipnment Editor a aat ate aae cok aa E anae Dade be fan e A a Sen aaie aaa Eii 21 Figure 3 2 Options in the Assignment Editor sssssssessseesseesserssrrstestttstttrtttttsreesrtstrtesrtstrstrsereseree 23 Figure 3 3 Add Questions to Assignment 0 ccc ceec cece cece teen eee ee cee ce ee ae cena cence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesea sega nega 29 Figure 3 4 Select Questions Specify Order and Weighting of Questions cceeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeea seen eene tees 29 Figure 3 5 Setting the Assignment Type
140. For instance you can group homework assignments and make them worth 30 of the overall grade group quizzes worth 30 of the grade and make the final exam worth the remaining 40 You could save this and publish it allowing students to see their grade by your calculation Grade reports are also useful for providing snapshots of the grades to date or trying out alternative methods for weighing assignments With options for designating extra credit and dropping the lowest grades grade reports provide flexibility for you in assessing your class Grade reports allow you to group assignments e set criteria within an assignment group such as drop the lowest grade and whether to ignore non attempts or mark as 0 e designate weighting for each assignment in a group e designate weighting for each assignment group in the overall grade e designate an assignment group as extra credit e save the grade report publish the grade report for student viewing 49 50 4 Working with the Gradebook See Also Working with Grade Reports page 56 4 2 Performing Gradebook Searches The Gradebook provides two types of searches of assignment data class grades and item statistics e Class Grades search for any number of assignments For each assignment the total grade for each student is displayed e Item Statistics search for any number of assignments For each question item statistics are displayed number of correct partiall
141. HTML qu 1 3 algorithm Smass rand 4 8 2 velocity rand 10 20 2 Sans sig 2 1 2 mass velocity 2 qu 1 3 question What is the kinetic energy of a body of mass mass kg moving at velocity m s qu 1 3 answer Sans the system displays the correct answer as Correct answer This answer is derived according to the general formula kinetic energy 1 2 mass velocity In this case the kinetic energy is 1 2 7 6 197 or 1 400 assuming that the algorithmically generated variables set mass 7 6 and velocity 19 Consider another example Example 4 qu 1 4 mode formula qu 1 4 algorithm a rint 12 1 b rint 12 1 214 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions c rint 12 1 qu 1 4 question Find the solution of the linear equation a x b S c qu 1 4 answer c b a The above code chooses random integer coefficients a b and c between and 12 The formula for the answer is calculated in the answer field Note Braces variable is used to enclose the variable names in expressions This structure allows you to use variable names directly adjacent to other letter characters Although the above example does not cause errors there are several side effects e The answer is displayed in the form 7 3 5 for example This provides an indication of the method for obtaining the answer which may be inappropriate The above format can return answer
142. LaTeX neinni an a he venkat wnt ees theese A R EE 75 Authoring When to Use Maple T A Plain Text Script Files 0 0 0 0 ccceeeceseeceeececneeeeeeceeeeeeeueeeeeeeeaneees 75 Planning Your Question Bank Project ccceccceccceee cece cece IO EE E EE EEN E E n a 75 8 5 The Question Editor crizia riii iai tea iE Pic wes toca ce Cae oath ce E Vda ecw av a E R E E a E 76 Creating a New Question or Editing an Existing Question sesssssssesssessressestrestrssrresrrssrrssrresrreeree 76 Avoiding System Time outs during Authoring Sessions c cccceeeceeece cece eece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeges 77 Adding and Editing Comments cccceecceeceeeceeeee eee e eee a eee ee ce eeseeeae cena eeeeeeeneseeeeeeeeeseaeeeneeeaeeges 78 Adding and Editing Algorithms cccceecceece ence ee ce eee e eee e nena ee cece se ee cece ae een eeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeee eee 78 The Algorithm Desi on etis ce amp cooy deeedeeagc a aes ve ee eed Site A dea Peet de SEEE re Reet 80 Adding and Editing Information Fields cccccc cece cece eee c eee ee ee eeee ee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeea essa esse eee eeaaeeae ees 82 Adding and Editing Hints 1 222 0 0 2seheue ea stu dan eysiaehoudedseddedssavbaveteetubeariaveeedeaesiudslacbeccidagebes 83 Adding and Editing a Solution seiss crcs eniin che cc ee cane i E ca ceden vie ce ccbbcnee Gdbecaecadbies ebdeatpecdachtecceee 83 Deleting a Comment Information Field Hint or Solution
143. List question text input relaxed grading multiple answers partial credit Blank 5 List question text input exact grading multiple answers partial credit Blank 6 List question menu input exact grading partial credit topic Question Designer Question Example mode Inline editing useHTML weighting 1 1 1 1 1 1 numbering alpha part 1 editing useHTML _part 1 tolerance 1 0E 9 part 1 question xx part 1 answer n x n2 part 1 mode Formula part 2 editing useHTML part 2 question xx part 2 answer num 11 part 2 mode Numeric part 2 showUnits false part 2 grading exact_value _part 2 answer units part 3 showUnits true part 3 editing useHTML part 3 question xx part 3 grading exact_value part 3 answer units ft min part 3 mode Numeric part 3 answer num 10 _part 4 grader relaxed part 4 editing useHTML part 4 question xx part 4 answer 3 Stephen Hawking _part 4 answer 2 Albert Einstein _part 4 answer 1 Einstein part 4 mode List part 4 display text 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 299 credit 3 0 5 credit 2 1 0 credit 1 1 0 grader exact editing useHTML question xx answer 3 Stephen Hawking answer 2 Albert Einstein answer 1 Einstein mode List _part 5 display text part 5 credit 3 0 5 part 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 part 5 credit 2 1 0 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 part part part part part
144. Maple T A User Guide A MapleT A Copyright Maplesoft a division of Waterloo Maple Inc Maple T A User Guide Copyright Copyright Maplesoft a division of Waterloo Maple Inc 2011 All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transcribed in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photo copying recording or otherwise Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the agreement It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the agreement Trademarks Maple Maple T A Maplesoft Waterloo Maple and Maple T A Content Center are all trademarks of Waterloo Maple Inc Adobe and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Maplesoft is independent of Sun Microsystems Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document was produced using a special version of Maple and DocBook Printed in Canada I
145. MathML to Create Formatted Math Expressions Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions The algorithmic function mathml s accepts a string argument s which it treats as a formula in calculator syntax and typesets it as MathML that can be used inside algorithms Note When you create inline typeset math expressions using the mathml f function the system automatically sim plifies the expressions Example qu 1 1 question What is the derivative of mathml sqrt 1 x n qu 1 1 answer 1 2 1 x n 1 2 n x n 1 e qu 1 1 algorithm n range 2 10 Since you can also use algorithmic commands to generate inline expressions you can use the mathml s command along with inline expressions of the form expression to display the following typeset math expression inside a question statement What is mathml x 1 sqrt x 2 1 This will generate What is tl 2 x 1 9 This is a quick and easy way to place MathML in question banks that use a little math notation but are not heavily re liant on it In addition your expression can include other algorithmic functions and variables You can use the following mathml x a sqrt x n 1 Numeric Arguments to the mathml function mathml expr 0 returns MathML with no lt math gt tags mathml expr 1 the default returns MathML with lt math gt tags See Also Simplified Math Expressions page 199 mathml f page 226 10 7
146. Restricted formula qu x y mode Restricted Formula Short phrase qu x y mode Short phrase True or false qu x y mode True False Unordered list of formulas qu x y mode Multi Formula Vector qu x y mode Ntuple For more information on each question type see Question Types page 131 Required Question Elements Each question must contain the following elements Question mode Question statement e Answer In the following descriptions the variables x and y represent the topic and question numbers 126 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Question Mode Format qu x y mode lt question_type gt The required mode statement declares the type of question You must include it as part of the opening statement for the question Question Statement Format qu x y question lt question_text gt The required question statement holds the text of the question Question statements can include any combination of HTML tags for formatting text integrated HTML graphic or web media references or MathML expressions Answer Format qu x y answer lt correct_answer gt The required answer statement specifies the correct answer value for the question For more information on this field see The answer Field page 127 Example 1 topic Basic Topic 1 2 mode Multiple Choice question What is the sum of 5 and 7 answer 1 choice 1 12 choice 2 35 choice 3 2 choice 4 11 choice 5 2 aggaga
147. SBN 978 1 926902 05 0 Contents Preface s sina nies sent abides bos yesh e e sends wate eae aa a datos tad ses a aa dumtnas tends meahaeteeaas creates aeara xvii Getting Started eine a e E a e a E A E a S ENE 1 1 a OR ES aa AN0 a E E E E E E A A E hat bu ce 1 User Roles eia E e sla pene EE A E E A NOE A A ia E siete each 1 iatea LA Boye t MA AAEE EEA E A AE E ETS EEE eee E EATE ETT A A et AA 1 Class Homepage A A E E ten O SS E E eb E S A 1 1 2 Overview Question Repository Assignments and Reports cccccceeecneeceeec cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenes 1 Question Repository tane e cos ac aac sealed Reet ae La REO ae eae tee ee 1 ASSICMIMENES 2 EA S EAE hate itt als cine bots Se ae tt tN de ltt Re oot stole clas 1 Gradebook oht isin Ss A shee Lage se dtd De ede ga spas Sean eek a n io Eee Gc TRAE TS Sonal ssa Mec AoE AeA 2 1 3 Getting Started 2 2 0 fess ios Ge ee ee ee E cae Ge A head oe bese 2 Cr ating a New Classin Maple TA corinne eivne eases oie velco erbacee eit ice a piboadenreadelantenadennvcedabagwecgdee eves dats 2 Working with Questions and Assignments in Maple T A ccecccece cece eee eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseaeese eee 2 1 4 System Overview AE E E E es dntes gagbabie ect dues ye E bee Ge Laney etn se cee eS 3 PHe System Wo Sits s2 se sek Meleada kk EEA E E eo caenn ode tages Rou deae dc cat lace E EE E canes eae 3 System HOMEPAGE riean caw dates ocak es RE leven eae esa ET eye E onsen E casey Du atelactn A
148. Statistics Mean lt 695 607 511 588 710 500 682 515 709 478 497 657 652 634 488 615 714 579 589 493 584 484 503 711 622 695 gt rounded _answer evalf exact_answer 5 evalb RESPONSE rounded_answer Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions As the author you can verify whether a student is using a Maple command to calculate the answer The following example scripts illustrate code that allows and prevents potential cheating by the student using Maple commands Examples The student is required to factor x 2 1 The expected correct response is x 1 x 1 In this example question code the student could easily use the Maple factor command to obtain the answer question Factor x 2 1 maple evalb S RESPONSE factor x 2 1 type maple mode Maple allow2d 0 name Allow Cheating editing useHTML In this example the code verifies if the factor command has been used in the answer The student response will be marked incorrect if the Maple factor command is used question Factor x 2 1 maple evalb 0 StringTools Search factor SRESPONSE and evalb SRESPONSE factor x 2 1 type maple mode Maple allow2d 0 name Prevent Cheating editing useHTML 186 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions If you are concerned about students using Maple commands to calculate answers consider using Maple graded Formula to create your question Students respond wi
149. T A question types and their corresponding mode strings Table 8 6 List of Question Types and Corresponding modes Question Type mode string qu x y mode lt question_type gt Blanks qu x y mode Blanks text menu formula options Clickable imagemap Constant of integration Formula mod C mode Clickable Image mode Formula Mod C Customized symbolic palette mode palette Equation TEREE mode Equation 8 9 Question Banks e 125 Question Type mode string qu x y mode lt question_type gt Essay x y mode Essay Formula x y mode Formula Formula with physical units x y mode Dimensioned formula Key words x y mode Key Words List x y mode List Maple graded mode Maple Matching mode Matching Matrices with numeric formula entries mode Matrix Multipart mode Multipart Multipart formula mode Multipart Formula Multiple choice mode Multiple Choice Multiple selection mode Multiple selection Non permuting multiple choice m fee fee fee fee fae fee fy fie fig X mode Non Permuting Multiple Choice Non permuting multiple selection AFPERREEREERE x y mode Non Permuting Multiple Selection Numeric with or without units x y mode Numeric G Ordered list of formulas qu x y mode Formula List Question Designer qu x y mode Inline
150. The human race belongs to the genus Format blank correct answer blank Homo 254 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX and species blank sapiens end question See Also Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 Ungraded Essay Questions page 155 Matching Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Matching The Matching question type presents two lists The student must match each entry on the first list with one entry from the second list Notes To specify pairs of matching elements use the match for elements in the first list and with for elements in the second list macros e You can present additional entries on the second list that do not match any items on the first list Use the decoy macro for this purpose e The default behavior is to display the first list in a single row across the screen with a drop down list of all choices from the second list You can instead specify the number of columns using the cols macro Example 1 begin question Matching qutext Match the following states with their capitals match California with Sacramento match New York with Albany match Pennsylvania with Harrisburg match Oregon with Salem end question Example 2 begin question Matching qutext Match the following polynomials with their factorizations match x 2 1 with x 1 x 1 match x 2 2x 1 with x 1 2 match x 2 2x 1 with x 1
151. a symbol after the question number such as Q1 Click this link to see details on the items within this question group Viewing Question Responses From the Assignments Grades you can access Question Responses e In the Assignment Grades click the name of a question such as Q1 to view the student responses to this question In the Question Responses view you can e View item statistics e View student responses for each question As part of this you can view the instance of the question that the student received for algorithmic questions e Add instructor comments e Update student grades if desired Viewing Student Grades After performing a basic gradebook search you can click the name of a student to access the student grades for that student The student record report first shows a summary for the student including the number of completed in progress and passed assignments for the student along with the number of assignments that need to be reviewed For each assignment the student score and total points are shown 4 3 Searching for Class Grades 53 You can opt to show all results or just the best average most recent or earliest For all of these except average addi tional information for each assignment session includes session start and end times and duration You can click the Details link for any assignment to access the student assignment details Viewing Student Assignment Details After perf
152. a delimited file xvii xviii Preface Enhancements to the Maple graded Question Type e Maple Syntax questions now support symbolic response entry with an expanded palette that includes integrals de rivatives and matrices Students can build a matrix response in a natural way and instructors have full control over how the matrix is graded For more information see Tutorial Maple Syntax Questions with Matrices page 107 See Also Copyrights and Trademarks page 303 1 Getting Started 1 1 How the System Works User Roles Each user in the system has a default role as assigned by the administrator Administrator Instructor Proctor Student or Guest Users can have different roles in different classes For example an instructor can be a student in one class with student privileges in that class and he or she will have instructor privileges in the class he or she is in structing Single Login All users log in to the system through the same login screen Once in the system users have access to different menu items depending on their role Users can register in classes or access the class homepage of classes they are instructing proctoring or taking as a student Class Homepage To use the system for homework management and online testing in your class instructors begin by creating a class Once your class is set up students access assignments quizzes proctored tests and view their results through your clas
153. a in the Question Designer ccceeeeeceeeceeneeeeeeeeeueeeeueeeeaeeeeunes 173 Figure 9 18 Multiple Choice Response Area in the Question Designer ccececseeceeeeceeeeecueeeeueeeeeeeeeanes 174 Figure 9 19 Numeric Response Area in the Question Designer ccecccseeceeececceeceueeeeeeecenaeeeeueeeeneeeeanes 176 Figure 10 Ts Equation Editors ssid cece ts aa dent ead ane goede aha gee a S2de daheg coset Peco be Aiae Eiaa fonts Saeed Boeke 189 xiii xiv List of Figures Figure 10 2 MathType Translator to MathML 00 cceeceeeeeceeecenneeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeesceceeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeea Figure 10 3 Plot with Algorithmic Variables List of Tables Table 1 1 System Modules Overviews iscriere eiee e e a e cence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeea essa eeaeeeaeeaeeeanes 3 Table 3 F Assigiment Attributes y esen e a r E coals pecotes see opt Sab E E E a MEER 33 Table 4 1 Assignment Summary ssesseseeseesessertrssertest tst st stt t eet tts ttt S etste rS EEES ESEESE SEESE streer treere tees 51 Tabl 4 2 Jfenn Statistics neri noreo neni e E ET EEE E ERV ETT EE avin seek E EE SE 55 Table 8 1 Maple graded Question with Partial Credit ccc ccecceccceeece een eec eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeea 97 Table 8 2 Expression Types Available in Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor 0 99 Table 8 3 Examples of HTML Tags to Use for Formatting Text
154. a question because the algorithm is initialized before the assignment is started Questions frequently have multipart responses For example suppose foobar is a Blanks question with 5 blanks You can access the blanks individually using response foobar 1 response foobar 5 In the case of a multipart question with parts a c each of which holds a Blanks question with 5 blanks you can access the responses using re sponse foobar 1 1 response foobar 3 5 You can have as many levels of depth as are needed In addition to accessing the raw text of the student response you can also access the grade that is assigned to the current response using grade foobar or as appropriate grade foobar 3 5 This is a decimal number between 0 0 and 1 0 In the case that the question has not yet been answered the grade is 1 0 You should be careful revealing grade information because that may undermine the intent of the instructor in setting the assignment Note response and grade can be used only in in line expressions You can use these variables inside only question statements and answer definitions and not inside algorithm statements because the algorithm field of the question is evaluated only once when the question is first loaded at the time of initial assignment creation To use the response object inside other variable calcu lations would require that the algorithm field be refreshed each time the question is presented w
155. aa See Also Question File Structure Details page 119 The name Field Using Question Descriptions The name field allows you to provide a description for each question A descriptive title will help you identify indi vidual questions from lists of questions shown in the Question Editor and the Assignment Editor The name field is not required however it is recommended The name field accepts HTML formatting Example qu x y name Travel time for block on inclined plane 1 Note If you omit the name field or leave the description blank the system substitutes the question type for the description This can result in questions that show many similar items for example Multiple Choice Multiple Selection Multiple Choice Multiple Selection and Multiple Selection 8 9 Question Banks 127 The answer Field All question types in the system excluding Maple graded Matching and Essay must contain an answer field that indicates the criterion for grading the question The answer field is a command that the system evaluates and performs if necessary The output is compared against student responses for grading e Because the value of the answer field is processed by the system and compared to student responses the answer field must not contain HTML extraneous text not part of the required answer or special formatting e Answer field values for mathematics questions are processed by the system math parser and must
156. above appear only as arguments to functions It is recommended that you do not mix strings and numbers in expressions 10 23 Tutorial Algorithmic Question 241 10 23 Tutorial Algorithmic Question Algorithmically generated variables are used in questions to generate random numbers in questions and create multiple permutations of questions from a single template The system uses a special field algorithm to contain variable definitions Variable definitions must be presented in the proper system syntax They can contain embedded functions and arguments Note For any question type you can use Maple commands and Maple T A to generate algorithmic numbers For more information see Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 This tutorial examines the process of converting a typical numeric question to an algorithmically generated question by using variables Consider a single example Substitute variable data for the mass and speed values in the following question each time the assignment is generated A ball of mass 0 8 kg is thrown at a speed of 12 6 m s a What is its momentum b What is its kinetic energy The plain text script for this question with no algorithms is qu 1 1 mode Multipart Formula qu 1 1 question A ball of mass 0 8 kg is thrown at a speed of 12 m s lt br gt a What is its momentum lt br gt b What is its kinetic energy qu 1 1 answer 9 6 m s 46
157. addition sin sine subtraction cos cosine multiplication tan tangent division arcsin inverse sine A exponentiation arccos inverse cosine Numbers and Constants arctan inverse tangent e 2 71828 sec secant pi 7 3 14159 csc cosecant 2 9E8 scientific notation 290 000 000 cot cotangent Functions arcsec inverse secant sqrt square root arccsc inverse cosecant log logarithm base 10 arccot inverse cotangent ln natural logarithm abs absolute value function Table 10 6 Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions Function Maple T A Nota Maple Notation Function Maple T A Nota Maple Notation tion tion hyperbolic sine hypsin sinh inverse hyperbolic archypsin arcsinh sine hyperbolic cosine hypcos cosh inverse hyperbolic archypcos arccosh cosine hyperbolic tangent hyptan tanh inverse hyperbolic archyptan arctanh tangent hyperbolic secant hypsec sech inverse hyperbolic archypsec arcsech secant hyperbolic cosecant hypese csch inverse hyperbolic archypese archcsch cosecant hyperbolic cotangent hypcot coth inverse hyperbolic archypcot arccoth cotangent Table 10 7 Maple Notation Constant Maple Notation 2 71828 exp 1 3 14159 Pi 10 10 Using a Table of Units 205 V I the square root of 1 I Function Maple Notation logarithm base 10 log10 integral Int differential equation Diff limit Limit expone
158. ade of assignments on which this item was answered incorrectly Y mean grade of assignments on which this item was answered fully correctly p p Value q l p oy standard deviation for assignment grades Y height of the standardized normal distribution at the point z where P z lt z q and P z gt z p Note Since the r Biserial is scaled by a parameter that is based on a normal distribution it can result in values outside of 1 to 1 if the scores are not normally distributed 4 5 Working with Grade Reports You can create grade reports that reflect your class grading policy provide a snapshot of grades to date test out altern ative methods for weighing assignments and so on A grade report is defined by selecting assignments putting them into report groups and defining the weighting for each group You can control the grading policies that determine how grades 4 5 Working with Grade Reports 57 Creating a New Grade Report To create a grade report 1 A WwW N 8 9 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook then select Grade Reports Click New to define a new report Specify a name for the grade report Then click Add Group a Specify a name for the report group b Select the assignments for the group c Specify the weight of this group in the overall grade computation d If desired adjust additional settings When finished click Save to save the group settings Add more
159. age 97 Providing Feedback to Students e To display the correct answer as feedback for a student response you must enter the correct answer in the Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer field e For open ended questions such as Give and example of an increasing function on the interval 0 10 it is recommended that you include a comment for a graded response Otherwise no comment is displayed as feedback to the student if the response is incorrect Comments are entered in the Question Name amp Type screen Maple graded Question Type Help Pages The Algorithm Designer page 80 142 9 Question Types Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Displaying a Maple Plot page 201 Maple Syntax Question Example Script page 294 Math Question Types Comparison Table page 133 Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 204 Plotting a Student Response page 187 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 Using a Maple Repository page 90 Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions page 185 Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 294 Maple graded Formula Question Mode Maple qu x y mode Maple type formula In Maple graded Formula question types students can enter a math formula that is an expression constructed of numbers variable names and the standard arithmetic expressions and functions Note In the Question Editor on
160. al Theory of Relativity lt 4 gt lt br gt lt br gt lt i gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt This question lt b gt also lt b gt awards partial credit if you answer Stephen Hawking lt font gt lt i gt lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt This is the same question with the grader set to accept only an lt b gt exact match lt b gt of the answer text string however it too can be set to accept multiple correct answers so Einstein lt i gt or lt i gt Albert Einstein will be graded as correct but einstein or aLbeRt einSTEIN will be graded wrong lt br gt Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity lt 5 gt lt br gt lt br gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt This type of question also allows you to give some partial credit for certain responses so if you enter einstein or albert einstein you will get 1 2 credit for this question lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt In the following question the student picks from a lt b gt drop down menu lt b gt of choices Partial credit can be set for some options full credit for others lt br gt Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity lt 6 gt lt br gt lt font face arial size 1 gt lt i gt In this case you get full credit for Albert Einstein 1 2 credit for Stephen Hawking lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt See Also Formula page 137 Numeric page 146 List Questions page 160 Question Designer Qu
161. al expressions graphically using plots You can display a plot with any question type 228 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions The plotmaple command can be used anywhere an algorithmic variable can be used that is in text hints feedback and more plotmaple plotstatement libname filename 1lib plotdevice gif jpeg plotoptions options Where e plotstatement plot expression and plot options libname optional specifies path to user Maple libraries e plotdevice optional gif produces a GIF ANIMATED GIF or jpeg produces a 24 bit color JPEG rendering of the image e plotoptions optional specifies plot options available for the plot device specified see Table 10 11 Some examples plotmaple plot3d sin x y x 0 10 y 1 1 style patchnogrid lightmodel light1 plotdevice jpeg plotoptions width 250 height 250 plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi plotdevice gif plotoptions height 250 width 250 plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi plotdevice jpeg plotoptions height 250 width 250 Table 10 11 Options for GIF and JPEG Plots GIF plot options result colors n Set the number of colors The default 256 colors height n Set the number of pixels in the height The default is 512 width n Set the number of pixels in the width The default is 512 JPEG plot options result height n Specify the height of the canvas The default is 360 quality n S
162. al grade for the test e Correct answer for each question comment for each question You can also exclude question by question grading and question specific feedback from the final assignment reports displayed to a student Step 1 Details The comment Field To return custom feedback when a student enters an incorrect response each question type supports a comment field The comment is displayed after grading In the comment field you can include additional explanations about solution method or final answer You can create response specific comments for multiple choice questions in which a distinct comment is displayed for each choice For more information see Multiple Choice Questions page 163 If you do not specify a comment for a question the system displays only the correct answer For details on using the feedback in assignments see Assignment Editor Step 3 Setting Policies page 30 Using Complete Solutions Study Session Assignments Note Information in the solution field is available only in Study Session assignments To display feedback for example step by step solutions in all assignment modes use the comment field In the solution field you can enter a worked solution that is displayed in Study Session assignments For information on adding a complete solution using the Question Editor see Adding and Editing Comments page 78 In these sessions the student can view the solution before entering
163. ally using plots Plotting a student response is available only with the Maple graded Question Type Plotting a Student Response When entering code for plotting in the Question Editor use only one Maple plot command It must be the last command entered You must use the long form name for Maple package functions Example The following is the source file for a Maple graded Formula question that plots the student response question Enter an expression in x maple true maple _answer plot plot SRESPONSE x 0 10 type formula mode Maple name 2D Maple plot editing useHTML The following is the source code for a Maple Syntax question that plots the student response using the Maple tubeplot command Students must use Maple syntax in their response question Enter a set of spacecurves using Maple syntax for example cos t sin t 0 maple true maple _answer plot plots tubeplot SRESPONSE t 0 4 radius 05 numpoints 70 type maple mode Maple name Tube Plot editing useHTML Important You must use the long form name for Maple package functions You must test your plot code prior to publishing assignments Maple T A does not display error messages if the plot does not work correctly See Also Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 188 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Aut
164. alphanumeric character and must be unique 12 e 2 Creating and Managing Classes First Name must be at least one alphabetic character e Middle Initial must be no more than one alphabetic character Last Name must be at least one alphabetic character Email must be a unique address Student ID must be at least one alphanumeric characters and must be unique Password must be at least five alphanumeric characters e Role can be one of student guest proctor instructor or administrator If roles are specified they cannot exceed the level of the current user The default if not specified is student e Require User Validation can be yes or no If yes the next time the user logs in to Maple T A they will be asked to validate their profile The default is yes The corresponding header row values are login first initial last email student password role validate The headers are not case sensitive so first and First are both recognized The other fields are optional If no password is provided the system generates a password which is displayed on the next page If you have a null field for example a student did not provide a middle initial use two consecutive delimiters However if the header row includes email and student ID you cannot have empty values for those fields in the rows of student data If there are some students who do not have either an email or a student ID you should use the value lt NULL
165. ame label lt param name label lt param name label lt param name label text value time seconds gt x value 120 gt y value 10 gt x value 10 gt 1 1 1 lt param name label 2 text value height meters gt 2 2 lt param name label y value 100 gt lt param name size value 2 gt lt applet gt EEEE 1 5 answer num 104 1 answer units showUnits false info grading exact_value PRRRH uno u List Question Example Script Example 1 List Question Textbox Display Exact Grader Options Sets a question with a text response cell that uses the exact grader to enforce capitalization and punctuation in the answer Specifies three expected responses with credit for each qu 1 1 question Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity aagagaaaas 2 PRPRPHPPPP HPP grader exact display text answer 1 Einstein credit 1 1 0 answer 2 Albert Einstein credit 2 1 0 answer 3 Stephen Hawking credit 3 0 25 mode List editing useHTML Example 2 List Question Textbox Display Relaxed Grader Options Sets a question with a text response cell that uses the relaxed grader to ignore case sensitivity and punctuation in student responses Specifies three expected responses with credit for each and a comment for each qu 1 2 question Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity PRPRPHPPPRPHP HER NNNNNNNNNDND
166. an import and link Maple repositories to the server Click Maple Repositiory to access files Maple Repository LIB Location output fieid Create a Random Variable Using Maple You can use Maple commands to define random variables using any Maple function 1 Start by adding the variable name in the first cell You do not need to use the or notation 2 Select the type of variable to generate variable or plot 3 Enter the Maple commands used to define the random variable or enter the plot statement The plot statement accepts plot device options See Setting Plot Options page 235 for a list of plot options Guidelines for Maple Commands in Maple based Variables i To generate a random number using Maple you must use the multiple commands randomize lt random_command gt for each random variable Otherwise the same output is generated in each instantiation of the question ii When entering multiple commands ensure that all except the last have a trailing colon The last command must not have a trailing colon iii You must use the or notation when including variables in a Maple command iv When referencing negative random variables in a maple variable definition be sure to place the negative variable in parentheses otherwise an error message will return 4 To add the variable definition to the algorithm text box click OK 5 You can use the Algorithm Designer to generate multiple variables
167. and click Submit 5 The class is added to the list of Classes I Am Instructing if you are the instructor 6 To access the newly created class click the link to the class to bring you to the Class Homepage Required Registration Information The following information is requested when you register a new class in the system Course ID optional A combination of letters and numbers to identify the course for example stats 0 The maximum number of characters allowed is 10 Class Name The displayed name for a class The class name appears on the Class Homepage and in other administrator lists The Class Name is created at the time of initial registration by the instructor or the system administrator An administrator can rename classes The maximum number of characters allowed is 255 e The system ensures that class names are unique If you or an instructor select a name that exists the system requests that you select another name e Clicking the Class Name link opens the Class Homepage in the related class Instructor The instructor s name An instructor is selected from the database of system users at the time of initial class registration and setup The user selected to be the instructor does not need to have the default system role of Instructor any user in the system can be made an instructor This is useful because a student user can be made the instructor of a tutorial class for example Then the student will have student
168. aphics 1 Select a location in your Maple T A class web site for graphics files It is recommended that you use a distinct folder for the images in each question bank Upload the graphic to your class web site For information on uploading see Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site page 87 2 Insert the setImageBase directive near the top of your question bank TeX source file to specify the path to this location For example if your Maple T A class name is calculus205 and your graphics folder is the chapter folder of your Maple T A class web site use the directive setImageBase classes calculus205 chapter1 Note The final slash is optional Table 11 1 Example LaTeX Document Structure documentclass 12pt article usepackage ed Optionally set the location for graphics files on the Maple T A system setImageBase classes Maple T A classname images folder begin document begin topic begin question question type end question begin question question type end question end topic end document 11 3 Question Structure Table 11 2 gives the basic structure for a question Table 11 2 Basic LaTeX Question Structure begin question question type name question name property name1 value1 property name2 value1 hint first hint hint second hint comment feedback text qutext question text end question Availabl
169. aple TA 2 c cccegecd erosi r eeni E soe gant AEE EE wedeuediuecs geneva cavetsedevedusuaeectedseeegestaeweneteee 69 6 1 Changing Your Passwords c 22 lt ccaese svete anaoga fewedheed a oruadegd st vslwed e aa EA e aaa Ea 69 6 2 Editing Your Profile 228 4c becevececden he cede tees Haseena E i ih eda edt Ve eed E O kage each s ea a es 69 Contents v 6 3 Deleting Student Records eey nhe tay vee cavdebete caches E A E a E a a Ea TES 69 6 4 Security Issues to Consider iinr iiri dates a E E E E E E Epa cushy E E E ca ees aa eee 69 Instructor Password aseinaan a aa a a yeahs od a a E a a EE E EE 69 Student Account Management ccccecceeece geni Eeen EEEE EEEE EEEE E EEE EE EEEE E EA 70 Proctored EXAMS n ka a a a a a a e eaa aa a A A NE EA 70 7 Integrating Maple T A with an LDAP Server cc cece cece cece cece e cence ence eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeea esse esse eeaeeeaeeeaeees 71 TA GDAP Overview for Instructors iesin e E a nets E uate sea seed even TAER RANES 71 7 2 Login and Forgotten Passwords with LDAP cecccecceecceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeea esse esse eeaeeeaeeeaneenaes 71 LOGI iret eve ced sd wonteteacbteceivechehs lebeterdadehentidebace teevbbets levbansededaleetiaehinnssdduatuadlavt caccdedopeblaaehecetdeateutss 71 Forgotten Passwords isnie E cata u cc Gee eo vgs vec Gav cee E EE bce E eg a eee dave SoddAd p E ced 71 7 3 User Manager Add Users with LDAP 0 cc cece cece ence ee ec ee eeee ee
170. as a blank click the dots on either side of the phrase Note If the designated word or phrase is followed by punctuation insert a space between the word or last word in a phrase and the punctuation mark To remove a blank from a word or phrase click one of the words in the blank b For menu fill in the blank questions click Add Choices i In the text fields enter the incorrect responses for the drop down box or boxes ii To add additional text fields click More iii To return to the previous screen click OK c Click Finish to place a copy in the web site cache and preview your question See Also Fill in the Blank Question Example Script page 289 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 96 e 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor Creating Maple Graded Questions To create a Maple graded question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a b c d In the Question Type drop down list select Maple graded It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution Click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen
171. b gt Multiple selection lt b gt 1 1 editing useHTML 1 1 algorithm garage 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 285 Sa int 2 rint 10 2 S b int 2 rint 10 2 Sc int 2 rint 10 2 Sd int 2 rint 10 2 Se int 2 rint 10 1 f int 2 rint 10 1 condition ne a b c d ne S e f qu 1 1 question Which of these numbers are even 1 1l answer 1 2 3 4 choice 1 Sa choice 2 Sb choice 3 Sc choice 4 S d choice 5 Se choice 6 Sf eeeeeee See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 Answer Tolerance Example Script The following questions define mathematical questions that accept student responses to a specified precision or margin of error For more information on precision and margins of error see Controlling Answer Tolerance page 183 Formula Mathematical Questions For formula question types including subtypes you must use the operator to define a margin of error The operator functions as a operator Example 1 1 You can specify an absolute margin of error using the form x y which accepts x y This question grades as correct any student response between 0 and 4 inclusive 1 topic Non numeric Math Questions G mode Formula name Absolute margin of error editing useHTML question Enter a number within 2 units of 2 answer 2 2 tolerance 1 0E 9 cages Note For formula quest
172. be entered in proper system math syntax or MathML Student responses are processed by the parser and must reduce to mathematically equivalent values to be graded correct Table 8 7 Answer Field Requirements by Question Type Question Type Answer Field Non Numeric mathematics question types Use the operator in the answer field value to specify a margin of error or degree of tolerance in a student response For more information see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Ques tions page 184 Numeric questions The value of the answer field must contain answer num and answer units defini tions You can assign null to the answer units field that is answer units for answers without units For Numeric questions use the specialized answer tolerance fields See Numer ic page 146 For general information on tolerance see Controlling Answer Toler ance page 183 Multiple Choice Multiple Selection True or The value of the answer field indicates which response s are correct False and Clickable Image questions Free response questions with text fields for The value of the answer field must be a text string that is used to evaluate the cor example Blanks text option Key Word rectness of a student response or Short Phrase questions For more information see Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 Maple graded questions do not contain an You must specify Maple code to eva
173. cally insert a scroll bar and allow the student to continue his or her response 5 Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question Formula To create a Formula question 1 Enter a question in the Text of the question panel Optionally enter the question using symbolic math by clicking the Equation Editor icon The Equation Editor opens See Formatting Tips page 168 Click Insert Edit Response Area Select the Formula question type in the Edit Response Area dialog Select a formula math grader by clicking Sub type drop down list Enter the answer in the Answer field nH nr BP W N Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question 172 9 Question Types List Question To create a List question 1 Enter a question in the Text of the question panel 2 Click Insert Edit Response Area Edit Response Area Choose Question Type Formula List Maple Multiple Choice Weighting 1 Numeric Matching Type Ignore case text match List Display Type Drop down Menu Text field Permute list Essay R Choices Item Weight Rene Descartes 0 0 Leonardo Fibonacci 1 0 Marcel Duchamps 0 0 Feedback Algorithm Info Hints Solution Edit Figure 9 16 List Response Area in the Question Designer 3 Select the List question type in the Edit Response Area dialog 4 Select the Display Type The default Display Type is Text fie
174. cate the values of the numeric variable data The answer field holds two statements one corresponding to each part of this multipart formula question Statements in the answer field are evaluated by the system grader so must be expressed using proper math syntax Also note that in this question we use the comment field to display the computed value of the answer rather than answer definition Displaying Answers See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 10 24 Tutorial List based Variables You can use the algorithmic syntax to manage multiple scenarios or sets of randomized data in questions Using list based variables you can use the same question statement but substitute corresponding sets of data throughout the question answer comment hints and solution statements Example Consider the case in which you want to create a chemistry problem that uses one of several sets or scenarios of data related to distinct elements Each set contains a visual depiction GIF file and related data linked to various properties of the distinct elements To create a single problem that randomly chooses an element and substitutes its individualized properties into the question statement and other fields use algorithm and answer statements as in the following examples a Single Index Case with Sixteen Scenarios 1 Use a single variable k as an index k rint 15 2 Create individual variables for the first rela
175. category for example assignment results by learning objective Example qu 1 1 info subtopic Subtraction difficulty Easy learningobj Subtraction of two small integers instructor John Smith course Math 100 Hints Coaching and Performance Feedback In a hint field you can enter a hint that is displayed in assignments For information on adding hints using the Question Editor see Adding and Editing Hints page 83 As an instructor e You define hints in questions e You enable the display of hints in Step 3 Rules amp Policies of the Assignment Editor so that a student can view them during an assignment e You can enable the display of hints in any assignment mode The system also displays hints after grading if a student response is incorrect e Ifyou do not enable hints they are displayed only as feedback when a question is graded incorrect e You can create any number of hints for a question Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits If you provide hints on an assignment student can view the hints for a question at any time during an assignment session prior to submitting questions for grading by clicking
176. ceeece eee eeeeeaeeeaeeenaes 163 9 14 Multiple Selection QUESHIONS inserer vaed edad R RA E a oe ak ea cee sea teen eee eee eas 164 Question Mode multiple selection non permuting multiple selection c cece cece seeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 164 9 15 Palette Questions sanneke ae a sake eed obese a s eked ed Rabat tyehwos aa a ta thane tdababeerieehcecsasehbe 165 Question Mode palette 0 cccs cccccdeiecaeies Gece eae EE E E hv ee Gee os hs oe ota vedo EE E aaa ea oN da nee aa 165 9 16 Question Designer Questions 2s6ce ts ote neia eakee eda eiee ces othe E ye cde a aE Aaa S 166 Authoring with the Question Designer ccccecceecceece cece cece cece cece eee eens eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeea essa sega eee 167 Porimatting Tips v 25 232 005 c0ds sesbeas peshecs a ety bed oc ea tbiahc R E aR eavedouds a ai 168 Question Types and Properties 2522 25 cegesn es heen s fe cevct vce eee dove E EE da wence vac weges dea tecubees oodess sectueh ies 169 Edit Insert Response Arcane rn e a ese E vant EAE ee suse ee sbeh E wove aA dle ARA 170 Response Area Properties soi cesscoriciiri iioii ioon E E EEEE EEE EEA EEE SEET EE ce ceded E 171 Insert Alp Ortthities sses issanda eaa a a a a aE a a eae EEN ERES 176 9 17 Short Phrase Questions sissevevecccsvesedecas t e eE TE E E Ves E A A E A E edia 177 Question Mode short Phrase seersant a aE RAE ne A A E Ee E RAEE aR TES 177 9 18 True or False Questions enosis riek Eoi eia E EE A EEEE EE ES EI
177. ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeea cece eeeeeese eee eeaeeeneeeneseeenaes 158 9 9 Key Word or Phrase Questions ccccececeeecnee cece eee eee e eee cence nese nese eeea essa eeseeeaa esse EEE S 160 Question Mode key words os j2c 0650 4e5860 68 a hae ns oe Genelia ee ann a eines oad EE E ieee LE 160 9 10 Teist QuestlOms ie Seos irie Gis owes EEEE EE Seem ee bas ee E lt u aie bu O RTE EE Cau Maneed a debates We ueR eee 160 Summary of Question Behaviors cecc cece ence ence ence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee cece eeseeeae eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeegas 160 9 11 Matching Questions coris ii iae E E E cegck ecole fey n Sak av oa ec es eda eect ag ea da AE EE caves A E 161 Question Mode Matching Sreser reien re a vehebbresth eager a R E tine ch vane eerie ees 161 9 12 Multipart Questions kossi anion eia iiia EEEE EEE EEE eda EEEE EE E E AE EE 162 Multipart Questions senese enne a n a erla a e i Ae e Eatas 162 Multipart Questions Adding or Editing Parts ccccccccccceeec cece eee eeceeeee eee eeu eeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeegas 163 Multipart Questions Partial Credits sisne cece cece eece ence eee eeceeeceeecaeece cece EE S E E i a 163 Multipart Questions Sequencing Parts ccceceeecc ence eeceeeeeeeceeeceeeseeeee esse cess eee eeeeeeuseeeeeeeneeeeeges 163 9 13 M ltiple Choice Questions riseire eener eE uebent AE bone ee cabeyyed A A Ea aa ese 163 Question Mode multiple choice non permuting multiple choice c cece cece ceee
178. ces 105 Csc 233 D d Value 55 Decimal 133 214 223 Decimal places 239 Define Answer Region 170 Index 307 Response Area 167 Define grading 171 Define Response Area 167 Deg 205 Delete Question 115 Delete Roster from Class 11 Deleted Gradebook results 24 Deleting Assignment 24 Course Module 67 Files using Web Site Editor 18 Proctors 17 Questions from assignments 39 Student record 69 Deleting a Course Module 67 Description URL 9 Different Forms 132 Digits in Maple Questions 185 Dimensioned Formula 124 132 139 Dimensioned Number 124 Disable vs Delete assignment 24 Display Answers vs Formulas 213 Displaying 240 Backslash symbol 240 Displaying a Plot 201 drawMaplePlot 201 Drop down List Questions 153 Duplicating Questions 77 E E Maple questions 143 e 204 Naming variables 221 Ed sty 247 Edit HTML 168 Edit existing questions 75 Edit Profile 69 Edit Question 114 Edit Response Area 170 Editing Questions 76 84 Source 84 Editing assignments 25 Editing with the Equation Editor 188 Editor 168 Electromagnetism 205 Email notification Passing score 43 Empty Class 7 Entering Chemistry Expressions 186 Equals condition 223 Equation 124 132 137 Equation Editor 168 Equation Editor Palette 190 Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax 192 Equation Question Types 179 Equation Questions 179 270 Equivalent Unit dimensions 139 Equivalent Ans
179. ck Update Grades 6 You can view a summary of the item s grade changes together with the accompanying comments by clicking View History beside the Comment on Grade text box 7 You can add a comment for the student in the Instructors Comment text box if desired 8 Click Update at the top of the page 9 You return to the student s record 10 Click Submit to regenerate the statistical information e An asterisk appears beside the assignment name if you have edited the details of the assignment for example adding a comment or changing a grade e Ifthe assignment is the original graded by the system no asterisk appears beside the assignment name Adding Comments to Individual Graded Questions You can add a comment for a student in the Instructors Comment text box Students see these comments when the review their performance on the test You can add personalized comments to help individual students understand their score and master the material To add comments to graded assignment questions From the Class Homepage select Gradebook and click Class Grades Select the assignment for which you want to add a comment Click Submit From the resulting report click the name of a student or the name of a question Each question is displayed along with the student s response Under each question is a Instructors Comment text box Add a comment for the student in the desired box Click Save Grades oN Dn Wn A UU N
180. cond The graph of the height of the ball versus time is shown below What is the maximum height of the ball in feet Express your answer to an accuracy of at least 3 significant figures begin labelgraphic ball gif 250 200 grlabel time seconds 120 10 grlabel height meters 10 100 end labelgraphic answer 104 1 end question 11 7 Tutorial Using Algorithms in LaTeX Questions Algorithmic Questions Randomized variables can be incorporated into any question Rules and recommendations for effective use of randomized variables are given below illustrated by related examples The code that creates and manipulates the randomized variables is contained in the code section of the question Each variable in the code section is designated with a symbol such as m ans and b2 The first character after the symbol must be a letter Each code statement is of the form variable expression Separate multiple variable definitions with a semicolon Note TeX comments cannot appear in the argument to code To include comments use the comment control sequence The usual arithmetic operations and functions can be used in the expression portion of the code statement However unlike most other programming languages variables cannot be redefined in terms of themselves for example the statement a a 1 is not allowed For a description of the additional functions that can be used in the code s
181. ctice sessions to exams Shared classes can also contain unique questions and assignments that are not part of the parent class When you share a class you create a single parent class whose content and assignments are cloned The content and assignments are inherited by each child class when a new class is created and the Inherit content from option is se lected in the class registration form Use class sharing to administer a large course with many individual class sections With class sharing you can draw assignments from a common pool of questions administer common homework practice assignments or exams Even though content and assignments can be managed in common each individual section can contain unique content and assignments Questions and assignments inherited from a parent class are always identified in lists by the shared content icon PB which appears beside the assignments and questions Shared Class Behaviors e Changes additions and deletions made to questions and assignment content in the parent class are automatically distributed to child classes The content of an inherited assignment cannot be edited directly However you can clone an inherited question to make your own copy which you can edit e Ifyou edit the policies of an inherited assignment your changes are reflected in the assignment sessions taken by students in your class immediately after you save your changes Important In general changes t
182. culated based on the search For example if the search is for the best score for each student the median computation is computed from those grades only 4 3 Searching for Class Grades Search for class grades to show the results of specified assignments For each assignment the grade for each student is displayed You can search for class grades for just the current class or including any child classes After performing a search you can change the options in View Panel and refresh the view without performing another search You can export any generated table of grades to a file by clicking Export to CSV From the Class Grades you can e View Assignment Grades by clicking on the name of an assignment e View Student Grades by clicking on the name of a student e View Student Assignment Details by clicking on any grade in the search results e View Item Statistics e Change the total points for an assignment Viewing Assignment Grades From the Class Grades click the name of an assignment to access Assignment Grades This lets you view the question by question scores The grade for each question or question group for each student is displayed Assignment Grades includes a summary of information on the assignment Table 4 1 Assignment Summary Field Description Assignment Name The name of the assignment Click this link to collapse the details view 52 e 4 Working with the Gradebook
183. cy Example Consider an assignment in which Topic B depends on Topic A Both have a basic requirement of 3 correct questions and Topic B has a penalty of one additional question for every wrong answer If the student answers three questions correctly in Topic A and then moves to Topic B but gets a question wrong both topics now have a requirement of 4 correct questions so the student no longer meets the requirements for Topic A The system returns to Topic A and the student must answer an additional question correctly in order to proceed again to Topic B Note When delivering Mastery assignments the system gives students information about their progress towards meeting the re quirements for the assignment It updates this information with every question that it grades See Also Setting Assignment Requirements Limiting Student Access to Assignments page 46 Configuring Feedback Options You can specify which feedback elements are displayed to students when they grade an assignment See Figure 3 6 The default system behavior is to show the final assignment grade as well as question feedback but you can switch either of these elements on or off control access to hints during assignment sessions before grading or withhold feedback until after the assignment due date has passed Hints and Feedback You can allow access to question hints if they exist in any assignment type Hints and Question Feedback contained in t
184. d browser window to print the assignment or click the Back button to discard the assignment and return to the Assignment Editor Controlling the Sequence of Listed Assignments The list of assignments that is displayed in the Assignment Editor is also displayed to students in your Class Homepage You can change the order of assignments listed in the Assignment Editor These changes are reflected in the order of assignments in your Class Homepage To order the list of assignments In the Assignment Editor select the new position number from the drop down menu of the assignment you want to reposition Once selected all affected assignments will adjust their position accordingly Overview Using the Assignment Editor The Assignment Editor organizes assignment creation into a four step process e Naming your assignment e Selecting questions e Establishing rules and policies e Reviewing finishing and publishing assignments to your class 3 1 The Assignment Editor 27 To create a new assignment 1 From the Content Manager menu select Assignments The Assignment Editor opens See Figure 3 1 2 Click the New button 3 The Assignment Editor screen opens with the Choose Name tab active 4 Follow steps through 4 More advanced options are described in detail later in this chapter Step 1 Select a Name for the Assignment Begin by giving the assignment a name Step 2 Select Questions for the Assignment 1 View and ad
185. d do not click Finish your changes will be lost Question Types and Properties Questions can hold one or more Response Areas You define the question mode display style grading behaviors and correct and incorrect answers using the panel Supported Question Types Essay Ungraded Essay question Response Areas can be defined anywhere in the Text of the question panel Formula Mathematical Formula questions provide full access to the formula mode math grading behaviors including configurable grading of equivalent symbolic algebraic and equation expressions The sub modes are e Formula for example e x sin x 2 e Formula that matches responses to within C e Vector of formulas for example 2t t 1 3t 2 e Equation for example x 3y 1 e Formula without simplification for example 4x x e Chemical Equation for example 2H_2 O 2 gt 2H_ 20 170 9 Question Types List Questions Fill in the blank or select correct answer from drop down menu List questions are used to define fill in the blank or select the correct answer from a drop down menu ques tions They can include multiple correct incorrect or partially correct responses Maple Questions Maple questions include facilities for algebra calculus differential equations discrete mathematics graphics numerical computation and many other areas of mathematics You also have access to the plotting capabilities of Maple You can plot a student respons
186. d filename in the LIB File Location field e Ifyou have multiple archives in the same directory you must specify the directory name and not the lib file To specify the directory edit out the lib file name in the path that populates the LIB File Location field Note Maple libraries are not available for use in algorithm variable definition statements See Also Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor Online Authoring in the Question Editor To access the Question Editor select your class From the Content Manager menu select Question Repository Then from the Questions menu select New Question The Question Editor allows you to create and edit the following types of questions in an online session Authoring Page Clickable Image Questions in the Question Editor page 93 General Information on Type and Subtypes Clickable Image Questions page 154 Essay Questions in the Question Editor page 94 Ungraded Essay Questions page 155 not graded by the system Free Response Fill in the Blank Questions in the Question Editor page 95 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 text field entry or drop down box selection Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Maple graded Formula page 142 or Maple Syntax page 143 Matching Questions in the Question
187. d questions to your assignment 2 Set question weighting 3 Scramble question sequence upon delivery Step 3 Set Assignment Policies 1 Select the type of assignment and set assignment options 3 Control feedback upon grading 4 Set assignment properties 5 Control assignment scheduling 6 Create rules between assignments Step 4 Review and Finish Assignment 1 Review assignment content rules and policies 2 Save the assignment by clicking Finish Important The Assignment Editor does not save partially completed assignments until you click Finish in the Review amp Finish tab If you begin to create an assignment and then abandon it without clicking Finish your additions and changes will be lost Assigning Partial Credit You can administer partial credit within assignments for partial answers alternate answers or alternate forms of answers Maple graded Questions and Multipart Questions offer you flexible ways to assign partial credit Multipart questions allow you to create problems with many steps and to grade intermediate responses at the completion of each step Assigning partial credit in multipart questions is closely related to establishing point values for the indi vidual simple question parts during construction of the multipart complex question in the Question Editor By carefully structuring and considering the weighting of your questions you can control partial credit in multipart
188. de for the expressions directly in questions answers comments hints and solutions in your question bank Example The following is an example of MathML code used to create an expression inside a question script qu 1 5 mode Equation qu 1 5 name lt b gt Equations with algorithmic MathML feedback lt b gt qu 1 5 comment Use the slope intercept form of the line to find the equation as lt math gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt Syone lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mfrac gt lt mrow gt lt mn gt Sytwo lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt Syone lt mn gt lt mrow gt lt mrow gt lt mn gt xtwo lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt Sxone lt mn gt lt mrow gt lt mfrac gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt xone lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt math gt qu 1 5 editing useHTML qu 1 5 algorithm xone decimal 1 rand 0 10 xtwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 condition ne xone xtwo yone decimal 1 rand 0 10 Sytwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 m Sytwo yone xtwo xone b m xone yone qu 1 5 question What is the equation of the straight line passing through the points xone yone and S xtwo ytwo lt br gt qu 1 5 answer 10 7 Using MathML to Create Formatted Math Expressions 199 y m x b You can also generate MathML using Mapl
189. ded correct Precision exact_sigd The numeric value of the student response must match answer num The number of significant digits in the student response must match digit For example if answer num 2 5 and the digit 3 only 2 50 is correct In particular 2 5 is in correct exact_value The numeric value of the student response must match answer num For example if answer num 2 5 2 50 and 2 5 are correct but 2 500001 is incorrect 148 9 Question Types Margin of Error toler perc toler _abs The numeric value of the student response must be within perc of answer num For example if perc 5 and answer num 2 5 any response between 2 5 0 95 and 2 5 1 05 is correct In particular 2 38888888 is correct The numeric value of the student response must be within err of answer num The error can be specified as a numeric value or algorithmic variable For example if err 0 25 and answer num 2 5 any response between 2 25 and 2 75 inclusive is correct In particular 2 333333333 is correct Precision and Margin of Error toler _sigd The numeric value of the student response must be within err in the digitth significant digit of answer num inclusive and have digit significant digits The error can be specified as a numeric value or algorithmic variable For example if err 2 digit 3 and answer num 2 5 the responses 2 48 2 49 2 50 2 51 and 2 52 are correct All other re
190. des information on Instructor Tasks Chapters 1 7 These chapters provide guidelines for creating assignments querying the Gradebook and using the system tools Advanced Authoring Chapters 8 12 These chapters offer more advanced authoring help providing descriptions of supported question types and guidelines for creat ing questions The Maple T A User Guide is available for instructors from the help menu Select Help gt User Guide gt Download PDF You can also visit the Maple T A Content Center at http www maplesoft com tacontent to download additional Maple T A resources What s New in Maple T A 7 amp MapleTA Release 7 Maple T A now offers new gradebook features including the ability to create customized grade reports that reflect your grading policy This release also includes enhanced support for Maple graded questions New Gradebook Features e From a single screen instructors can view all responses to any questions in an assignment e Instructors can create grade reports by grouping assignments and assigning weights to the groups Options include designating extra credit and dropping the lowest grades These reports can be saved and published for students For more information see Working with Grade Reports page 56 e For any assignment in a parent class the instructor can access the Gradebook data for all child classes e Class grades on external assignments can be batch imported from a comm
191. described as learning dialogues because of their question answer next question style Mastery and Study Session assignment types emphasize the following pedagogical approaches e For Mastery assignments instructors create carefully structured collections of questions grouped by learning objectives These assignments usually draw from a large pool of assignment material often algorithmically generated to produce limitless question permutations Mastery assignments require a login and password and results are recorded in the Gradebook e For Study Sessions students control the study process by practicing question after question Questions can provide hints and full solutions that are available to students while they work Results are displayed one question at a time and are not recorded in the Gradebook Mastery Assignments For Mastery assignment types you first create an assignment by selecting questions Step 2 as with other for credit assignments However when selecting questions for a mastery assignment you must give careful pedagogical consid eration to structuring questions by learning objective Question groups can be especially important in the instructional design of Mastery assignments In Step 3 Setting Policies you create rules that establish the minimum number of questions in each learning objective that must be answered correctly before the student can move to the next learning objective For students the graded results o
192. e You return to the student s record Students will see these comments when they review their performance on the test You can add personalized comments to help individual students understand their scores and master the material Note The comments you enter in this way are sent to individual students and not provided as a part of question feedback To enter question level feedback even response specific feedback for multiple choice items you must use the Question Editor See Also Configuring Feedback Options page 43 4 4 Searching for Item Statistics 55 Changing the Total Points for an Assignment To modify the total points for an assignment In the search results in the Gradebook click Total points in the left column e Enter the new total points for an assignment in the Overridden column e Click Submit to save the change 4 4 Searching for Item Statistics View item statistics for the questions in specified assignments For each question item statistics are displayed number of correct partially correct and incorrect responses as well as success rate p value d value p biserial and r biserial Important The system allows a variety of possible assignment applications for each question in the question repository which means calculating traditional item analysis on questions may produce unexpected results Remember that the analysis and statistics produced in the Item Statistics reports here ar
193. e qu 1 5 mode Equation qu 1 5 name lt b gt Equations with algorithmic MathML feedback lt b gt qu 1 5 comment Use the slope intercept form of the line to find the equation as Solution qu 1 5 editing useHTML qu 1 5 algorithm xone decimal 1 rand 0 10 xtwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 condition ne xone xtwo S yone decimal 1 rand 0 10 Sytwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 m Sytwo Syone xtwo xone b m xone yone Solution maple printf MathML ExportPresentation y m x b qu 1 5 question What is the equation of the straight line passing through the points xone Syone and xtwo Sytwo lt br gt qu 1 5 answer y m x b See Also LaTeX Authoring Overview page 247 Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 196 MathML Authoring with MathType page 197 Simplified Math Expressions When you use the mathml f function to easily render typeset mathematics expressions the system also engages a set of automatic simplification rules as follows e Simple addition subtraction and multiplication are performed For example x 2 3 are set as x 5 and 2 3 x as 6x e Additions and subtractions of zero are disregarded For example x 0 is x e Addition of a negative number on the right becomes subtraction For example x 2 becomes x 2 e Subtraction of a negative number on the right becomes addition For example x 2 becomes x 2 e Multiplication by a
194. e name tube plot editing useHTML algorithm algorithmic_ variable name plotmaple plots tubeplot t cos 3 Pi t t sin 3 Pi t t t 0 4 radius 05 numpoints 70 question lt p class Listing gt This displays a tube plot using the Maple long form name for the plots package lt p gt lt p gt algorithmic_ variable _name lt p gt answer 1 choice 1 True choice 2 False fixed Important You must test your plot code prior to publishing assignments Maple T A does not display error messages if the plot does not work correctly The drawMaplePlot command Important The Maple drawMaplePlot command has been superseded by the plotmaple command Questions created using the drawMaplePlot command will continue to function However it is recommended that you use the plotmaple command To display a plot with a question using the drawMaplePlot command 1 From the Question Editor Select Name and Type screen select the Use HTML formatting for the question text option Click Next In the text field for the particular question type click the Source button and enter the HTML script tags and structure illustrated below lt script gt drawMaplePlot maplecode width height libname lt script gt lt script gt drawMaplePlot plot sin x x 0 10 400 400 lt script gt The script requires the following syntax e lt script gt and lt script gt tags e drawMaplePlot command e Ex
195. e For information on uploading see Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site page 87 2 Insert the setImageBase directive near the top of your question bank TeX source file to specify the path to this location For example if your Maple T A classname is calculus205 and your graphics folder is the chapter folder of your class Maple T A web site use the directive setImageBase classes calculus205 chapter1 Note The final slash is optional 3 Include graphics in a question using the image macro The format for the image macro is image extension filename The extension argument is optional It specifies the extension to be appended to the filename the second argument when the question bank is converted to Maple T A format The default value is jpg If the filename argument is a filename with an extension the first argument is ignored If the filename argu ment is a filename without an extension the eps extension is used in preview mode and extension or the default jpg is used in production processing Sample 1 image graphic Places the file graphic eps from the current directory in the dvi output in preview mode In production pro cessing it produces an image tag pointing to graphic jpg in the directory specified by setImageBase Sample 2 image gif graphic Places the file graphic eps from the current directory in the dvi output in preview mode In production pro cessing it p
196. e or a function derived from a student response for example the definite integral of the student response for a Maple graded question type or display a plot for any question type You can also use functions and routines that are contained in a separate Maple Repository Maple Library You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions Multiple Choice and Multiple Selection Multiple choice one answer and multiple selection more than one answer questions can be defined as either permuting choices are shuffled or non permuting order of choices is fixed as authored Answer choices can be displayed horizontally or vertically Numeric Numeric questions can be defined to require a number and a unit dimension or simply a number as the answer You can set grading tolerance and answer precision using one of four methods The following sections explain how to use each of these question types within the response area Edit Insert Response Area Response Areas are the areas of your question that hold the answer definitions Using the Edit Insert Response Area button you activate and define response areas in your question To define answer regions in your questions 1 Click the Insert Edit Response Area button Text of the question Who introduced the Arabic number syste io om g til E ALB Z U mje x Insert Edit Response Area Tage Oye Font Sie z Figure 9 15
197. e Choice Weighting 1 Selection Single Multiple Permute Choices Display Vertical Horizontal Choices il 2 E Source gt 5 1 choice 1 2 choice 2 Non permuting Permuting Figure 9 18 Multiple Choice Response Area in the Question Designer 4 Select Single for one correct answer or Multiple for multiple correct answers 5 To rearrange the order of the displayed choices select Permuting 6 Select the display format of the choices in a table Vertical or Horizontal 7 In the Choices area enter the text that defines the choices for the question Define Choices for Multiple Choice 8 Click OK The Edit Response Area dialog opens Select the correct values 9 16 Question Designer Questions 175 Edit Response Area Please select the correct value s 1 ABC 2 DEF N Cuse Response Specific Feedback 1 2 Specify Correct Choice 9 Click OK Text of the question 2 E Source IO Lai 2 Bie a A BZ U m x 2 i Ter Oye Font 7 Size EAM a EPT i Wt m i il ABC DEF Edit Finish Multiple Choice Type in Question Designer 10 Click Finish to save and preview the question Numeric with or without required unit dimensions To create a Numeric question 1 Enter a question in the Text of the question panel 2 Click Insert Edit Response Area 3 Select the Num
198. e Fields in LaTeX Questions All questions can be given a name hints a comment and a set of properties The name field is used as an identifier for a question It is recommended that you assign a name to every question This will help you to identify questions when creating assignments from your question bank If present the comment field provides feedback that can be shown to the student instead of the answer field if the question is answered incorrectly The hint field provides hints for the question There can be more than one hint statement 11 4 LaTeX Style Sheets 249 The property field takes two arguments The first is the name of the property The second is its value You can choose any useful name There can be more than one property statement When converted to the Maple T A format files properties are converted to information fields Example begin question formula name p65 qu14 qutext Differentiate x e x answer x e x e x comment Use the product rule to differentiate this formula The answer is x e x e x x 1 e x hint Use the product rule property author I M Prof property difficulty medium The author and difficulty property names are examples You can create property names as required end question Other macros include e code To specify algorithmic statements use the code command For example code m rint 7 n int 2 m 3
199. e You can expand an existing folder by clicking the arrow icon e To create a new folder click the icon next to the instruction new folder The folder arrow points down The repository will upload to this folder location 5 Click the icon next to instruction upload files s to this point The Upload Files screen is displayed Cancel OK Enter the complete path of the file you wish to upload Single File Save As O Zip Archive Upload Files Screen Click Browse to locate the lib and ind files Select Single File or Zip Archive You must save both the lib and ind files This requires two save procedures Click OK The Linking and Uploading a Repository opens with the new lib and subsequently ind files displayed Click the icon next to the lib file The Question Statement amp Answer screen opens with the lib path and filename in the LIB File Location field 92 e 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Linking to a Maple Repository To use an existing repository you must link to the lib file 1 In the Question Editor Add Mathematical Formula screen click the Maple Repository button beneath the Op tional Import a Maple Repository text The Question Editor Linking and Uploading a Repository screen is dis played Expand the folders containing library files by clicking the arrow icon Click the icon next to the appropriate lib file The Question Editor Add Mathematical Formula screen opens with the lib path an
200. e a few limitations and requirements unique to the editor These tips are offered to help you achieve the best results As with other web content you may observe differences in the display of your question in various operating systems and browsers Character Formatting e Use the toolbar buttons to apply character formatting e HTML tags are allowed and will be rendered as HTML Math expressions in questions e Use the Equation Editor to enter expressions Click the Sigma icon to launch the Equation Editor dialog as shown in Figure 9 13 e Right click Control click Macintosh in the input field to display palettes See Figure 9 14 Text of the question Bi A th E ABZ U mj x A A Ta Ayr i Font Size Figure 9 13 Access the Equation Editor in the Question Designer 9 16 Question Designer Questions 169 Equation Editor Equation Editor MathML Applet mathEditor started Figure 9 14 Equation Editor Palettes Algorithmic Variables in questions e Insert variables by typing their name Use the required at the beginning of the variable name variable Displaying the sign and the symbol in questions e Insert the sign by using the escape sequence as follows Insert the symbol by using the escape sequence as follows Important When saving elements remember to click Finish to save changes If you change a value by simply typing content an
201. e based on the limited use of question items in the specific context of the assignments you specify If you specify assignments that are of more than one assignment mode or that do not have identical assignment settings item statistics calculated here are unreliable To produce reliable item analysis results select only one assignment for Item Statistics or ensure that all selected assignments have identical rules and policies Table 4 2 Item Statistics Success Rate The Success Rate of an item is the average normalized score on that item With each item graded between 0 0 and 1 0 that is normalized the average score is computed over the set of all scores re corded for that item in the current assignment p Value The p Value of an item measures the proportion of students who got the item correct It is defined as the ratio of the number of fully correct responses to the total number of responses in the data set That is sls P n where n is the number of responses and F is the number of fully correct responses d Value The d Value measures the discrimination of an item To calculate it the dataset is divided into two groups based on the scores on the entire assignment The sets consist of those that scored greater than or equal to the median grade on the assignment and those that scored less than the median grade on the assignment The p Value for each set is calculated and the d Value is the difference of the p Value for t
202. e directly 3 Paste the following applet code into the source HTML where you want the graph to appear lt applet code applets grapher Graph width 350 height 350 archive graphing jar gt lt param name y1 value x 1 x 3 x 5 gt lt param gt lt param name xMin value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name xMax value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name yMin value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name yMax value 6 gt lt param gt lt param name gridLines value 12 gt lt param gt lt applet gt 4 Modify the applet code to reflect the actual function plot window and number of gridlines To interact with the applet e Click and drag the graph area to bring up a cursor that displays the coordinates of the current point Shift click and drag the graph area to shift the viewable area e Ctrl click and drag the graph to re scale the image See Also Questions with Plots page 148 Plotting Using Maple page 201 Using a Maple Repository You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions To do this you must first upload your archives files into the class file space on the server When you create a Maple graded question you then specify the location of the archive as part of the question definition When executing the Maple code associated with that question the Maple libname variable will automatically be set to access the archive files specified Important When sett
203. e eee eeeeeeeneeeneeenenaes 204 Table 10 6 Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions ccsecceecceeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeee eee eeaeeeaeeeaneenaes 204 Table VO 7 Maple Notations ioc 25k a8 catia Salchuninccteeriuel E A E ka etodter ee Mantovani eens 204 Table 10 8 Formatting Numbers with m cceccceecececneecececaeeeeeenaeeceeeaaeeeeseaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaees 214 Table 10 9 Random Number Generators ceccseeecceececeeceaeeeeeececueeeeueeeecesceaaeeeeeececseseeaeeeeeeseeaaeeeeaes 221 Table 10 10 Maple Randomization Commands c ccccececeeeceeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea essa eee eeaneeae ees 222 Table 10 11 Options for GIF and JPEG Plots ccccecc cece eece ence eeceeeeeeeeeeeeneecaeeee seca eeeeeeaeeeaeeeeneeeeeeenenaes 228 Table 10 12 Mathematical Functions that Students Can Use cecceecc ence eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea esse eeseeaeeaeees 233 Table 10 13 Mathematical Functions Reserved for Instructor Use cccccccececeeece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeenenaes 233 Table 10 14 Options for 2 D Plots cccccceec cece eee ce eect cence eee nee n cence nee EEE EEE EGE EE EEE GEE GG Ee Ga Ee Ga esta Etta EEE 235 Tabl 0 15 Option tor 32 PO S Mawes fale Sec bene eae deeb E n dives Sale b woame aes 237 Table 11 1 Example LaTeX Document Structure 2 0 0 ccc cece cece eee cece cece eeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeseeaeeeaeees 248 Table 11
204. e minimum value is blank formula 0 353553 0 0001 Your answers must be correct to at least 4 decimal places end question Example 4 begin question Blanks This question mixes the menu and formula options qutext The graph of the function f x x 3 2 is the same as the graph of g x x 2 shifted to the blank menu right left blank formula 3 units end question Example 5 begin question blanks This question uses randomized variables qutext An earthquake that measures var a on the Richter scale is blank formula var ans times more powerful than one that measures var b Your answer must be exact code a rand 5 9 2 Sinc int rint 3 2 b Sa Sinc Sans int 10 Sinc The above code chooses a random value a between 5 and 9 to two significant figures b will be 2 3 or 4 less than a end question Constants of Integration Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Formula mod C The Formula Mod C question type is similar to the Formula type Answers can be any kind of formula entered in calculator syntax but responses are graded as correct if they differ from the given answer by a constant value Answers can include variables and standard functions This question type is designed for indefinite integral questions Note The answer field must be in calculator syntax not in TeX Enter the answer as you expect the student to enter it altho
205. e powerful and flexible You can use blanks formula questions to create a matrix question by setting the blank response cells in an HTML table If the answer is a number that is does not have any variables it is recommended that you specify in the question text whether an exact answer or an approximation is required In the case of an approximation the margin of error must be specified in your correct answer This can be done by specifying a margin of error using the operator For example if the answer field were 2 34 0 01 any response between 2 33 and 2 35 inclusive would be graded correct In other words the number following the operator is the margin of error For more information on tolerances see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 See Also Mathematical Fill in the Blanks formula option page 268 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 Formula page 137 LaTeX Authoring Overview page 247 Multipart Formula page 146 Using Script Files to Author Questions page 283 Chemistry Question Mode Formula qu qu x y mode Formula y grading chemistry In the chemistry question type student responses require a formula that matches the correct answer Table 9 2 Rules and Keys for Entering Chemistry Expressions Expression Keys Superscripts and Subscripts Enter superscripts using the caret character and subscripts using the undersc
206. e remaining groups to set the requirements that you want Review amp Finish Tab Finishing and Saving an Assignment Saving an assignment involves saving information in cached memory and in your class configuration To accept and publish the assignment you have created or modified click Finish in the Review amp Finish tab If you have scheduled it for immediate availability your new assignment is available for students on the Class Homepage The system does not save partially completed assignments until you click Finish in the Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor If you begin to create an assignment and then abandon it without clicking Finish your additions and changes will be lost If the server shuts down before you click the Finish button your editing changes will be lost When the server resumes it will use the last saved version of your assignment data and any unsaved changes you had made will be lost To reduce the risk of this during long assignment editing sessions you may want to periodically use the Finish button then select your assignment from the main Assignment Editor list of assignments to start a new editing session If you do this it is recommended that you mark the assignment as hidden so that students cannot access it Hide assignments from the main Assignment Editor page by hovering the mouse over the assignment name in the assignment list and clicking hide After clicking Finish you are returned to
207. e saved or published for student viewing e Exporting grades to a file In addition from the Gradebook you can grade essay questions add comments or adjust grades add external assignments and force grade active assignments Viewing Scores and Performing Gradebook Searches The system automatically stores assignment session scores in the Gradebook The Gradebook stores a variety of inform ation for each student such as the assignment start time the time spent on the assignment and the individual assignment question performance Use the Gradebook to view grade data organized by assignment by student or by question item View the results online or export them to use in programs such as Microsoft Excel You can download the results of any Gradebook search or report to a file in comma delimited format Search results are based on the data gathered by the system during student sessions including statistical analysis of student and class performance You start a search by selecting what information you want to include The Gradebook makes it easy to get to the level of detail you need For example you can begin by listing all student results on an assignment and then click a student s name to display only that student s data From the student record you can then change a grade or view the student s answers for each question on an assignment Generating Grade Reports You can define a grade report for your specified grading policy
208. e specified in your correct answer This can be done by Specifying a margin of error using the operator For example if the answer field were 2 34 0 01 any response between 2 33 and 2 35 inclusive would be graded correct In other words the number following the operator is the margin of error For more information on tolerances see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 Example 1 begin question Restricted Formula qutext What is the exact value of sin frac pi 4 Use calculator syntax for the answer not TeX answer 1 sqrt 2 Note The response sin pi 4 would be graded correct in Formula mode but not in Restricted Formula mode end question Example 2 begin question Restricted Formula qutext Compute the value of sin frac pi 4 Round your answer to 5 significant digits answer 0 70711 In this case a more accurate response is graded as incorrect end question Example 3 begin question Restricted Formula qutext Compute the value of sin frac pi 4 Your answer must be correct to at least 5 decimal places answer 0 707107 0 00001 Any numerical response between 0 707097 and 0 707117 is graded correct end question Example 4 begin question Restricted Formula This question uses randomized variables qutext What is the exact value of sin frac var n pi 4 answer var s 1 sqrt 2
209. e the fundamental question type Student responses must contain a mathematical expression in cluding numbers or math formulas 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 99 To create a Formula question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Mathematical formula b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a solution d Click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen a In the question text box enter the question statement To include complicated mathematical expressions click the Equation Editor icon gt in the toolbar This launches the Equation Editor b In the text region labeled Enter the correct answer enter the correct answer in symbolic math Your answer must be in the correct format For example for a restricted formula question you cannot use sin c Select the type of expression you want to accept from the drop down box This determines the question type Table 8 2 lists the question types and corresponding expression type Table 8 2 Expression Types Available in Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor Qu
210. e to view the students past results for the assignment in the Gradebook Important Deleting an assignment causes you to lose all results for that assignment from the Gradebook Disabling an Assignment To disable an assignment so that students cannot see it you can make it hidden Clear the Visible check box under Assignment Properties in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor If an assignment is flagged as hidden the Class Homepage does not include it in the list of assignments offered to students However a student can view past results for the assignment in the gradebook For more information on hiding an assignment see Assignment Visibility page 46 Alternatively you might schedule the assignment to be available for a specific time period Before and after the indicated availability window the assignment is shown in the assignment list on the Class Homepage but cannot be selected Deleting Shared Assignments The system does not allow you to delete an inherited assignment that appears in your assignment list as part of a shared class or a template To disable a shared assignment e In the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor clear the Visible check box under Assignment Properties For more information see Assignment Visibility page 46 Restoring a Hidden Assignment To make an assignment available 1 Return to the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor 2 Change the Visibility of the assi
211. e you want to include the image question text feedback hints or solution click the Insert Edit Image icon 3 Under the Image Info tab click Browse Server and select the image You will be shown a preview of the image 4 Click OK to add the image To use an HTML reference to an image file you have uploaded to your class web site use lt img src classes myclassurl question image gif gt where myclassurl is the unique identifier in your class URL and question image gif is the name of the image file If you have created subfolders in your class web site use lt img src classes myclassurl subfolder question image gif gt where subfolder is the subfolder or subfolders specifying the subfolder path Example of Link to File on the Class Web Site To include a link to a file for example a PDF in a question using the Question Editor 5 Create or edit a question in the Question Editor 6 In the field where you want to include the image question text feedback hints or solution click the Insert Edit Link icon 7 Under the Link Info tab click Browse Server and select the file 8 Click OK to add the link To use an HTML reference to the file you have uploaded to your class web site use lt a href classes myclassurl filename gt where myclassurl is the unique identifier in your class URL and filename is the name of the file 8 5 The Question Editor 89 If you have created subfolders in y
212. earch A list of all proctors for the class are displayed 4 Select the check box next to the user you want to remove and click Remove 2 3 The Class Web Site Editor In conjunction with your class homepage your class also has a web site folder on the system that you can use to store images and other resource material used in your questions The Web Site Editor provides a list of the contents of the web site and gives you options for uploading organizing and deleting files In the class Web Site Editor you can perform these actions Uploading Single Files page 18 e Uploading Multiple Files page 18 Working with Folders in the Class Web Site page 19 You can access the Web Site Editor from the Class Homepage Click Content Manager and then select Web Site Editor A Jack s Class Website Editor amp MapleT A Manlesoft System Homepage Class Homepage Static Resources Welcome Jack Day My Profile Actions Content Manager Gradebook Help Logout Files and folders in your class website 5 new subfolder upload file s to this point Figure 2 4 Web Site Editor Note Your class web site is also accessible directly from the Question Editor when you author a Clickable Image question 18 2 Creating and Managing Classes Uploading Single Files To upload a single file 1 From the Web Site Editor navigate to an appropriate subfolder on the web site or click the Create new subfolder ico
213. ears in line with the question statement rather than on a separate line as in a formula question The blanks formula question type accepts only numbers and math expressions There is no support for physical units To create a blanks formula question specify the e formula argument in the grader field of the question correct answer in math syntax for processing by the system math parser in the blank field To identify multiple correct answers separate each with a comma Do not use a trailing comma See the following example Example Script for a Blanks Question that Uses All Three Blanks options qu 1 1 mode Blanks qu 1 1 question Select red from the menu lt 1 gt lt br gt Enter red or green in the box lt 2 gt lt br gt Enter 3 or 4 in the formula box lt 3 gt aae 1 1 blank 1 red green blue 1 1 blank 2 red green 9 2 Math Question Types 135 1 1 blank 3 3 4 1 1 grader 1 menu 1 1 grader 2 text 1 1 grader 3 formula You must provide the correct answer in the system math syntax not TeX Enter the answer as you expect the student to enter it although equivalent answers are graded correct This option is similar to Formula but may be more convenient for some questions Another advantage of the blanks question type is that several blanks can be included in a single question and different blank options can be mixed in a single question This makes the blanks typ
214. ears under its new name in the Assignment List Note that the original assignment inherited from the shared or template class also appears in the list If you do not want the original assignment to appear remove it from view by clearing the Visible check box under Assignment Properties in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor Important It is possible to break the link to a parent assignment by uploading a course module that has a question with the same name For more information see Importing and Installing a Course Module page 64 26 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Previewing Assignments You can preview an assignment from the student s perspective 1 From your Class Homepage click on an assignment The assignment opens in a new window 2 Your results are recorded in the Gradebook but the data is not included in statistical reports since you are an in structor Previewing Questions To preview individual questions within an assignment use the Assignment Editor See Previewing Questions in As signments page 40 Printing Assignments To print an assignment 1 Inthe Assignment Editor move the mouse over the assignment name to be printed Six option buttons are displayed 2 Select print The system displays the list of questions in the browser and opens a second browser window that contains a Back button and a Print button 3 Review the assignment 4 Click the Print button in the secon
215. ect because it does not have the same value as the correct answer value 2 771 and 2 771 is incorrect because it has more than 3 significant digits Example Ina physics problem where the correct answer is 2 70 if you insist that a student enter the correct number of significant digits you must use the Figures option If you select Require absolute accuracy and enter 2 70 in the answer value text field 2 7 2 70 and 2 700 are graded correct which is not the desired behavior You must select Figures select 3 from the drop down box and enter 2 70 in the answer value text field In this case the student responses 2 7 and 2 700 are graded incorrect 8 5 The Question Editor 87 Setting a Margin of Error To directly specify the margin of error select Accept err and then enter the numeric value of the variance or corresponding algorithmic variable in the err text field For example if the correct answer is 3 142 and err 0 001 the range of correct responses is between 3 141 and 3 143 inclusive e To specify the margin of error as a percentage of the correct answer select Accept perc and then enter the percentage in the perce text field For example if the correct answer is 3 141592 and perc 1 the range of correct responses is between 3 11017608 and 3 17300792 inclusive Specifying a Precision and a Margin of Error e To specify the margin of error as the tolerance in the value of a significant di
216. ections see Functions within Algorithms page 219 e To use the variables in other sections of the question enclose them in the var macro For example to refer to the variable a use var a In the following examples a formula question is designed through a series of refinements Example 1 begin question Formula qutext Find the solution of the linear equation var a x var b var c answer var c var b var a code Sa rint 12 1 b rint 12 1 c rint 12 1 end question The above code randomly determines integer coefficients a b and c between 1 and 12 The answer is calculated in the answer section 11 7 Tutorial Using Algorithms in LaTeX Questions 265 Although the above example does not cause errors there are several side effects e The answer is displayed in the form 7 3 5 for example This provides an indication of the method for obtaining the answer which may be inappropriate The above format can return answers of the form 7 7 5 which is more complicated than the simplified form 0 To avoid these issues rewrite this example as follows using a new variable ans so that you return only the final answer Example 2 Refinement of Example 1 begin question Formula qutext Find the solution of the linear equation var a x var b var c answer var ans code Sa rint 12 1 b rint 12 1 c rint 12 1 ans c b
217. ed Similarly n specifies the placement of y axis tickmarks and p specifies the placement of z axis tickmarks title t This option specifies a title for the plot The value of t must be a string The default is no title You can create multi line titles for standard plots Use the characters n to denote the start of a new title line The strings must be entered using left single quotes view zmin zmax or xmin xmax ymin ymax zmin zmax This option indicates the minimum and maximum coordinates of the surface to be displayed on the screen The default is the entire surface See Also plotmaple text page 227 10 22 Details on Using Algorithmic Variables 239 10 22 Details on Using Algorithmic Variables The Answer Field Evaluation and Requirements The answer field specifies internal directives or instructions to the system for how to grade the question It operates like a command line statement when processed by the system The answer field accepts only values that can be system evaluated numbers formulas algorithmic variables or numbers and or formulas with required physical units The system recognizes e Equivalent numeric and algebraic expressions e Equivalent standard physical units e Scientific notation The operator as a representation of a margin of error The answer 3 75 0 05 kg grades all responses in the range 3 70 to 3 80 kg inclusive correct Note You cannot use
218. ed as the correct answer Example begin question key words qutext Which two scientists independently discovered inductance answer Michael Faraday and Joseph Henry Any responses that include both the words Faraday and Henry is graded correct If the question is not answered correctly Michael Faraday and Joseph Henry is displayed as the correct answer end question Question Mode Essay The essay question type is an open response question The system does not grade it You must grade each student s answer and assign a score using the Gradebook Example begin question essay qutext Discuss the effect of gamma rays on Man in the Moon Marigolds end question Question Mode Blanks text option The blank text question type creates a fill in the blank question The text inside a blank text command is removed and a drop down box is displayed Notes e You must provide the correct answer as an argument to the macro The text option is the default That is blank and blank text are equivalent e An advantage of the Blanks question type is that several blank macros can be included in a single question and different blank options can be mixed in a single question This makes the Blanks type powerful and flexible Blanks cannot contain TeX math mode content Blanks must not appear in math mode Only raw text can be used in blanks Example begin question Blanks qutext
219. ed that you use the Edit Source facility when editing a question until you are familiar with the source file structure If you are an experienced user of the system you can use the Edit Source facility to edit the source for a question when editing a question in the Question Editor In this editing window you can edit any aspect of the question script for your question including text content for any data field To edit the question source in the Question Editor 1 Expand a topic in the left pane and click the hyperlink of the question you want to edit 2 Click Edit 3 Click Edit source 4 Edit the source as desired When finished click Save Important If you introduce a syntax error for example invalid field or value data the question will be unusable In particular it is not recommended that you change the question type for a question 5 You will be returned to the Question Editor screen This process depends on the question type In general it involves clicking Next on the Question Editor screen and subsequent screens Click Finish to register your changes See Also LaTeX Authoring Overview page 247 8 5 The Question Editor 85 Using Script Files to Author Questions page 283 Redefining Question Types In the Question Editor when creating a new question you can change the question type any time before you click Finish When you click Finish the system adds the question to the question reposito
220. ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeea seca eeeeeeaeesaeeeneeenaes 30 Assignment Editor Step 4 Review amp Finish cece cecceecceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeee esse eeaeeaeeeaneennes 32 S ScAssignment Ly pes f 22 lt 5 E E cence nce shee dh ob dese haw bec na ah once ibaa bahia ditto Peake 33 iii iv Contents Assignment Types Overview zrelih a tevacge seubabedicavhoedecvebhuds teebans A E a eE A SN ESA 33 Homework or Quiz Assignments cecceecceecc ence eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeece cece eese esse eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeges 34 Proctoreds Exams foscavedieesPicsse aa a aaa salou E A A a aa as 35 Anonymous Practice Assignments sseesesseseeseeseeserstttt stette sste tetett ceca eese esse trte eeseeeaeeeaseeeeeseeeeeeeges 35 Study Session and Mastery Assignments cccccceeeceeec cece ee cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeegeeeea 36 Mastery Assignment 22 3 cccdedsesccedek Veecda ds Ue ccenenn ev cocens da Gudels cdeeecs Hea edeey dawecens de vendai eveucdsdyscaueaneveeeseds 36 Study Session Assignments sareen esa e aR EEEIEE E EEE a Te Week ead E E RE E T TEENS eave 37 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor cecceeceeeceeecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeee cece eeseeeae eeu eeueeeaneeeneeenegaes 37 Choose Name Tab missni ien anana aa a a a e a a n a sdedenuesiestenst n 37 Select Questions Tab reari i ei ves TA E ERE E A baw E E i E ea Ea 38 Set Policies TaD arrason aa E naka a a a AT a e
221. eeaeeeaneeaaes 182 Controlling Answer Tolerance suas einnsean cc a A ievedeeel valued EE EAE deaseecet ene 183 Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions cecceeceeeceeece cece cece eee eeeeeeueeeueeeeeeeeeneeeaes 184 Significant Digits in Maple Questions cccceecceeece cece ee ce een ee ee cena een eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeea eee eene eee 185 Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions ceccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 185 Entering Chemistry Expressions ssiri issaraen a aaiae A EEan EERE ehe tect 186 Plotting a Student Responsen ei iee E dn os EE E EEEE bua wed E E E i a 187 10 5 Using Formula Syntax a e R E av A aa a E o A E eee 188 10 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions sseeceeeeeceeececeeeeeeeceeneeeeanes 188 Editing with the Equation Editor ccccececece eee nece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeea cece eeae essa eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeges 188 Equation Editor Palette cisrenan en ede a e cc cea AE cc cea eda ceased EE EE AE EEE E 190 Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax ccccecceeeceeeceeece cece eee eeceeeae eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeegas 192 10 7 Using MathML to Create Formatted Math Expressions ssceeeeecceececeeeeeeeeceeecenueeeeeeeeeaeseeanes 196 Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions 0cccecceecceeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeecneeeaeeceeeseeseeeaeeeaneeanes 196 MathML Authoring with MathType
222. eeaeegas 136 EQ uatiOii cutie cord so eedete set nna E ett ek eee ae Sat ca hwets E E Arabs hoes eae eae e es eRe ald 137 lonan alni a 3 occ cen E peesuehee Heeade a ue deceteny dence seu E E seers 137 Formula Form Variant ayers veces Seasehges ens a a e e E aa ccwedhedet values deen titel seabeetse 138 Pommula List e veicdes sede Gade oe alee she et esa ede eee ede ee 139 Formula With Wits serens coatavtutedueacte ent secetsdeenty seat eedata cp E eae Mi Ra Ea ates nh 139 Maple graded Question Type Overview cccecceecceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea seca eeeeeese esse eeaeeeaeeeeneeeneeaes 140 Maple graded Formula 22 e eies texseiude eaa deb abenscavbceccavehude eda enban saini 142 Maple Syntax roroi cece Sek edi ebv coeds E thes eed Ula E E E a E Reeds oho EEE E E E Haws 143 Matrix ss sndeseireret a ace caesar a ydthetaneit ails A nes veka A cab ian celebs les dean since 144 Multi Formula srescctseccet siTe riae EEEE Ea o EEEE OE VEA GEE EE E EEE ese eee eee 145 M ltipart Formula vesener a aa a a aa A aa e a saena eaatoee s 146 NUMEO apaa e EE Ne EEEE Re Pac Ses tact SOA EAT EEE A dec ee de 146 Contents vii Questions with Plots a aa a eked ateckene dexdebens iuenceded A E teeeete a a ves beni teehee cases 148 Restricted Formula s ts cud Heed Ri eo ee ed ee Re 150 Vectors Of F rmulas esanen dake ase a a Dat ese teehge soot oie E E a Canela og senatend eee aS 150 9 3 Applet Questions neiro eie decade van iie
223. eedback Algorithm Edit ploti plotmaplet plot 2 4 4 3 x 1 3 y 5 10 Figure 8 6 Question Designer Question 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor e 105 For detailed information on creating question designer questions see Question Designer Questions page 166 See Also Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions page 298 Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 284 Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 296 True or False Questions in the Question Editor 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select True false b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d Click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen a In the text box enter the question statement b Select the radio button True or False corresponding to the correct answer c Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question See Also True or False Question Example Script page 300 Creating Pop Up References in Questions To add a pop up reference to a question
224. eeeeeeeececaeeeeueceeaeeceaueeeeeseenaeeeeaes 145 Figure 9 6 Input Field for a Multipart Formula Question ccceeseceeeceeneeeeeeceeeeeceueeeeeecesaeseeuaeeeseseeanes 146 Figure 9 7 Input Field for a Vector of Formulas Question ccseeeceeeceeneeeeeeceeeeeceueeeeeeecesaeseeueeeeaeneeanes 151 Figure 9 8 Three Varieties of Blanks Questions Drop Down List Text Box and Formula Box 00 000e 153 Figure 9 9 Clickable Image Questions ceceni pda The Crave nce ssta vc estan eh Gopal ya cue benes sente wPasvakestves 154 Figure 9 10 Demonstration of Various Free Response and Fill in the Blanks Questions 0 ceeeeeeneeeeee ee 157 Figure 9 1 1s Question D stoner Screen 225 025 co eves cc ctnetls st He ea eee Serta oa eee aes Baking gu aoe bose Pak Mouse dee eS 167 Figure 9 12 Tabs for Specifying Feedback Algorithms and Additional Question Info cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ee ee 167 Figure 9 13 Access the Equation Editor in the Question Designer ssseeeeececeeeeeueeeeeescecueeeeueeeeaeeeeanes 168 Figure 9 14 Equation Editor Palettes pe ea 6a dade aaee ra ean e e a ia ea oee naea aa eaae 169 Figure 9 15 Add Response Area in the Question Designer ccececceececneeeeececceeeeuueeeeescecaeeeeueeeeaeseeunes 170 Figure 9 16 List Response Area in the Question Designer ccsecceecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea esse eeeeeaeeeaees 172 Figure 9 17 Maple graded Response Are
225. eeeeeeseseneegas 263 11 7 Tutorial Using Algorithms in LaTeX Questions cccceecceeceeeceeeceeece seca eeceeeae eee eeeeeeueeeeeeeeneeees 264 Algorithmic Questions oss eoio duce enced tevcts EE E vane coed EEE AAEE EEE E 264 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX sseeseseesreseeseesrssersrsserressrsrrserserressererssesreseeseeseserersse 267 Other Math Question Features sige veseds veda cess ierti oE E CA e EE EE EEE E EET 267 Mathematical Fill in the Blanks formula option cc cece cece ceeece cece eece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeegas 268 Constants of Integration Questions in LaTeX cecceeceeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeea seca eeee cess esas eeueeeseeeneeeeeeees 269 Equation Questions in LaTex n 22 2922 seesecdsassabeds lav teneededettysiychigns ue ddedenees gehan ea aaas sis 270 Formula List Questions in LaTeX rincones cece cence ee ee cece ee nee nec E EE EE EE EEE EEE EAR EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EEA 271 Formula Questions in LaTeX s cscc besdiseeesastavevs cxsseiee ss E EEEE E n e gee E EE AEE a A 271 Maple graded Questions in LaTeX cecceecc ence ence ence eeceeeeeeeeeeeee cece cece eeae eee eeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseeegas 272 Matix Questions m la TeX ince esis inc a a ashen cava bugs Lash sees see e reeks ganna sawed eed ame Laws toed enced ds 274 Multi Formula Questions in LaTeX cece cece cece eee eee eee nee e eee ene EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EEE EEE EES 274 Numeric Que
226. egistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e Macintosh Mac OS and Safari are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc e Firefox is a trademark of the Mozilla Foundation e Java all Java based marks and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Maplesoft is independent of Sun Microsystems Inc e W3C is a trademark registered in numerous countries of the World Wide Web Consortium marks of W3C are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio e MathType is a trademark of Design Science Inc e MathML Mathematical Markup Language is a trademark of the World Wide Web Consortium e Blackboard Building Blocks and the Blackboard Learning System are trademarks registered trademarks of Blackboard Inc in the United States and or other countries Usage by permission e Moodle is a registered trademark of the Moodle Trust e WebCT is a trademark of WebCT Inc All other brand names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies A 2 System Requirements The following is a list of the minimum system requirements for access to the Maple T A system System performance may vary based on the speed of your Internet connection For all system systems it is recommended that you set your screen resolution to at least 800 x 600 dpi Client Recommended Configuration Instructors Students and
227. egy to provide an example answer as a grader parameter in the testbank For example set the answer text to be up and to the left and set grader param example 140 27 After your grader class is created create a JAR file and place it in the WEB INF lib directory so it is accessible to the class loader Then restart the Maple T A server 9 4 Blanks Questions 153 Step 3 Author the Maple T A Question The last step is to host your Java applet in a Maple T A question using the Applet question type Applet questions must be authored in a plain text script file For example you can enter the sample code above for a question with slider balls in a plain text file then save the file as filename qu 9 4 Blanks Questions Blanks Questions can be authored inside the Question Editor Select Question Type screen by selecting Fill in the blanks as the question type or you can author them using LaTeX or plain text script production paths To specify the form of the cell use one of the following options Menu option Select a choice from a drop down box This variety of Fill in the Blank questions can be authored to provide context sensitive feedback That is you can provide a specific comment for each choice If you author in a text or HTML editor use the lines qu x y blank lt blank_num gt lt correct_response gt lt incorrect_1 gt lt incorrect_n gt qu x y grader lt blank_num gt menu in the question script U
228. eld for the response appears as shown in Figure 9 7 2t t 2 3 This question accepts answers that are in a form like 1 3 or 3 7 3z The entries can be numbers or formulas Help Change Entry Style Preview Figure 9 7 Input Field for a Vector of Formulas Question See Also Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Formula page 137 Formula List page 139 Coordinates of Points and Vectors Questions in LaTeX page 280 9 3 Applet Questions Question Mode Applet qu x y mode Applet The Applet question presents a Java applet Students are required to interact with the applet using the mouse and or keyboard to alter the applet or identify hot spots in the movie to produce the correct answer qu 1 1 mode Applet qu 1 1 question The left hand ball has mass of ml1 kg and the right hand ball has mass m2 The center mass of the left ball is hl1 meters above the ground Move the right hand ball to the height that gives it the same potential energy as the ball on the left kg aaaagaaag ak sI a3 all PRPRPRPPP HR PRPPRPRPP PR all h2 m1 m2 Pa ae sE answer h2 applet applets sliderBall SliderBall width 100 height 200Q param right 2 param left h1 grader class gateway question grader StringMatch grader param ignoreCase true algorithm hi int rint 35 5 int rint 35 5 rand 10 70 3 sig 3 m1 h1 h2 name Physics Ap
229. elect the desired search criteria Then click Search The search results are shown in the right panel of the question repository screen See Figure 8 11 Export Modify Groups Clone Show Details Show Groups o Show Assignments C YAI Questions 6 CO Numeric Question Created 2 17 10 12 57 PM Modified 8 10 10 4 34 PM O Factoring Question Created 8 1010 4 32 PM Modified 8 10 10 4 33 PM Showing 14 D A S S ft E Revisions 1 Author Maple 101 Type Numeric S A l Loy amp Revisions 1 Author Maple 101 Type Maple qraded Figure 8 11 Search Results in the Question Repository 8 7 Question Repository 115 In the search results you can view summary information for each question and sort questions based on question type creation date and date last modified You can change the view options Show Details Show Groups Show Assign ments to show more or less information about each question A revision history is kept for each question You can access earlier versions of a question by clicking on Revisions Table 8 4 lists buttons may be available for each question Table 8 4 Question Repository Available Actions Icon Description a preview the question or assignment Fe edit the question modify the groups to which the question belongs a clone the question creates a copy of a question m delete the question 6 8 share the question make public make private N
230. emicolon at the end of the variable definition is optional if there is only one variable defined in the algorithm statement e The syntax of formulas and the use of operators in variable definition statements is similar to the standard graphing calculator syntax used in the system with the addition of some new functions Therefore the system s usual arithmetic operations and functions can be used in the expression portion of the code statement e However unlike most other programming languages variables cannot be redefined in terms of themselves for example the statement a a 1 is invalid The following additional functions and operations are also available for use in variable definitions in algorithms Random Number Functions Random integer generation integers in a specified range in steps of k Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 230 Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k page 229 Random real number generation to k significant digits rand m n rand m n k page 228 Operations and Modifiers condition x See condition x page 222 220 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions eq a b See eq a b ge a b le a b ne a b page 223 ne a b not a See not a page 227 gt a b See gt a b It a b page 225 It a b if a b c See if a b c page 225 decimal n x int x sig n x See decimal
231. empty class it may already be populated with a series of assignments based on testing materials or other shared questions If not you will see a blank list here initially To access the Assignment Editor e From the Class Homepage select the Content Manager menu and then select Assignments A MapleT A Jack s Class Assignment Editor A Maple Maplesoft System Homepage Class Homepage Assignment List Welcome Jack Day My Profile Actions Content Manager Gradebook Help Logout New Synchronize Select an assignment name link to edit that assignment While an assignment is being edited it will be locked Please ensure that you exit the assignment editor by using the page navigation buttons Failure to do so will leave the assignment in a locked state Assignment Name Points Type Availability Modified Active DEEV Demonstration of the Maple graded Question Type 25 0 Practice Unlimited 6 20 05 0 B28 Demonstration ctAueston ines 63 0 Practice Unlimited 6 20 05 0 3 fq Assignmentt 3 0 Homework Quiz Unlimited 410 07 0 Figure 3 1 Assignment Editor Overview The Assignment Editor Screen Options in the Assignment Editor Uses main window New Allows you to create new assignments Adding New Assignments page 23 Synchronize Allows you to refresh any inherited assignments Assignment Name Allows you to open and modify existing assignments Editing Assignments page 25 Edit All
232. ems in the correct answer for example 1 12 12 If you use semicolons in the correct answer the system treats the question as an unordered list though the type is Ordered and allows the student to give the formulas in any order In a test the input field for the response appears as shown in Figure 9 4 Your answer hez 2x 2 This entry box accepts lists of terms separated by commas The entries can be numbers or formulas The entries must be given in the correct order Need more help on math syntax Figure 9 4 Input Field for a Formula List Question See Also Formula List Questions in LaTeX page 271 Formula page 137 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 MultiFormula page 145 Formula with Units Question Mode Dimensioned formula qu x y mode Dimensioned formula The Dimensioned formula question type is a highly versatile Correct answers can include algebraic formulas unit dimensions numeric responses or any combination of these Use this question type for any formula where you require the student to specify the physical units for the expression for example m s or kg cm 2 and where the formula is not an equation When you give the units with the answer you must use the units that are recognized by the system The system can convert between units of the same type For example if you type the answer as 30s the student can give the answer as 30s 0 5min or 1 1
233. ended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d Click Next 3 On the Import Questions screen a Select the radio button corresponding to the group containing the questions to be used as parts Click Next 4 On the Question Statement amp Weighting screen a In the text region enter the question statement the text to appear at the top of the question b In the Select questions and assign weightings box i Select the check boxes beside questions to include as parts ii Click the plus and minus buttons to assign the relative weighting of each c From the Numbering style drop down menu select the numbering style for the parts of the question d Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question See Also Multipart Questions page 162 Multipart Questions Partial Credit page 163 Creating a New Question or Editing an Existing Question page 76 Multipart Question Example Script page 295 Tutorial Working with Multipart Questions page 112 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 101 Multiple Choice Questions in the Question Editor 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type
234. eneral information on algorithmic variables see Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 Example 1 4 You can use margins of errors with complicated answers Enclose the answer in parentheses when there is a percentage margin of error Otherwise the percentage error multiplies only the last term in your answer mode Formula name Absolute margin of error in sum comment The total area is AreaSquare SAreaCircle qu editing useHTML qu 1 4 algorithm length rand 2 15 2 S diameter rand 3 10 2 AreaSquare length length AreaCircle decimal 2 pi diameter 2 2 qu 1 4 question What is the total area of a square with sides of length length and a circle with diameter S diameter qu 1 4 answer S length 2 pi diameter 2 2 1 0 01 qu 1 4 tolerance 1 0E 9 qu PRPRPRPRP AAAA Important e The exact answer is enclosed in parentheses so that the margin of error applies to both terms in the sum If the answer were length 2 pi diameter 2 2 1 0 01 the margin of error would be based on only the second term pi diameter 2 2 because the assumed multiplication is of higher precedence than the addition Numeric Mathematical Questions For Numeric question types you cannot use the operator to define a margin of error It is recommended that you use the Question Editor on screen dialog boxes for setting the margin of error in numeric and numeric with unit questions Howeve
235. ent responses must use Maple syntax For more information see Maple Syntax page 143 Example 2 begin question Maple qutext Find the solution to the initial value problem xy sin x y 0 0 Give your answer as the formula for Sy x allow2d 0 maple Si x The response int sin t t t 0 x is graded correct end question Maple Plotting In any Maple graded question you can plot the student response or a function related to the response using Maple plot code Specify the plotting code in the plot field In any question including non mathematical questions you can include a Maple plot Specify the Maple plot code in the drawMaplePlot field Example 3 begin question maple qutext The graph of a trigonometric function f x is given below drawMaplePlot plot 2 sin Pi x Pi 4 x 2 2 The graph passes through the point 1 4 2 Give a formula for Sf x maple 2 sin Pi x Pi 4 plot plot SRESPONSE x 2 2 You would not use plot for this question because it gives away the answer end question 274 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Matrix Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Matrix The Matrix question type lays out an n by m matrix of text fields each of which accepts a number or formula Matrix questions must be composed in LaTeX Notes e The given correct answer must be presented as a comma separated list with the first row listed fi
236. er or both types of variables in any question type The syntax for a Maple based variable definition is lt variable i gt maple lt Maple_ command gt Using a Text or HTML Editor To define an algorithmic variable in the plain text script file specify variable definitions or other variable control sequences in the algorithm field algorithm lt variable definition _1 gt lt variable_ definition_n gt Using the Question Editor In the Question Editor define variables by directly entering Maple based variable definitions on the algorithm screen or using the Algorithm Designer Tutorial 1 The following tutorial shows how to convert a static Maple Formula question to an algorithmically generated question by using variables assigned values by Maple commands Maple graded Question Consider the following plain text script question definition which asks a student to enter an anti derivative of x3 question Enter an anti derivative of x 3 maple evalb diff SRESPONSE x x 3 type formula mode Maple allow2d 1 name Maple AntiDerivative 1 1 comment Any function of the form x 4 4 C where C is a constant is an anti derivative of x 3 qu 1 1 editing useHTML agagaaa 10 25 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring 245 Notes 1 This question uses Maple to verify that the derivative of the student response is equal to x 3 This is recommended in place of comparing t
237. eric Question Accept 1000 separator Students responses containing commas as a separator are graded correct Accept scientific notation Student responses specified using scientific notation for example 2 0E2 are graded correct Accept signs Student responses containing a leading dollar sign are graded correct Accept arithmetic Student responses specified using the arithmetic operators that is 0 and are graded correct Select the style of negative numbers Negative responses must specified by using a negative sign by enclosing in parentheses or by using either notation to be graded correct Note If you select the Accept arithmetic check box then you cannot allow parentheses to be used to indicate a negative response See Also Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 182 86 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Numeric Questions in the Question Editor page 102 Setting Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions When working with Numeric questions in the Question Editor you can specify the Precision of student responses that is the number of digits e Acceptable margin of error for student responses e Precision and margin of error for student responses See Figure 8 4 For examples of the related plain text script files see Answer Tolerance Example Script page 285 Specify precision Require absolute accuracy C Figures 1 The student answer
238. eric question type in the Edit Response Area dialog Numeric questions can accept numbers without units as valid responses The correct answer must be expressed as a number The student response can be an expression such as 1 2 3 4 Numeric responses can be expressed in decimal form or scientific notation for example 3 24E4 To require units enter a unit in the Units Part field for example m for meters If you do not enter a required unit dimension the system displays only a single response cell that accepts only numbers If you do enter a unit dimension students are presented two cells one for the number part and one for the unit part The student must enter correct values in both cells to receive full credit Correct answers can be specified with a margin of error or range of tolerance Algorithmic variables can be created for use in the question statement answer hint feedback and solution fields The system automatically grades equivalent numeric expressions correct 4 Click Finish to save and preview the question 176 9 Question Types Numeric Weighting Numeric Part Units Part Numeric Format Accept 1000s separator Accept scientific notation oO Accept sign M P 1 234 0 1 234E 3 23 1257 metic Required with Set figures Margin of error Margin in n th digit Percentage margin Figure 9 19 Numeric Response Area in the Question Designer See Also Authoring with the Qu
239. es govern the availability of the assignment to students in your class Scheduled times refer to your system s time zone setting indicated in the Scheduling section and set by your System Administrator Before and after the indicated availability window the assignment is displayed in the assignment list viewable by students on your Class Homepage however it cannot be selected Note that for the instructor unavailable assignments appear in the list of assignments on the Assignment Editor page Additionally unavailable assignments will appear in a student s past results page if the student completed them Notes e You can also choose to withhold grades and feedback until after the assignment due date by setting these policies under Feedback in the Set Policies tab in the Assignment Editor e Students must complete their assignment sessions by submitting their work to be graded before the time and date specified in the assignment schedule e You can also set time limits for assignment sessions If there is a time limit set for the test in the assignment definition a pop up window warns students as they approach the time limit They are not allowed to answer additional questions once they exceed the time limit however they can submit their work up to that point for grading e By default the system does not establish a scheduled start or end time for assignments 46 3 Creating and Managing Assignments See Also Configuring Feedbac
240. essed as a Definite integral int f x x a b e Derivative diff f x x Limit limit f x x 0 Differential equation for example diff y x t t c 2 diff y x t x x e Set for example 1 4 9 e Matrix for example 2 34 Some example questions involving matrices are created in Tutorial Maple Syntax Questions with Matrices page 107 Maple Syntax with Text Entry Response Option qu x y mode Maple type maple allow2d 0 Guidelines Student Use of Unevaluated Forms of Maple Commands Some Maple commands take unevaluated forms For example Diff is the inert form of diff In Maple T A students are directed to answer questions using the unevaluated forms of Maple commands Your code should accept these forms 144 9 Question Types Semicolon Usage The instructor should specify to the student in the question text whether a trailing semicolon is required or alternatively write code such that the presence or absence of a trailing semicolon has no bearing on the evaluation of the response For example evalb S RESPONSE factor x 2 1 as one line of question code does not allow a student response with a semicolon such as x 1 x 1 The response is marked as incorrect If the question code contains two lines completed with semicolons such as A SRESPONSE evalb A factor x 2 1 the student can answer with or without a semicolon and the response is marked as correct Syntax Maple T A does not
241. ession assign ments info optional user specified No internal directive Contains descriptive information about the question Multiple user specified fields and corresponding values can be contained in this statement Definitions Internal Directive fields are commands that are evaluated and performed by the system They cannot contain HTML or MathML tags and must conform to the system syntax for algorithms formulas math expressions or command switches e Display fields hold question information that is used in displaying the question or related feedback hints or solutions The topic and name fields cannot contain variable values because algorithmic variables are set at the level of the question Question Modes Question Types Every question must begin with a mode statement Using the mode statement Maple T A formats the question on the page Different question types require different fields in their definition For example you must specify every choice for a multiple choice question as a choice 1 field whereas for a formula question you specify only the correct numeric answer e The question type is entered in the mode field The question type specification can be all lower case letters or have initial upper case letters For example the following line would designate the fifth question in topic 3 as multiple choice qu 3 5 mode multiple choice Table 8 6 lists all the Maple
242. estion Designer page 167 Edit Insert Response Area page 170 Question Types and Properties page 169 Insert Algorithm Insert algorithms using the Algorithm tab in the Question Designer screen Algorithms Tab in Question Designer Click the Algorithm tab in the Question Designer screen and then click Edit and follow the instructions on the screen Maple generated plots to be included in questions are defined in the Algorithm Editor using the plotmaple command When you define a plot in the Algorithm Editor you can click Refresh to see the plot image verify the plot statement is correct and edit it if necessary For more information on the Algorithm Editor see Adding and Editing Al gorithms page 78 Note When refreshing the algorithmic variable you need to change the plot statement in order for the new image to appear Changing a plotdevice or plotoption entry will not update the plot See Also Plotting Using Maple page 201 9 17 Short Phrase Questions 177 9 17 Short Phrase Questions Question Mode short phrase qu x y mode short phrase Note This question type is supported for backwards compatibility with earlier releases It is recommended that you use the List question type instead Short phrase questions apply the same grading rules as other free response text questions The question statement is presented first followed by a student response entry cell on a separate line Short phrase que
243. estion Type Type of Expression Formula Formula Restricted Formula Formula without logs and trig Dimensioned Formula Formula with physical units Formula Mod C Formula that matches responses to within C Equation Equation Multi Formula Unordered list of formulas Formula List Ordered list of formulas Ntuple Vector of formulas Chemistry Chemical equation d Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question For more information on Mathematical Formula questions see Math Question Types page 132 See Also Authoring Mathematical Questions page 179 Editing with the Equation Editor page 188 Understanding the Math Capabilities page 181 100 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Multipart Questions in the Question Editor You create a multipart question in the Question Editor by selecting questions for its parts from a question group To create and organize the parts for a multipart question 1 Create a question group in the Question Repository that will contain the questions that will form the parts of your multipart question Add the questions to the group 2 If necessary create or import questions 3 If necessary reorder the questions To create a multipart question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Multipart question b It is recomm
244. estion bank you can e Replace the previous version by using the same name Assignments that reference the previous version are automatically edited to use the updated questions from the new version e Use a new name Assignments that reference the previous version continue to use the previous versions of the questions To use the new questions create new assignments or edit old assignments to reference the updated question bank To save a question bank that has been opened and edited uploaded or created 1 If necessary return to the Question Bank Editor main menu 2 Select Save Question Bank from the Actions menu 3 Enter a question bank name If this is an updated version of an existing question bank consider the implications outlined above 4 If you are replacing a previously installed question bank the system displays the following message Warning You are about to overwrite the question bank Text Bank 3 This will replace all the topics and questions in that question bank with your current topics and questions Note If you save your question bank under this title any assignments that you have set up to use the question bank that s currently saved with this title will use the new question bank from now on However records of assignments that students have already taken will continue to show the questions from the old question bank Click OK to continue and overwrite the existing question bank or Cancel to pick a di
245. estion types and capabilities designed for technical and scientific educators It grades responses that contain symbolic or numeric answers There are many restrictions and extensions to the type of answers that instructors accept which determine the variety of question types in the system Learn more about the system math capabilities e How are questions with algebraic and numeric math authored Authoring Mathematical Questions page 179 e Why are there so many varieties of mathematics questions Math Question Types Overview page 132 e How can I control margin of error and tolerance Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 e Can the system display WYSIWYG mathematics Math Question Types Overview page 132 e Does the system accept graphing calculator style math entry Using Formula Syntax page 188 e What syntax constraints are placed on the processing of math expressions Basic Math Syntax in the System page 180 182 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions e What functions and operators are supported Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 204 e What units does the parser understand Default Table of Physical Unit Equivalents page 205 Does the system support MathML MathML in the Questions page 198 e Does the system support LaTeX LaTeX Authoring Overview page 247 10 4 Student Responses and Grading This section provides detailed information related to grading of student responses Studen
246. estions page 166 Short Phrase Question Example Script The following example script creates a Short Phrase question qu 1 topic Short Phrase Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Short Phrase qu 1 1 name Differential geometry Metric tensor qu 1 1 question lt b gt Short Phrase Question lt b gt lt br gt Which tensor is used to measure distances and angles qu 1 1 answer metric See Also Short Phrase Questions page 177 True or False Question Example Script The following example script creates a True False question topic True or False Question Example Script mode True False name Quantum Tunneling editing useHTML answer 2 choice 1 True choice 2 False TEELE question The phenomenon of quantum tunneling has a counterpart in classical physics 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 301 See Also True or False Questions page 177 302 e 12 Plain Text Script Authoring Appendix A Additional Information A 1 Copyrights and Trademarks Copyrights page 303 Trademarks page 303 Copyrights e Copyright Maplesoft a division of Waterloo Maple Inc 2011 Trademarks e Maplesoft Maple Waterloo Maple and Maple T A are trademarks of Waterloo Maple Inc e Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds e Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat Inc e SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell Inc e Microsoft Excel Internet Explorer Windows and Windows Vista are r
247. estions menu then Import Question Bank 2 Click the Browse button and navigate to the source file on your hard drive Click Open 3 Select how the questions will be organized when importing 4 Click Import to import the question bank The topics are displayed in the left panel of the Question Editor 5 Save your imported question bank From the Actions menu select Save Question Bank When you upload a question bank file into the system it performs a set of validation routines to ensure that the questions function Occasionally you may encounter an error with a variable name or definition upon uploading The following is a summary of the system s analysis of variables upon initial loading of a question bank file e For variables displayed within HTML text for example in a question statement or feedback area a problematic variable does not produce a data value generated from its definition Instead its variable name is displayed highlighted in red e For variables appearing in non displayed field parameters for example the answer to a question the variables SANSWER and RESPONSE default to 0 All others have the variable name passed Saving a Question Bank When working in the Question Editor the system does not save the changes to the class web site until you click Save Question Bank from the Actions menu After you install a question bank it is available for assignment creation If you are re saving an updated version of a qu
248. et the JPEG quality level an integer value from 0 to 100 The default is 95 Settings greater than 95 generally have negligible visible effect width n Specify the width of the canvas The default is 480 See Also Setting Plot Options page 235 rand m n rand m n k rand m n Returns a random real number between m and n inclusive For example to generate random numbers between 0 5 and 9 5 use the formula rand 0 5 9 5 rand m n k Returns a random real number between m and n expressed to k k gt 0 significant digits k is truncated to an integer For example to generate numbers between 2 73 and 7 91 to two significant figures use rand 2 73 7 91 2 Note In this definition the dummy variable k represents the number of significant figures not the step size as it indicates in de fining range and rint 10 18 Functions and Arguments 229 To generate random numbers that vary an order of magnitude and have the same number of decimal digits use the decimal function in conjunction with the rand function For example to generate a random number between 2 and 20 with one decimal place use decimal 1 rand 2 20 3 Note Numbers posing a possible ambiguity are returned using scientific notation See Also decimal n x sig n x int x page 223 Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k page 229 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n
249. eting a Course Module The Delete button removes the index file that stores the record of what is included in the course module without actually deleting the class elements Deleting the course module index file removes the record of the CM from the list of available CMs but does not actually remove its contents from the system To delete the course module index from the list of available course modules in your class 1 Select the CM you want to remove by selecting the check box adjacent to it You can select multiple CMs for this action 2 A warning message is displayed To remove this course module index from the list of installed course modules in this class click OK The CM is removed from the list of available CMs for this class To delete the contents of a course module you must delete individual components as described under Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module 5 8 Relative Web References in Course Modules When your questions are saved Maple T A does a global search and replace for the strings listed http server name Web yourclass Public_ Html http server name classes yourclass classes yourclass It replaces all of them with __BASE CLASS URI__ When the questions are uploaded the string is translated to http server name classes yourclass so that your image references are correct If you add more strings to the list they must be replaced with __BASE CLASS URI_ The strings listed are
250. ettes To display the palette right click Control click on Macintosh the Equation Editor region see Figure 10 1 To display the options available in each panel click the mouse over a template A list of options displays Continue to click the available palettes or scroll the mouse over the sub templates To insert a template click the mouse over a highlighted template The templates and character palettes are broadly organized by theme such as calculus templates or arrow symbols Spend a few minutes exploring the toolbar to familiarize yourself with the available templates and symbols Layout templates The left side of the toolbar consists of pop up palettes containing an assortment of layout templates Templates are highlighted as you move the mouse over them Layout Palette Expression templates The second section of the standard toolbar consists of pop up palettes containing expression templates 10 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions 191 ra rae By n B Aly i i i Vex Vx Vxx g d Expression Palette Relational palettes The third section of the standard toolbar consists of pop up palettes containing relational templates gt LL 22 Relational Palette Symbol palettes The fourth section of the standard toolbar consists of pop up palettes containing symbol templates 192 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions
251. eturn type This method receives a set of name value pairs which it can use for initialization These are passed from the grader param fields in the question see Step 3 8 A grade String correctAnswerText String studentResponseText method with a double return type value between 0 0 and 1 0 where 1 0 is full credit The method should compare the text of the student response with text representing the correct answer Note The student response text is delivered from the applet s getResponse method In many cases grading will be performed by judging whether the response is the same as the correct answer text However in some cases the correct answer text may only provide general guidelines for grading For example the correct answer might be up and to the left and the student response might be a point 76 145 that the student clicked on 9 A generateResponseMatchingAnswer String correctAnswerText method with String return type This method is called to get a sample correct answer to display as student feedback The method must use the answer text to generate a string which the applet will display as the correct answer when passed the string as a response parameter Note In many cases it will be enough to simply return the answer text in unmodified form However when the answer text only provides qualitative grading criteria up and to the left it is more difficult to generate a sample response In that case it may be a good strat
252. eturns the integer part of x 10 13 Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions Note Use the Question Editor on screen dialog boxes for setting the margin of error in numeric and numeric with unit questions For more information see Setting Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 85 For an introduction to the concept of margin of error see Controlling Answer Tolerance page 183 For basic information on the system plus or minus operator see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Ques tions page 184 Absolute Errors You can specify an absolute error using the operator x y represents x y Example 1 2 12 0 01 specifies a margin of error of 0 01 in the answer The answer matches any response between 2 11 and 2 13 inclusive For example the system grades 2 114 or 2 123456789 as well as 2 11 and 2 13 correct Example 2 2 13 0 250 specifies a margin of error of 0 25J The system grades correct any response between 1 85J and 2 35J The error must have the same dimension as the correct answer Example 3 cos pi 6 1000 specifies a margin of error of 1000 The system grades correct any response between cos pi 6 1000 and cos pi 6 1000 approximately between 999 1339746 and 1000 866025 216 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Percentage Errors You can also specify a percentage error using the operator x 1 y represents x x y Example 4 1 52
253. exFot lt sub gt Subscripts the enclosed text lt sup gt Text lt sup gt Superscripts the enclosed text lt font face gt Text lt font gt Sets text font lt font size gt Text lt font gt Sets text size lt font color gt Text lt font gt Sets text color Tutorial Maple Syntax Questions with Matrices A Simple Matrix Question This tutorial describes how to create a question that asks for the coefficient matrix of a linear system of equations Students will be able to use the Equation Editor to construct their response This question is created in the Question Editor as a Maple graded question To create the question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down list select Maple graded b Enter the description Coefficient Matrix c Click Add in the Algorithm area 3 In the Algorithm screen a Define a random variable Sans maple Matrix 1 2 3 7 1 2 b Click Refresh to preview the variable you defined See Figure 8 7 c Click Save 108 8 Authoring Methods for Questions ans maple Matrix 1 2 3 7 1 2 Variable Value Matrix 2 3 1 1 4 2 2 1 3 2 1 7 2 D 1 2 2 datatype ang anything storage rectangular order Fortran_order shape D Figure 8 7 Defining a Matrix 4 Click Next 5 On the Maple graded Que
254. example indexof 3 2 3 5 7 11 returns 1 java cn a b c d java cn a b c d Pass the arguments a b c d to a custom Java evaluation engine and return the result The first argument cn must be a string giving the fully qualified name of a Java class that implements the interface gateway question random AlgorithmicFunction This interface has a single public method public String eval String args The arguments a b c d are passed to eval in a string array For example java com mycompany QuoteFunction SUNW returns a real time quote for Sun Microsystems Inc stock assuming that the class QuoteFunction had been suitably programmed 226 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Isu n x lsu n x Returns the unit in the nth significant place of x This is called the least significant unit of x in the nth place For example Isu 3 3 14159 returns 0 01 the unit in the third significant place This operation is designed to be used when setting the tolerance for correct answers For example to accept an answer to within a tolerance of one unit in the third significant digit use Sans lt formula gt Stol lsu 3 Sans and set the answer field to ans tol maple text Pass text to the Maple kernel and return the value of the last line processed For example maple ithprime 12 returns 37 maple diff sin x x x returns cos x x sin x See
255. example if your Maple T A classname is calculus205 and your graphics folder is the chapter folder of your Maple T A class web site use the directive setImageBase classes calculus205 chapter1 Note The final slash is optional 3 To incorporate the image file into a question use the labelgraphic environment The begin labelgraphic command takes three arguments 1 The name of the image file ii The width of the image file in pixels iii The height of the image file in pixels To determine the width and height of the graphic use a third party graphics application for example Microsoft Paint e To label the graphic use the grlabel macro The grlabel macro takes three arguments 1 The text of the label ii The x coordinate of the label in pixels iii The y coordinate of the label in pixels The x and y coordinates are measured from the upper left corner of the graphic e More than one grlabel command can be used Note Without any grlabel commands the labelgraphic environment only incorporates the image file into a question To include a graphic it is recommended that you use the image macro For more information on the image macro see Including Graphic References in LaTeX Questions page 262 264 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Example begin question Numeric qutext A ball is thrown upward from the top of a 40 foot high tower at an initial velocity of 64 feet se
256. f a text string and can also be set to accept multiple correct answers so Einstein or einstein will be graded as correct as will Albert Einstein or aLbeRt emSTEIN Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity This question also awards partial credit if you answer Stephen Hawking This is the same question with the grader set to accept only an exact match of the answer text string however it too can be set to accept multiple correct answers so Einstein or Albert Einstein will be graded as correct but einstein or aLbeRt einSTEIN will be graded wrong Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity This type of question also allows you to give some partial credit for certain responses so if you enter einstein or albert einstein you will get credit for this question Tn the following question the student picks from a drop down menu of choices Partial credit can be set for some options full credit for others Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity Click for List z In this case you get full credit for Albert Einstein and credit for Stephen Hawking Figure 9 10 Demonstration of Various Free Response and Fill in the Blanks Questions Both List questions and Blanks questions can be set to require students to enter text textbox style presentation or to select from a list of entries menu style presentation Each style has its advantages e Use textbook s
257. f expression you want to accept field select Maple Syntax because students will be entering a matrix e From the Text Symbolic entry field select Symbolic entry only so that students can use the Equation Editor to create the matrix rather than having to enter the Matrix command See Figure 8 10 f Click Finish to save the question g Add the question to one or more question groups and then click Submit 112 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Enter the text of the question E Source A O LQ amp i s BR 8S A B z U ae x amp TT Qe Font gt Size X Give an invertible matrix Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer The last line must evaluate to an expression that will be stored as the variable ANSVVER The variable SANSI M Matrix 1 2 3 4 printf MathNL ExportPresentation M Enter Maple code to grade the student response The last line must evaluate to a Boolean value true or false or a floating point value between 0 and 1 The variz x LinearAlgebra Determinant RESPONSE Select the type of expression you want to accept Maple syntax e g difff2 fod x v Text Symbolic entry Symbolic entry only v Figure 8 10 Invertible Matrix Question For more information on Maple code refer to your Maple system documentation Tutorial Working with Multipart Questions This tutorial describes Editing General Informatio
258. f their responses on individual questions at each level of learning objective determines their progression through the assignment When students demonstrate the required level of mastery by answering the minimum number of questions correctly the system allows them to move ahead to the next learning objective s ma terial The Student must complete Question Group 1 before attempting Question Group 2 Delete complete Question Group 2 before attempting Question 3 Delete complete Question Group 1 M before attempting Question Group 1 v Add The student will go back to an earlier question after 1 wrong answer s to Question Group 1 mI Add Requirements Question Required Description oe Group 5 Domain Questions aie Group 10 Function Questions eer Determining Graphically if a Quadratic Function is Z Question 3 1 One to One Figure 3 12 Policies for Mastery Assignments 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor 37 If students demonstrate a lower level of mastery through repeated incorrect responses you can establish penalties so that the system moves the student backwards to the previous learning objective until minimal proficiency is again es tablished Requirements e Assignment results are recorded in the Gradebook for the class e Mastery assignments can be attempted multiple times for credit If you want to limit the number of attempts a student
259. fferent title 8 9 Question Banks 121 To replace the superseded question bank with your new version click OK Note Saving a modified Question Bank with the same name as an inherited Question Bank from a shared parent class severs the relationship with the parent class version of the question bank As a result you will not automatically receive any changes made to the parent class version of the Question Bank 5 The system reports Installation successfully completed Saving to a File versus Reinstalling a Question Bank Do not use Save Question Bank from the Actions menu to back up your question bank as you edit it It is recommended that you use Export Question Bank from the Actions menu to make backups and use Save Question Bank only after you are finished editing a question bank If you use Save Question Bank to make backups there are side effects The backup is used in assignments including tests The backup is saved as an extra file on the server Every time you use Save Question Bank the system creates an additional copy of the question bank file on the server with a unique version number In general files are small less than 100 KB but if you frequently make backups as is recommended there will be many unused versions on the server Because the system administrator cannot determine which versions have been accessed in student assignments it is difficult to delete unused files Creating and Opening Module
260. for example x 2 1 4 To add the variable definition to the algorithm text box click OK 5 You can use the Algorithm Designer to generate multiple variables Generating Condition based Variables is setto be if equals v otherwise it s setto var expr expr expr expr Create a Condition based Variable You can also set variable values based on conditions and relationships to other variables 8 5 The Question Editor 81 1 Enter the variable name in the first cell You do not need to use the or notation 2 Enter the expression defining the variable if the condition is satisfied 3 Enter the condition by a Entering two expressions b Selecting the relation 4 Enter the expression defining the variable if the condition is not satisfied Notes i Each expression you use must be a e Variable name for example x or monthly totals You do not need to use the or notation e Number for example 5 or 2 67 e Math expression or formula for example x 2 1 ii You must define variables referenced in the condition before defining the conditional variable 5 To add the variable definition to the algorithm text box click OK 6 You can use the Algorithm Designer to generate multiple variables Using Maple to Generate Random Number Variables and Generate a Plot is a variable defined by the following Maple command var Optional Import a Maple repository You c
261. for the response appears as shown in Figure 9 6 6 Let y X a Whatis the derivative of with respectto X This question accepts numbers or formulas Help Change Entry Style Preview l O Wnatic yax This question accepts numbers or formulas Help Change Entry Style Preview Figure 9 6 Input Field for a Multipart Formula Question See Also Formula page 137 MultiFormula page 145 Numeric Question Mode Numeric qu x y mode numeric The numeric question type accepts e Pure numbers without physical units in decimal form or scientific notation e Numbers with units 9 2 Math Question Types 147 Details You cannot use equations or algebraic formulas in the correct answer Equivalent numeric expressions and units are recognized The system recognizes default unit equivalents You can also create a question bank specific table of equivalent units Students are prompted to enter responses in scientific or numeric format with or without physical units You specify the inclusion of units in the correct answer using the answer units question field If you do not assign a value to the answer units statement the correct answer is dimensionless Using the optional showUnits field you control whether the system displays the question with the Units text field You can control the precision and tolerance or margin of error required in student responses The easiest way to set these modes is by
262. ges 93 Essay Questions in the Question Editor ccccceccc cece cece cece cece cece ee ce eee cena een eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeea sega nega 94 Free Response Fill in the Blank Questions in the Question Editor ceceeseeeeneeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeanes 95 Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor cccceccececeee cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeea esse nega 96 Matching Questions in the Question Editor cccceccceecceecceece cece cece cece eeaeeeee eeu eeeneeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeges 98 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor cccceccceecceeece cece eece cece eee eeeeeeeneeeneeeneeaes 98 Multipart Questions in the Question Editor ccccc cece cece eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeeaeeeeeeceeaeeeaeeeaneenaes 100 Multiple Choice Questions in the Question Editor 0 ccccceccceeeceeec cece eeae eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseaeegas 101 vi Contents Multiple Selection Questions in the Question Editor c cece cece cececeee cece cece eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeegas 101 Numeric Questions in the Question Editor ccccccccccc cece ec ence eens ee ee eee e eee ee ee ae ee eee eeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeneeneenes 102 Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions in the Question Editor ececeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeenaeeeees 103 Question Designer Questions in the Question Editor c cece ceccceeeceee ce eece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeaas 104 Tr
263. git and require that same number of significant digits select Accept k in the nth place enter the floating point value or corresponding al gorithmic variable of the tolerance in the k text field and then select the significant digit from the n drop down box Student responses that are correct up to the specified number of significant digits receive 50 credit For example if the correct answer is 2 4 k 2 and n 3 the correct responses are 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 41 and 2 42 For example if k 1 n 3 and the correct answer is 27 18 the responses 27 1 and 27 2 are correct Although 27 3 is within 0 1 of 27 18 rounded to 3 significant digits it is incorrect because it is not within 0 1 of 27 18 See Also Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 Answer Tolerance Example Script page 285 Controlling Answer Tolerance page 183 Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions page 215 Images and Reference Files in Questions You can use image files in GIF JPEG or PNG formats in questions To place an image in a question first upload the file to your class web site Then include a reference to the image in the question You can also link to a file that has been uploaded to your class website The following file formats are supported htm html gif jpg png pdf xls class jar js css shtml exe zip swf lib Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site 1 From the
264. gnment to Visible or reset the scheduled availability so that it appears again on the Class Homepage 3 1 The Assignment Editor 25 Editing Assignments To edit an existing assignment e Click the assignment you want to edit The Assignment Editor menu opens with the Choose Name tab active Operations within the Assignment Editor are identical whether you are creating a new assignment or editing properties of an existing assignment All tabs are accessible From within the Assignment Editor you can e Change the name of the assignment e Add or delete questions e Group organize or sequence question delivery e Attach or edit policies Finalizing Changes To finalize your changes 1 Select the Review amp Finish tab 2 Verify your edits 3 Click Finish You are returned to the Assignment Editor listing all the assignments for your class Tip From within the Assignment Editor you can move between tabs in any order The numbers on the tabs are merely a suggested sequence See Also Finishing and Saving an Assignment page 47 Editing Shared Assignments You cannot make changes to inherited assignments in the same way as you edit any assignment in your class You can control some assignment policies for inherited assignments however you cannot delete or modify them To modify an inherited assignment create a copy of the assignment When you copy a shared assignment your copy of the assignment automatically app
265. groups as needed e Within a grade report an assignment can only be in one group Thus any assignments that were already placed in a group will not appear in the Available Assignments list for other groups The weightings of the groups in a grade report not including any Bonus assignments should add to 100 You can change the order of the groups listed in a grade report To change the order select a new position number from the drop down menu of the assignment you want to reposition Once selected all affected assignments will adjust their position accordingly To publish a grade report so students can view the report select the Visible check box Click Save to save the grade report For a report group you can set the following settings Group Name the name of the group in the grade report Weight set a weighting for the group in the overall grade for the report Drop Lowest drop the lowest n grades in the group Weight Assignments weight the assignments in the group equally normalized or by using the total points for each assignment Non Attempts mark non attempts as 0 or ignore Use if an assignment is attempted multiple times specify whether to use the best most recent earliest or average grade Bonus mark a group as extra credit Ifa group is marked as Bonus its weight is not used to reach the cumulative weight of 100 for the grade report Viewing a Grade Report To view a grade repo
266. gt is a floating point number specifying the tolerance value in the lt n gt th digit This question grades correct 3 141 and 3 142 because they contain 4 significant digits and are within 0 001 of 3 14159 All other responses are graded incorrect qu 2 4 question Estimate pi to four significant digits to within a unit in the fourth significant digit 2 aggggaaga Notes 4 answer num 3 14159Q answer units showUnits false grading toler sigd digit 4 err 1 0 mode Numeric name Pi 1 in the 4th significant digit using four significant digits editing useHTML The behavior of this question is different from that of Example 2 3 which has only a margin of error but no required precision The margin of error is applied with respect to the value in the answer num field not the result of rounding the value in the answer num field to lt n gt significant digits For example 3 14159 rounded to 4 significant digits is 3 142 However 3 143 is graded incorrect because it is not within 0 001 of 3 14159 Example 2 5 To specify a percentage margin of error use grading toler_perc and perc lt percentage gt where lt percentage gt is the percentage margin of error This question grades correct any answer within 0 1 of 3 14159 agagaaaga vnn A question Estimate pi to within 1 answer num 3 14159Q answer units showUnits false grading toler_perc perc 0 1 mode Numeric
267. gure 8 4 Specify Answer Precision and Tolerance in a Numeric Question ccsseeeeeececeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeees 86 Figure 8 5 Uploading and Linking a Maple Repository ss ssuesrssuseesseseesersersrsserrrssereeseesresessererssesreseesee 91 Figure 8 6 Question Designer Question csr a e a E E E E Ea e a E a S aa 104 Figure 8 Detining a MAE aaa T aa eect Salt des A aae Tane Mansi de A EEEE Ena AEE DAAE ANE eects 108 Figure 8 8 Defining a Simple Matrix Question ss sssisssissrissrrssrrssrresrrssrrssrresressresstessttsrttsseeerersreeerteste 109 Figur 8 9 Using the Matrix Palette si de uaea ne e ae niea e a a Mages a e aea ania k 110 Figure 8 10 Invertible Matrix Question oe err o e EE E EEE EE E EE EEE EE E AEE 112 Figure 8 11 Search Results in the Question Repository ssuesrsseseesersresersersrsserrrsresresersreresserersserreseeee 114 Figure 9 1 Constants of Integration Question sssessssssseessressresstessttstttsrtettttsttstettttsretrtsereseresersreea 136 Figure9 2 Equation QUESTION ee ee a a e aa wad eaa eaa aae eaa tabs ea da a tear iaie oaae hace 137 Figure 9 3 Input Field for a Formula Question cccsececseeceneeeeeececeeeeeueeeeeeeceuseeeeececseeeeuaeeeeseeaaeeeeaes 137 Figure 9 4 Input Field for a Formula List Question ssssssisssissrrssrrertrssrrssrrssressressresrressresresrersseesreeste 139 Figure 9 5 Input Field for a Multi Formula Question ceccsseecesececeeec
268. gure 9 1 Constants of Integration Question The response 1 2 x 4 5 3 x 3 2 x 2 1 is also graded correct See Also Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Constants of Integration Questions in LaTeX page 269 9 2 Math Question Types 137 Equation Question Mode equation qu x y mode equation Use the equation question type for any question that requires an equation as an answer It is the only question type that requires the inclusion of an sign in the student response and in the answer You can use the full range of functions in the equation that is all trigonometric functions log In abs and sqrt In a test the input field for the response appears as shown in Figure 9 2 Question 1 1 point What is the equation of a line with slope 1 that passes through the origin This question accepts equations E g y 2 5pc4 1 Help Change Math Entry Mode Preview Figure 9 2 Equation Question See Also Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Equation Questions in LaTeX page 270 Numeric page 146 Formula Question Mode formula qu x y mode formula Use the formula type for any question where the student does not specify physical units in their response and where the response is not an equation You can use the full range of functions in the formula that is all trigonometric functions log In abs and sqrt To create a formula question wi
269. h the Presentation MathML of the answer However because there are many different ways of making Presentation MathML for the same or almost same marked up expression creating the expressions outside the Equation Editor may generate unpredictable results Grading of Palette Questions The default behavior for grading palette question student responses is to perform string matching on the palette created expression Example Toolbar Definition Provide a toolbar definition by including qu env palette toolbarname lt toolbar def gt Example Palette Definition Provide palette definition s by including qu env palette subsup lt btn gt FRAC lt btn gt lt btn gt SQRT lt btn gt lt btn gt SUB lt btn gt lt btn gt SUP lt btn gt qu env palette greek lt tb gt lt btn gt SYMBOLPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt lt btn gt alpha lt btn gt lt btn gt beta lt btn gt lt btn gt gamma lt btn gt lt sub gt lt tb gt 166 9 Question Types Example Question qu 1 1 mode palette qu 1 1 question lt the text of the question gt qu 1 1 answer lt the text of the answer this is in MathML and is intended to be editable gt qu 1 1 toolbar lt ref to external toolbar definition gt See Also Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions in the Question Editor page 103 Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax page 192 Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 9 16 Ques
270. hare your class content with others User Manager Register users into your class Remove users from your class Upload a class roster Export a class roster Additional Tools Change your password Proctor tools Upload and manage reference files used in questions and assignments Course modules See Also Security Issues to Consider page 69 The System Login All users log in to the system using a username and password o MapleT A Login User login Password Log in Forgot your Password See the list of supported browsers Login Screen 4 1 Getting Started For instructors the system administrator provides your username and password The administrator or instructor provides students with a username and password to log in Maple T A can be configured to allow self registration If this feature is enabled users will see a link on the login page allowing them to register themselves Ask Maple T A system administrator at your university about your config uration System Homepage Logging into the system brings you to the System Homepage If you have created any classes they are listed under the Classes I Am Instructing section see Figure 1 1 O eee MapleT A System Homepage aw Manlesoit System Homepage Welcome Jack Day My Profile Actions Help Logout Find classes open for registration v Classes Am Instructing Class Name Parent Class Calculus 101 Map
271. has a single formula answer is graded correctly if this type is used It is recommended that you 9 2 Math Question Types 133 use the Multi Formula type for questions that have a single correct answer but in general have multiple correct answers because the Formula type presentation indicates to students that there is only one solution For example the only root of x 2 2x 1 is x 1 with multiplicity two but in general a degree two polynomial has two roots e To create a question that accepts responses that include a matrix use the Maple Syntax question type If you prefer to present a rectangular array of entry boxes for responses use the blanks formula or Matrix type e For questions involving vectors and Cartesian coordinates use the Ntuple type For a complete list of question types nonmathematical and mathematical see Question Modes Question Types page 124 Math Question Types Comparison Table This is a list of supported math question types Table 9 1 Math Question Types Comparison Question Type Description Example Responses Formula Accepts numbers and formulas e sin x Restricted Formula Accepts numbers and formulas that do not include tri 1 sqrt 2 gonometric functions or logarithms Equation Grades equivalent equations as correct Other question y 2 4 x 1 n types do not allow the sign Note The expression given as the correct answer must consist of a single variable on the left
272. he Comment field of a question are not always present in the source question bank content You can add hints or comments by using the Question Editor and editing these fields for individual questions If you choose to display hints and comments and your source questions lack them the system ignores the display settings but otherwise provides a grading report to students In a grading report the system displays question feedback from the Comment field if it exists or if not shows the correct answer value as defined in the Answer field While every question will have something displayed as feedback in the grading report not every question may have the type of extensive feedback coaching or external review references that you might provide in the comment for a question 44 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Note To display hints during an assignment or custom feedback after grading your questions must contain content in hint fields or the comment field Selecting Feedback Options To display hints during an assignment select the Show hints check box To display a grade and or feedback for each question while the student is taking the assignment select the Allow students to check grades and feedback check box To display the final grade after the assignment is graded select the Show the final grade check box You can show feedback during the assignment or after it is graded for example displaying the correct answer or comment f
273. he Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d To proceed to the Add Numeric screen click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen a Enter the question statement b Inthe Number text field enter the numeric part of the correct answer in symbolic math syntax This is required c If the correct answer has physical units in the Units text field enter the units for the correct answer To use units in addition to the default system units you must add a custom table of units If you do not specify units by default the system does not display a Units text field in the question Note To display the Units text field in a question for which the correct answer has no units edit the question source to specify showUnits true To not display the Units text field in a question for which the correct answer has units edit the question source to specify showUnits false See Editing Question Source Files page 84 d Specify the precision or margin of error for the grading of a student response Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and sol
274. he Question Statement amp Weighting screen click Finish Setting Partial Credit and Question Weighting in a Multipart Question You can set the weighted scoring of individual question parts in a multipart question To set the weighting for each component part of a multipart question 1 In the Question Editor select the multipart question to edit Click Edit 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Weighting screen update the weighting The part weighting is relative The default setting is to equally weight each part That is if there are x parts in the question each part is weighted 1 x of the total value assigned to the question in an assignment To change the relative weighting of question parts use the plus and minus buttons in the Weighting column 4 Click Finish Example Assume you have a multipart question with 3 parts Initially each part is assigned a weight of 1 which indicates that 1 3 of the total value is assigned to each question You determine the total question value during assignment definition To update the weighting of the first part of the question to 5 times that of the other two parts set the weightings to Part 1 5 that is 5 7 of the total question value Part 2 1 that is 1 7 of the total question value Part 3 1 that is 1 7 of the total question value 114 8 Authoring Methods for Questions If you add the question to an assignment and
275. he arithmetic operators that is and are graded correct For example numStyle thousands dollars allows students to correctly enter responses using comma separators or leading dollar signs Negative Number Style Use the negStyle field to set the acceptable formatting for negative student responses Set negStyle to one of minus paren or both e minus Negative responses must be entered using a negative sign e paren Negative responses must be entered using parentheses both Negative responses can be entered using a negative sign or parentheses Note If you set numStyle to include arithmetic then you cannot allow parentheses to be used to indicate a negative response That is negStyle must be set to minus 10 4 Student Responses and Grading 183 See Also Numeric page 146 Setting Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 85 Controlling Answer Tolerance There is not general agreement on how to grade numeric answers with respect to the number of significant digits For example if the correct answer to 3 significant digits is 2 77 some instructors grade the response 2 77021 incorrect Other instructors grade 2 77021 correct because they think that the inclusion of extra digits does not make a response incorrect In Maple T A you control how numeric responses are graded For example you can e Accept only 2 77 and not 2 77021 For more information see Setting the
276. he high scoring group and the p Value for the low scoring group Fl F2 d nl n2 where nl number of assignments with scores gt median grade for the assignment n2 number of assignments with scores lt median grade for the assignment F1 number of fully correct responses on this item from the top scoring set F2 number of fully correct responses on this item from the bottom scoring set p Biserial The p Biserial is a correlation coefficient relating performance on an item and performance on the total assignment The p Biserial correlation coefficient is an index of discrimination that measures the extent to which students who score high on the assignment tend to get the item correct and those who score low tend to get the item incorrect 56 4 Working with the Gradebook where Y mean grade of assignments on which this item was answered incorrectly Y mean grade of assignments on which this item was answered fully correctly p p Value q l p oy standard deviation for assignment grades r Biserial The r Biserial is a correlation coefficient relating performance on an item and performance on the total assignment The r Biserial correlation coefficient is an index of discrimination that measures the extent to which students who score high on the assignment tend to get the item correct and those who score low tend to get the item incorrect A Gerla b Oy where Y mean gr
277. he parent asset and you will not receive any future updates from the parent class automatically Therefore you must stay in communication with the instructor in your shared parent class if you want to be notified of changes to parent class questions and assignments See Also Shared Class Content Updates page 13 66 5 Course Modules 5 5 Viewing Details of a Course Module View Details allows you to inspect the individual elements contained within a selected CM You also use View Details as the first step to deleting parts from within a CM 1 Select the check box adjacent to the CM you want to work with 2 Click the View Details button on the Course Modules screen e A page is displayed that shows the questions assignments and web resource folders that are contained in the CM e A description of each component may also be included depending on whether the creator of the CM in cluded this information e Ifyou have selected multiple CMs for viewing each is displayed in sequence with the above information posted 5 6 Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module Adding Course Module Contents The current release of the system does not allow you to add CM contents to an existing course module Instead you should create a new course module that contains all the elements you want Deleting Course Module Contents You may want to remove specific questions assignments or web folders from within a CM 1 Fro
278. he student answer must meet The begin sketch macro takes one option and four required argu ments in the following order Table 11 5 Arguments and Option for a Sketch gridlines option number of horizontal and vertical gridlines in addition to the axes default is 10 xMin minimum x value on the x axis xMax maximum x value on the x axis yMin minimum y value on the y axis yMax maximum y value on the y axis The following commands must appear in the sketch environment e example lt point list gt describes a sample correct answer that is displayed if the student gives an incorrect response The sketch is given as lt point list gt a space delimited set of coordinates of the form x y The resulting sketch is a single curve interpolated from these points e check criterion sets a criterion that the student s sketch must satisfy Available criteria are y Table 11 6 Basic Sketch Criteria goes_through xcoord ycoord sketched function must pass through the point xcoord ycoord increasing sketched function must be increasing decreasing sketched function must be decreasing concave_up sketched function must be concave up concave_down sketched function must be concave down linear sketched function must be linear To restrict a criterion to an interval a b use check a b criterion This option is ignored for goes_through The criterion can also be a boolean expression usef
279. he student response which can have an additive constant with the integral of x43 that is evalb RESPONSE int x 3 x If the student enters an incorrect response the system display the value in the comment field In Maple graded questions if there is no comment field the system returns the message Comment No feedback provided with this question To change this question to an algorithmic question use the following plain text script question definition qu 1 2 question Enter an anti derivative of x exponent coeff x qu 1 2 maple evalb diff SRESPONSE x x S exponent S coeff x qu 1 2 type formula qu 1 2 mode Maple qu 1 1 allow2d 1 qu 1 2 name Maple AntiDerivative qu 1 2 comment Any function of the form Sanswer C where C is a constant is an anti derivative of x exponent coeff x qu 1 2 editing useHTML qu 1 2 algorithm S exponent maple randomize rand 2 5 coeff maple randomize rand 2 9 Sanswer maple int x Sexponent coeff x x Notes You must follow the variable naming conventions For a list of the guidelines for Maple commands in Maple based variables see The Algorithm Designer page 80 The variable exponent is assigned a value calculated by Maple using the rand function rand returns a random 12 digit positive integer rand a returns a random integer in the range 0 a 1 inclusive rand a b returns a random integer in the range a b
280. herit from a shared parent class there is no risk that the parent class version will overwrite your modified version unless you specifically delete the modified question or assignment from your child class This means that if you make changes to the inherited questions or assignments and save them to the 14 2 Creating and Managing Classes original name your changed versions sever the relationship with the parent asset and you will not receive any future updates from the parent class automatically Therefore you must stay in communication with the instructor in your shared parent class if you want to be notified of changes to parent class questions and assignments See Also Course Modules page 61 Importing and Installing a Course Module page 64 Creating a Shared Class To share the contents of your class with other instructors 1 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select Class Info 2 Click the Edit button 3 Select the Featured Class check box 4 Click Submit to save your changes Other instructors can create a copy of your class including your questions and assignments by creating a new class and choosing your class from the Inherit content from list To remove class sharing 1 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select Class Info 2 Click the Edit button 3 Clear the Featured Class check box 4 Click Submit to save your changes See Also Creating a New Clas
281. hich would incorrectly update the other variable values in the algorithm field 10 21 Setting Plot Options 235 Example mode Blanks id fo002 editing useHTML question Pick a number between 1 and 7 lt 1 gt blank 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 grader 1 formula extra mode Numeric editing useHTML question What is the sum of response foo2 and 17 algorithm as PRPRPRPPPPHPP PH PP PP WWW WW WwW Ww answer num response foo2 17 answer units showUnits false grading exact_value name Exact answer Precision with system units editing useHTML aggagarageagadas PRPPRPRPPR iN er a Sa Question How do I use the grade variable to return a statement that tells the student on the following question Your response was correct incorrect depending on the grade in the first question Answer Try if eq grade foo2 1 correct incorrect 10 21 Setting Plot Options 2 D Plot Statement Options The options to the Maple plot command are given after the function s horizontal range and vertical range as equations of the form option value For example plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi filled true title My Plot The options described below are supported Table 10 14 Options for 2 D Plots Option Description adaptive When plotting a function over an interval the interval is sampled at a number of points controlled by sample and numpoints Ada
282. horing page 244 10 5 Using Formula Syntax In the Maple T A system you can create questions that use mathematical formulas or expressions In the Question Editor you can enter formulas using standard mathematical notation In general the system accepts the same formulas as a graphing calculator Thus the system accepts x 2 2x 1 2sin x x 2 1 e x 2 Note The most common mistake is to forget parentheses For example 1 x 1 is different from 1 x 1 which the system interprets as 1 x 1 See Also Basic Math Syntax in the System page 180 Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 204 10 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions The equation editor shown in Figure 10 1 provides an easy way to create formatted math expressions Editing with the Equation Editor Using the Equation Editor you can add symbolic math expressions and symbols to the question text and answer regions in all question types available through the Question Editor 10 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions 189 MathML Editor MathML Editor 2D Editor MathML x 2242 b Cancel n A F a i i i Vex Vx Vxx d Figure 10 1 Equation Editor Adding Editing an Expression Using the Equation Editor 1 Click the question text region or the answer text region and select the Sigma icon gt in the
283. iable answer y x 3 3 Note The response y 1 x 6 3 is also graded correct end question Example 2 begin question Equation This question uses randomized variables qutext Find the equation of the line that is parallel to the line y var m x var b and that passes through the point var c var d answer y var m x var sgn var e code ml int rint 19 2 t rint 2 m int switch t m1 m1 b int rint 20 1 c int rint 21 10 d int rint 21 10 Sel int d Sm Sc sgn switch 1t e1 0 Se int abs e1 The above code chooses random integer coefficients m and b anda random point c d The y intercept e is calculated Care is taken to display the answer correctly because e may be positive or negative end question 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 271 Formula List Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Formula List The Formula List question type accepts an ordered list of numbers or formulas separated by commas Notes e This is an ordered list The entries in the student response numbers or formulas must appear in the same order as in the correct answer e This type is graded in the same manner as the Ntuple type Example 1 begin question Formula List qutext Compute the exact values of sin pi 3 cos pi 3 and tan pi 3 Separate the entries of the answer with com
284. ically generated math fomulas Algorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Example Script page 284 Algorithmically generated multiple selection questions A gorithmic Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 284 Questions with embedded applets Applet Questions page 288 Questions with plots Authoring Questions with Embedded Plots Example Script page 297 Questions with tolerance in answers Answer Tolerance Example Script page 285 Clickable Image questions Clickable Image Question Example Script page 288 Essay questions Essay Question Example Script page 289 Fill in the blank questions Fill in the Blank Question Example Script page 289 Key word or phrase questions Key Word or Phrase Question Example Script page 291 List questions List Question Example Script page 292 Maple Formula questions Maple graded Formula Question Example Script page 293 283 284 12 Plain Text Script Authoring Maple Syntax questions Maple Syntax Question Example Script page 294 Multipart questions Multipart Question Example Script page 295 Multiple choice questions Multiple Choice Question Example Script page 296 Multiple selection questions Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 296 Numeric questions Numeric Mathematical Questions Example Script page 286 Question Designer questions Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions page 298 Short phrase question
285. identify the correct image element by clicking hot spots Using the Question Editor in the system you can create these interactive questions by working with an image and identifying hot spot response regions by painting regions with the mouse A sample clickable image question is shown in Figure 9 9 Question Name Sec 1 Qu 4 Clickable Image Click a region of the graph that is positive 1 Figure 9 9 Clickable Image Question See Also Clickable Image Question Example Script page 288 Images and Reference Files in Questions page 87 Clickable Image Questions in the Question Editor page 93 9 6 Ungraded Essay Questions 155 9 6 Ungraded Essay Questions Question Mode essay qu x y mode essay An essay question is not automatically graded by the system Student responses are sent to you the instructor who scores them traditionally and assigns a grade in the system Gradebook No answer or feedback is available to the student See Also Essay Question Example Script page 289 Essay Questions in the Question Editor page 94 Essay Question Example Script page 289 9 7 Flash Questions Question Mode Flash qu x y mode Flash The Flash question presents a Flash movie of the question Students are required to interact with the movie using the mouse and or keyboard to alter the movie or identify hot spots in the movie to produce the correct answer 1 mode Flash 1 movie lt path to your swf file gt
286. ignments Annotations can be used to provide e Additional instructions Explanations before grading e Links to outside materials or reference objects e Informational text between questions Creating an Assignment Annotation 1 In the right frame of the Select Questions tab select a question and click its associated link to launch the preview window 2 Scroll down in the question preview window to find the Annotation Editor shown below 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor 41 Annotations Annotations can be indyted to add instructions or links to resources referred to in this question A k Display this text immediately above the question x 0 Insert a Hyperlink or Image URL Browse Link Text Insert Link Insert Image Figure 3 13 Assignment Annotations 3 Enter annotation text including HTML formatting in the large text entry field 4 Set options for displaying your annotation From the Display this text drop down list select from e immediately above the question e immediately below the question e in the header of the page e in the footer of the page Use the link editor at the bottom of the window to identify reference file sources either image files or web references from your Class Web Site or outside web addresses URLs must be of the form http www website com referencefile ext Enter any Link Text you want displayed identifying the reference object or web add
287. ii EEE EEEE EER svceueling co gant veceueds Covelh s A deeqentbewes 151 Question Mode Appletss mirn secbewt secualove cael ead a a saehowd deeb bbe EE EE N A NTA E aS 151 Applet Question Authoring ossesecc eiie ereis ni e E E EEEE EEE E E A E E E S 152 9 4 Blanks Questions srren aaa aaas a 68 OAM a a a a e a aa T a S iiA 153 9 5 Clickable Image Questions wnio srir s EEEn ov EEE E EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE oes 154 Question Mode clickable image cccecceecc ence ence eeeeeeeeeeeeeeea cece seca cess eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeseaeegas 154 9 6 Ungraded Essay Questions crore rioei i ce as eee EEEE E E ce uen uence debs cadences vesecedaaseeuee vse a ss 155 Question Mode essay 2 2 oo se6shen i e T bers B a8 ak oe es ohne Cah ante ae Sede banat eel weedy N AR Sa 155 9 7 Flash Questions mini meierei iioi E ee E EE EEE degen vv vu aueied a Fossda eva Canis bins EEE Seeder EE 155 Question Mode Flashes i codes vealed eenuet Levehceetsvebiond aa uvhacek a a e a i aaa aa eip tants 155 Flash Qu stion Authoring cscs ionin ii cad ectecees ci dees s dawenced cawedca ds E ude ccuebieveeeds Upecoustte 155 9 8 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions cccccccececeeece cece ee ee eeee eeu eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeegas 156 List Questions and Blanks Questions ccccccecc eee ee eee e eee eee e nee e cede Ea ee EEG EEA EEG EE HE EG EEG EEG EEG EG EEG EG EEE EES 156 Rules for Grading Free Response Questions cccceecceeceee
288. in a question In addition you can create questions where students are graded directly on their interaction with the Flash move or the applet For more information on this more advanced functionality see Flash Questions page 155 To include a Flash movie in a question you must first upload the Flash movie to a subfolder on the Class web site Next you can include a reference to the Flash movie in your question To do this in the Question Editor follow these steps 1 Create or edit a question in the Question Editor 2 In the field where you want to include the movie question text feedback hints or solution click the Insert Edit Flash icon 3 Under the Flash Info tab click Browse Server and select the movie you have uploaded to the Class web site You will be shown a preview of the movie 4 Click OK to add the movie 90 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Graph Plotting Applet in Questions The graph plotting applet is an interactive plot that is added to a question for dynamic plotting The applet displays axes for the graph even when the axes lie outside of the viewable area You can interact with the graph by shifting the viewable area or rescaling the image To add a graphing applet to your question 1 Create or edit a question in the Question Editor 2 In the field where you want to include the graph question text feedback hints or solution click the Source button E Source to edit the HTML source cod
289. ing and Performance Feedback cccceccceeceeeceeeceeece seca eeee cess eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeges 128 Comments and Performance Feedback ccecceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeece seca cece cece eeaeeeueeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeges 129 Using Complete Solutions Study Session Assignments ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeees 129 Special Characters in Questions scosso orii ese ce dese eves cdseesccusetes codes tye cee chbeccegesteccsuchscecedenevadecdseereeccues 130 9 Q eston TYPES sree tee iaved a aa a Boils meas ee E aa eee wade E ves owen gat woes OR lab dvadon ein RAS 131 9 1 Question Types Available in the System 2 0 2 0 cece cece cece ence eeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeea cece esse ees eeaeeeeeeneeneegees 131 9 2 Math Question Py pes tecse etias ed crecceeas ivelued lace ghdedsusvege sane bhgds dasheud seceeaged tuted cewsdiahe AR E TES e 132 Math Question Types Overview ccccccceeeceee cece cece ee ee ence eeeeeeeeeeeeee nese eeseeeae eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeneneeeges 132 Math Question Types Comparison Table ccceccceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeseeseeeaeeeaeeeaaes 133 Blanks formula cocci ficeaies vr ocsca ts eed ead in eE REEE AAE EET euiehan EA EE Uke 134 Chemistry sesterc cee hchetdvsemendivituests e a a a a E deh owe e A de levbwesstedetent ech es 135 Constants of Integration Questions ccceceeece ence ence ence eeeeeeeeeea cece eeseeeae eeu eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeese
290. ing up multiple archives inside the same directory ensure that there are no name conflicts If you want to share your question bank with another class you must share the Maple files and the test bank files 8 5 The Question Editor 91 Uploading a Maple Repository A Maple repository consists of two files with file extensions lib and ind To use a repository you must upload the lib and ind files 1 In the Question Repository select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen in the Question Type drop down list select Maple graded Click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen click the Maple Repository button beneath the Optional Import a Maple repository text The Linking and Uploading a Repository screen is displayed see Figure 8 5 Cancel Linking a Repositiory To link a repository click the lib file The filename and path are displayed in the LIB File Location field of the Add Maple graded screen Uploading a Repository A Maple repository consists of two files with extensions lib and ind To use a repositiory you must upload the lib and ind files The following are uploaded files To expand a folder click the arrow icon new subfolder upload file s to this point Figure 8 5 Uploading and Linking a Maple Repository 4 Select a folder location to which to import the Maple repository
291. insert and customize the sample HTML code from the example below in your question Example To create a pop up HTML reference file in a question 1 Create an HTML file containing instructions or reference information For example instructions html 2 Upload this file to the class web site using the Web Site Tools from the System Tools Menu 3 Add the following sample HTML code to your question lt a href javascript window open classes yourclassURL instructions html instructions width 450 height 650 scrollbars focus gt Click here for instructions lt a gt where http www yourschool com classes yourclassURL is your class web site URL To add HTML code through the Question Editor click the Source button Source in the menu bar You can also add a pop up reference to a question using plain text script authoring by adding this code to the question field or any HTML field in the question definition in the qu script file 106 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Behavior The question contains a link Click here for instructions When you click the link a new window of size 450x650 pixels opens containing the instructions html file contents To change the description of the content in the HTML file the filename or the window size edit the sample code in the example above Questions with Labeled Images You can include a GIF or JPG image with labels in a question The labels can be static or u
292. int 12 1 Sc int rint 25 12 num int c b ansint int num a Sans if int eq num a ansint ansint Snum S a end question By using the intermediate variable ansint and the string ansint in the last statement instead of directly using the string int num a which produces answers of the form int 6 3 integers display properly This final version allows some non reduced fractions for example 2 4 to appear as answers but in general both the problem and the answer appear in a simple standard form Example 7 Question with a Plot begin question Formula qutext Enter the question of the following plot lt br gt 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 267 var plot answer x 2 var a x var b code Sa rint 2 9 Sb rint 0 9 Splot plotmaple plot x 2 Sa x b x 10 10 end question To add a plot to a question in the question text feedback or hints add an algorithmic variable using the plotmaple command For more information see plotmaple text page 227 Use the following guidelines for algorithms e Ensure that all possible values of randomized variables are valid in the question text and the answer and that the response will grade correctly e Ifyou are using integers in the question text or answer ensure that they are formatted properly Define randomized variables so that you avoid expressions like 1x 0x x 3 o
293. ion numeric An algorithmic version of the previous question The height is a multiple of 50 in 400 900 code height int range 400 900 50 Sanswer sqrt 3960 Sheight 5280 2 3960 2 qutext A woman is on the top of a tower that is var height feet above ground How far in miles can she see newline newline Use 3960 miles for the radius of the earth newline Express your answer to an accuracy of at least 6 significant digits answer mi var answer err 2 Accept any response within 2 units digits 6 in the sixth significant digit end question 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 279 Restricted Formula Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Restricted Formula The Restricted Formula question type is similar to the Formula type but answers can use only the standard arithmetic operations and and the sqrt function The correct answer and student responses cannot contain logarithmic and trigonometric functions such as log Q and sin Answers can include variables Notes The answer field must be in calculator syntax not in TeX Enter the answer as you expect the student to enter it although equivalent answers are graded correct e Ifthe answer is a number that is does not have any variables it is recommended that you specify in the question text whether an exact response or an approximation is required In the case of an approximation the margin of error must b
294. ion Types Available in the System There are many different question types available in the system The following list describes some of the most used question types Blanks A blanks question is a type of fill in the blanks question It presents the student with a question with one or more blanks The response areas can be either free response fields or selection from a drop down boxes of possible answers Clickable imagemap A clickable image question presents an image with a number of hot spots Students are required to identify the correct image element by clicking the appropriate hot spot Formula A formula question allows instructors to compare a student response generally a mathematical expression to a specified answer It has several variants e Formula mod C accepts answer within an additive constant e Formula with physical units requires units as well as a numeric value e Multi Formula or Formula List accepts answers as a list of values unordered or ordered e Restricted Formula the correct answer only uses basic operations no logs or trig e Equation answer is an equation e Chemistry accepts chemical equations Key word A key word or phrase question searches the student s response for specified key words or phrases ig noring other text List A list question is another type of fill in the blanks question It offers a few more advanced features than blanks questions including the abil
295. ion as an ordered list though the type is Unordered and requires that the student give their response in the order in which you entered the correct answer In a test the input field for the response appears as shown in Figure 9 5 This question accepts lists of numbers or formulas separated by semicolons E g 2 4 6 or x 1 x 1 The order ofthe list doesnt matter but be sure to separate the terms with semicolons Help Change Entry Style Preview Figure 9 5 Input Field for a Multi Formula Question See Also Formula page 137 Formula List page 139 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Multi Formula Questions in LaTeX page 274 146 9 Question Types Multipart Formula Question Mode multipart formula qu x y mode multipart formula The multipart formula question type behaves as a multipart question in which each part is a formula question It displays multiple text fields for multiple student responses Note A multipart formula question displays multiple individual text fields while a multi formula question requires a student to enter multiple formulas in one text field as its correct answer Multipart formula questions must be authored in LaTeX or script files To identify multiple correct answers separate each with a semicolon in your answer field definition statement Include a trailing semicolon for the last answer in the list In a test the input field
296. ion defined by statement x which is typically constructed using one or more other functions For example 10 18 Functions and Arguments 223 a range 10 10 condition ne a 0 This generates a random non zero integer between 10 and 10 inclusive decimal n x sig n x int x decimal n x Returns x expressed as a floating point number rounded to n decimal places When decimal 0 expression is used with an expression the system automatically inserts commas to separate thousands Trailing zeros are truncated and not displayed For another option see numfmt fmt x page 227 sig n x Returns x expressed as a floating point number rounded to n significant digits In cases of possible ambiguity scientific notation is used to display the value int x Returns the integer part of x For example decimal 3 20 8571 returns 20 857 sig 3 20 8571 returns 20 9 int 20 8571 returns 20 eq a b ge a b le a b ne a b eq a b Returns 1 0 if a and b are equal Otherwise it returns 0 0 ge a b Returns 1 0 if a is greater than or equal to b Otherwise it returns 0 le a b Returns 1 0 if a is less than or equal to b Otherwise it returns 0 0 ne a b Returns 1 0 if a and b are not equal Otherwise it returns 0 0 For example if eq a b Red Green returns Red if a b and Green otherwise if ge a b Red Green returns Red if a gt b and Green otherwise
297. ions there is a tolerance of 1 0E 9 which represents the floating point limit in the system Example 1 2 You can specify a percentage margin of error using the form x 1 y where 100y is the percentage tolerance which accepts x x y This question grades correct any response within 5 of the correct answer qu 1 2 question What is the length of the shadow cast by a 10 foot wall when the sun is 30 degrees above the horizon qu 1 2 answer 10 tan pi 6 foot 1 0 05 tolerance 1 0E 9 mode Dimensioned Formula name Percentage tolerance with units eae 286 12 Plain Text Script Authoring comment Using the formula 10 tan pi 6 foot the correct answer is 17 3 feet editing useHTML 2 2 e By using the comment field you return custom feedback to a student if the response is incorrect Example 1 3 You can use a margin of error in questions that use algorithmic variables mode Formula name Algorithmic Variables editing useHTML qu 1 3 algorithm InitialSize int rint 2 10 1000 DoublingTime rint 5 10 NumDays rint 2 4 DeltaTime int NumDays 24 Exponent l1n 2 SDoublingTime Size int InitialSize e SExponent DeltaTime qu 1 3 question A bacterial culture is initially of size InitialSize If the doubling time is DoublingTime hours what is the size of the culture after NumDays days qu 1 3 answer Size 1 qu 1 3 tolerance 1 0E 9 22a For g
298. iple indexes to your data Consider the above case with only four elements moleculel to molecule4 where for each element there are four individualized sets of properties Assume that you have four images of molecules To avoid redundancy because moleculel has only four values but there are sixteen scenarios use two indices The first index i determines the element and image The second index k determines the scenario Depending on the value of i the value of k is in one of the four ranges 0 3 4 7 8 11 or 12 15 By using k property1 and other properties and ans match with the appropriate molecule1 To implement this use the following statements i rint 4 j rint 4 k 4 i j Smolecule1x0 Smoleculelx1 Smolecule1x2 Smolecule1x3 Smoleculel switch i molecule1x0 moleculel1x1 Sproperty1x00 Sproperty1x01 Sproperty1x15 Spropertyl switch k property1x00 property1x15 Sans00 50 Sans01 16 ans15 3 6 Sans switch k ans2x00 ans2x15 See Also switch n a b c page 232 244 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions 10 25 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring Algorithmically generated variables are used to generate random numbers in questions and create multiple permutations of questions from a single template You can use either Maple T A or Maple to generate algorithmic variables You can use eith
299. ira enian EE EE EE A EERE EE E E ARER 250 Clickable Image Questions in LaTeX cccccecc cece cece eece eee ence eeeeeeeeeeeeeea esse eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeges 252 Free Response Text based Questions in LaTeX ccccceecceeceeecceeceeece seca eece seca esse esse eeeeeeneeeeeeeneeaes 253 x Contents Matching Questions in LaTeX seans ner a a ccadabenccaveoudecses beds tackune Halebeduivelendssaetieds tes 254 Multipart Questions in LaTeX ii ccscacecccses eee es igs E cc couch EEE ca eedde sda ce cded SEEE E E g A 255 Multiple Choice Questions in LaTeX 0 cecceecc cece eece ence e E cena cece E A e a a TRA 256 Multiple Selection Questions in LaTeX 2 02 0 cc cece eeccc ee cc ence ee ceeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeae eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeegas 257 True or False Questions in LaTeX an hrean cece ee ee eee nee E eA EE GLEE EEG EEE SEG EE EEG EA EE EEA 258 11 6 Advanced Question Types in LaTeX 2 00 0 cccecceecc cece ence ee cee eceeeeeeeee seen cece eece seas esau ees eeaeeeneseneeenegegs 259 Graph Plotting in LaTeX Questions cecceecceece o eeceeeceeeee cece cece eeae a a E TE Ee ARE 259 Graph Sketching Questions in LaTeX ccce ieie oieri EEE eE EESE ESEE EEEE EE e Eia 260 Including Graphic References in LaTeX Questions ccccececeecceeece eee eeee eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeaeegas 262 Labeling Graphics in LaTeX Questions ccccecceeecceeceeeceeeceeece cece eeceeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeee
300. irectives in variable definitions and statements and for use by students when expressing their responses to math questions Each command performs the expected mathematical function in a formula or algorithm Table 10 12 Mathematical Functions that Students Can Use sin cos tan arcsin arccos arctan csc sec cot hypsin hypcos hyptan abs sqrt archypsin archypcos archyptan log In exp Reserved Operations The following functions are only available as internal system directives in variable definitions and statements These functions are not available to students Table 10 13 Mathematical Functions Reserved for Instructor Use binomial erf inverf indexof plotmaple invstudentst studentst decimal sig int java rand eq ge le ne lsu range fact maple rank frac mathml rint gcd max min strcat gt 1t not sum if numfmt switch See Also Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 204 10 20 Question Chaining Variables Question chaining is an authoring technique in which you create reference objects in one question that are called into display in the next question By using question chaining you can capture a student s response to the first question in an assignment and then include that response as part of other questions in the same assignment 234 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions To use question chaining you must 1 Author questio
301. is question is determining the appropriate matrix dimensions With the more limited Matrix question type the size of matrix is already fixed and the student simply enters the matrix entries See Also Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Editing with the Equation Editor page 188 Matrix Question with Infinitely Many Correct Answers This tutorial describes how to create a question that asks for an invertible matrix The grading of the student response checks whether the determinant of the student s matrix is non zero This question is created in the Question Editor as a Maple graded question 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 111 To create the question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down list select Maple graded b Enter the description Invertible Matrix c Click Next 3 On the Maple graded Question and Answer screen a Enter the text of the question Give an invertible matrix b In the Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer region enter M Matrix 1 2 3 4 printf MathML ExportPresentation M c In the Enter Maple code to grade the student response region enter x LinearAlgebra Determinant S RESPONSE evalb type x numeric and x lt gt 0 d From the Select the type o
302. ithm syntax contained For authoring all question types e For full support of HTML including image references tables and JavaScript To write script files use a text or HTML editor See Also Using Script Files to Author Questions page 283 Planning Your Question Bank Project To start a new project Create a question bank Because of the range of question types supported by Maple T A you can include a much wider range of classroom tested assignment materials including sophisticated free response questions for Mathematics and Science Once you have selected the source for your questions adapt the source question material into Maple T A questions Decide what type of Maple T A question mode works best for your source material e Decide what feedback comments hints solutions and related links are appropriate e You may also consider the range of tolerance margin of error and required format for correct answers 76 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Use information fields to tag your questions with information indicating authorship level of difficulty key topic related topics page reference or other outside link information Because the information fields are entirely user specified consider how you might want to use your questions interrelate them in assignments and what performance reporting dimensions might be useful If your question takes advantage of the system s powerful algorithmic variable generati
303. ity to give partial credit to certain answers Maple graded A Maple graded question uses the Maple mathematical software to generate algorithmic variables in questions generate plots and evaluate student responses The Maple graded question type gives you access to the computational power of Maple You have access to many different kinds of mathematical objects This question type allows for questions with complicated answers questions with different possible answers and questions requiring a powerful answer equivalence checker You can even find common errors and assign partial credit Matching A matching question displays two lists The student must match each element of the first list with an element of the second list Multipart A multipart question can contain a variety of related question materials data and even case scenarios for different types of assessment and learning A multipart question is built out of a number of individual questions which can be of any question type Multiple choice A multiple choice question can have any number of choices and has exactly one correct answer You can add additional incorrect choices after the question is initially created The choices can be presented in static or permuting order Multiple selection A multiple selection question is similar to multiple choice questions but the question can have more than one correct answer The choices can be presented in static or permuting
304. k and quizzes The system can report on individual student performance performance across a class section or across multiple sections of a class and statistical item analysis of questions The system can be configured to enable easy sharing of class content and assignments across sections of large classes For more information see Creating and Managing Assignments page 21 Assignments and Results When you create an assignment you specify the rules and policies for assignment access and due dates grading para meters feedback to students and whether student results are recorded in the Maple T A Gradebook After students complete an assignment you can view results in a Gradebook or create downloadable performance reports that can be viewed in third party gradebook programs or Microsoft Excel Students can always review the results of any pre viously completed assignments For more information see Working with the Gradebook page 49 1 4 System Overview 3 1 4 System Overview Table 1 1 System Modules Overview Assignment Editor Create and publish assignments Set rules and policies Question Repository Create questions to use in your tests quizzes and assign ments Store and manage questions Gradebook View individual and class results Export to an external Gradebook Force grade incomplete assignments Class Manager Edit your class information Lock registration for your class S
305. k Options page 43 Assignment Visibility Clearing the Visible check box excludes the assignment from the list of assignments displayed to students on your class homepage Alternatively In the Assignment Editor you can access this option by clicking the hide option available when you hover your mouse over the assignment name e You can set the schedule for the assignment to exclude a particular period of time which also restricts the as signment s availability to students e You can delete an assignment but only if you are prepared to lose all of the results for the assignment from the Gradebook Setting Assignment Requirements Limiting Student Access to Assignments You can restrict access to an assignment so that only students meeting certain criteria can take the assignment You can also create assignment requirements that refer to the current assignment even if you are working with a new as signment that has not yet been saved The assignment on which you are working is now listed along with all other available assignments in the Criterion specification box This is useful when you want to ensure minimum competencies in prerequisite topics For example you can limit access to students who have already passed an earlier assignment To restrict assignment access 1 From the Assignment Editor screen in the Set Policies tab click Advanced The Set Policies Advanced screen is displayed 2 To set criteria click Design A
306. ks There are three methods for authoring question banks in the system e Question Editor The Question Editor also called QE is the primary question authoring and editing method for small to medium projects involving a limited number of questions See Authoring When to Use the Question Editor page 75 Maple T A qu plain text script files These are plain text script files containing questions formatted according to the Maple T A syntax These can contain HTML MathML and other standard web content See Authoring When to Use Maple T A Plain Text Script Files page 75 LaTeX files that can produce math intensive questions formatted to Maple T A specifications Requires you to have a text editor and LaTeX Registered users can download macros See Authoring When to Use LaTeX page 75 For project planning information see Planning Your Question Bank Project page 75 73 74 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Question Banks Independent of the authoring method you use a Maple T A question bank file is produced Question bank files are plain text files with a qu extension structured according to the Maple T A question bank syntax Uploading files If you use the Question Editor the files are automatically saved with a qu file extension However you can upload a plain text file with any file extension for example htm to the Maple T A system File Formats Browsers and Platforms With Maple T A
307. l your resources in that subfolder e Ifyou have access to the source class for the CM you can return to the CM s source class and move the resources in the base folder of that class web site to a subfolder and then recreate the CM so that it will not overlap with your destination class folders upon upload Course Module Installation and Shared Class Inheritance of Questions and Assignments If you overwrite or edit or install a CM that has a new version of a question with the same name as the old you per manently break the link to the parent class version of the question If in the future you want to refresh the content of your class to match that in the parent class or restore the link to the parent class version of the content you must save your new edited question under a different name and then delete the version that has the same original name as the original in the parent class question or delete the edited modified version of the question The parent class restores the matching original question automatically Note If you modify questions or assignments that you inherit from a shared parent class there is no risk that the parent class version will overwrite your modified version unless you specifically delete the modified question or assignment from your child class This means that if you make changes to the inherited questions or assignments and save them to the original name your changed versions sever the relationship with t
308. la Multi Formula Questions in LaTeX page 274 Multipart Formula Maple Formula page 273 268 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Mathematical Fill in the Blanks formula option Question Mode Blanks formula option The Blanks blank formula question type generates a fill in the blank question in which the answer is a formula The text inside a blank formula command is removed and a text field is displayed Notes e You must provide the correct answer as an argument to the macro The answer must be written in calculator syntax not in TeX Enter the answer as you expect the student to enter it although equivalent answers are graded correct e This option is similar to the Formula question type but is more convenient for some questions e An advantage of the Blanks question type is that several blank macros can be included in a single question and different blank options can be mixed in a single question This makes the Blanks type powerful and flexible e You can use blank formula questions to create a matrix question by setting the blank response cells in an HTML table e Ifthe answer is a number that is does not have any variables it is recommended that you specify in the question text whether an exact response or an approximation is required In the case of an approximation the margin of error must be specified in your correct answer This can be done by e Specifying a margin of error using the operator
309. lain text file which ends in a qu extension To export a copy of your work on the local hard drive on your computer 1 From the Question Repository find the questions you wish to save 2 Select the check boxes beside the questions you wish to export 3 Click Export The files are saved as questions qu Why Export Your Questions You may want to have your own local copy of your questions which normally reside on the Maple T A server You may also want to share your content with others who are not part of your institution If you save your questions to a 8 8 Sharing Questions 117 question file qu file or to a course module and share that file with another instructor that instructor can import the qu file or course module into the Question Repository for their class in their instance of Maple T A Note If you make changes to the qu file only recommended if you are familiar with the syntax and structure of these files you can update the questions in your own class by importing them back into the Question Repository 8 8 Sharing Questions Sharing content makes a wider range of questions available to all users You can share questions from your class with other instructors in the system You can also obtain questions from other instructors Questions belong to a class The creator of a question becomes the owner of the question Questions can only be modified by the owner Instructors can obtain questions in three wa
310. lasses to manage content between classes on one or more Maple T A servers is that the questions assignments and web resource folders are entirely portable and can be installed in a new class even at another institution very easily After you create and export a course module you can send it to other instructors who can upload it into their class and use it as is or alter it to suit their needs Technical Information Expected Behaviors of Course Modules 1 CMs encapsulate from the source class and allow you to reinstall questions in the destination class e Relative paths to resources are preserved and reinstalled e All question types including those requiring outside resources are preserved Note Different releases of the system may support different question types and earlier system releases may not support all question types 2 CMs encapsulate from the source class and allow you to reinstall assignments in the destination class e Assignment behaviors and policies are preserved e Links to all source content and related resources are preserved 3 CMs encapsulate from the source class and allow you to reinstall resource objects in the destination class e Relative paths are preserved for folders and subfolders of the class web site e Underlying folder structure is preserved e Connections with questions and assignments through annotations are preserved See Also Shared Classes Overview page 13 5 2 Creating a Course Module
311. ld which presents students with a blank response area To present students with a drop down menu of choices select Drop down menu e When the display type is Text field you can set the grading standards To apply strict grading case sensitive and literal string matching as your grading mode set matching type to Exact text match from the Matching Type drop down list To invoke a less stringent grader that ignores case sensitivity and punctuation select Ignore Case text match You can also use a regular expression matching grader to customize the grading routine Enter answer choices in the Item fields To add items click the top Item button e As you add expected answers the system assigns them a credit value of 0 0 in the right column Edit the weights as desired using 1 fully correct or any decimal value between 0 and for partially correct answers 5 Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question See Also Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 9 16 Question Designer Questions 173 Maple To create a Maple question 1 nA A W N Options Enter a question in the Text of the question panel Click Insert Edit Response Area Select the Maple graded question type in the Edit Response Area dialog Select an Expression type Formula or Maple Syntax Using Maple code enter the correct answer in the Answer field For example if the question is find the indefinite integral of
312. le T A Demonstration Class Stat 230 Figure 1 1 System Homepage with Classes I Am Instructing Additionally any classes in which you are a student or proctor are also listed under their own sections Classes I Am Taking and Classes I Am Proctoring respectively From the System Homepage click on a class name link to open the Class Homepage The Class Homepage Once you have created your class you can upload a student roster or allow students to register themselves in your class The Class Homepage is used by the instructor students and proctors involved in that particular class A MapleT A Jack s Class Class Homepage wy Maplesoit System Homepage Class Homepage Welcome Jack Day My Profile Actions Content Manager Gradebook Help Logout Calculus 101 Maplesoft Jack Day Select the link for an assignment io begin Assignment Name Points Type Availability Demonstration of the Maple graded Question Type 25 0 Practice Unlimited Demonstration of Question Types 63 0 Practice Unlimited Assignment 1 3 0 Homework Quiz Unlimited Figure 1 2 Class Homepage with Assignment List 1 4 System Overview 5 See Also Creating a New Class page 7 Using the System in the Classroom Possible Uses of Maple T A for Online Homework and Testing Create self scoring web delivered tests and homework assignments from your time tested problem files Use formatted problem sets to create automated self grading homework or test a
313. le is not a zip file the program does not upload any file 5 Click OK to perform the upload and return to the list of files on your web site The uploaded zip file appears with the list of files in the web site explorer Important The maximum size of a zip file that can be uploaded is 5 MB Viewing or Deleting Files To view or delete a file 1 Click the file icon next to the name of the file The full URL of the file is displayed 2 To verify the contents of the file click the URL to open the file in a separate browser window Close the browser window once you are sure that you have the right file 3 Click Delete to delete the file 4 A confirmation message is displayed before this file is deleted 2 3 The Class Web Site Editor 19 Working with Folders in the Class Web Site Creating Subfolders To create a subfolder 1 Click the folder icon next to new subfolder 2 Enter the name of the subfolder When creating the name use letters numbers or underscores in the name but not spaces 3 Click OK 4 The program adds the subfolder at the top of the web site folder and opens it If the web site has more than one subfolder the program arranges them in alphabetical order Each subfolder has its own icons for creating a new subfolder and for uploading files Use these to create sub subfolders and to upload files to the subfolder Closing Subfolders When a subfolder is open the web site explorer does not
314. len E E E AR EE E E eee eee 226 imax a b c d minla b C dj vi iioi ieia cc ov ects TEE EE AE EEEE EEE EEE EE ere 227 NOU A DEANTE EPEE A EO AEAEE NEEE ETSE AEAEE 227 murnfimt fit K ae or e E E E E EE E Ha AE EE E o ys AE E E E aE 227 plofimaple text oaa ee dee ads aes cas a E oe Sed aa E a A R AT 227 rand m n rand m nK cccceseeececdes eccecets scoeaens coven eta dewegee ss cc enc CEEE EEEE E deduet sec cutie TEE oeedewedtee os 228 Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n K cee eecc cece ences ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 229 ra k n b Cd eS ee eee 230 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n K ss sssssessssseesessessessesresersresessererssesreseesee 230 Statistical Operations sosro ioni ioes a iE EE y EE E A EE EEE ESEE EEEE EE EA EE 231 strcat b Cda scons n a a a a a ara a aa aaa eeN ea ae a pa Eae 232 Sum varname start Stop EXPL ceecceecceecceecceeceeece cece eee eeae eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeessessaessaeeseeeaeeeneeeaeees 232 Switch a Dy Creone a ee ee ee 232 10 19 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers sesssesesssesssissrrssrresrrerrresrresree 233 Unr served Operations rs e eraren e a Ea ae AR EEN aN ES 233 Reserved Operations oecisvccedess secede eoii ipera A E E E EEEE EE EE AE TE E E E 233 10 20 Question Chaining Variables sizesis 233 Example eonen ioios oieta decease eveeu shin cceues ue cdeueng EEA va daceudeudeces tus E E
315. lin anai finch linch in linch inches in inch ya feet yara yard yd yard yards yd yard mi 5280 feet miles statute mile mi miles statute miles mi miles statute IL m 3 1000 liter nL 10 9L nanoliter uL 1086 L microliter m fiosa milliliter kL 10 39 L kiloliter ML 10 6L megaliter lliter L liter liters L liter sec S second second S second seconds S second min 60s minute minute min minute minutes min minute h 60min hour hr h hour hour h hour 10 10 Using a Table of Units 207 208 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions 10 9s nanosecond lus 106s microsecond ms 103s millisecond ks 103s kilosecond ms 10 6 s megasecond IN om newon nn 1059 N nanonewton in foen micronewton mN 1053 N milinewton kN 1043 N kilonewton mN 10 6 N meganewton y Nm joule nd 10 9J nanojoule fus 106 J microjoule md 10 3J millijoule kd 10 3 J kilojoule ms 10 6 J megajoule Pa Nim pascat _ nPa 10 9 Pa nanopascal uPa 10 6 Pa micropascal mPa 1043 Pa millipascal kPa 10 3 Pa kilopascal MPa 10 6 Pa megapascal Ww Jis watt nv 10 9 WW nanowatt uw 106 WV microwatt 10 3 Ww milliwatt 103 W kilowatt Ky MW 1088 w megawatt Hz ts hertz nHz fosg Hz nanohertz uHz 106 Hz microhertz mHz 1083 Hz millihertz kHz 1083 Hz kiloher
316. list of choices which includes one correct answer Notes e You can have as many or as few choices as desired Mark the correct choice with an asterisk e The order of the choices is permuted for the student To force the choices to appear in the order you specify use the Nonpermuting Multiple Choice question type Example 1 begin question MultipleChoice qutext What is the capital of California List the choices and mark the correct choice with an asterisk choice San Francisco choice Los Angeles choice Sacramento end question Example 2 begin question MultipleChoice qutext 3 log x 2 log y choice log left displaystyle frac x 3 y 2 right choice log x 3y 2 choice 1log 3x 2y choice 1log x 3 y 2 end question Example 3 begin question NonPermutingMultipleChoice This question uses randomized variables qutext Consider the function f x var c x var n What happens to f x as x to infty choice f x to infty choice f x to infty choice f x to 0 code n int 2 rint 4 3 c int rint 6 2 The above code chooses random integer coefficients n and c The exponent n is positive and odd 3 5 7 or 9 11 5 Basic Question Types in LaTeX 257 The coefficient c is negative between 2 and 7 end question See Also Multiple Choice Questions page 163 Multiple Selectio
317. lity to return and rework an assignment with the same algorithmically generated variable values for each repeated attempt use the Reworkable option for homework in Step 3 of the Assignment Editor Algorithmically generated variable values are recorded permanently in the graded session results stored in the class Gradebook At any time following grading students and instructors can return and review the exact assignment with the variable values used and student responses entered in the assignment 10 16 Working with Variable Data For each type of question supported you can include algorithmically generated random variables in question statements answers hints comments and solutions Using variables in questions you can generate variations on a single template question Types of Variables e Maple based variables You can use any Maple function to generate variables See the tutorial on this topic Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 Range based variables You can specify mathematical ranges set by declaring minimum and maximum data values and increments for randomly generated data Range based variables are defined by a formula and can include mathematical operations For example you can specify a variable x that is a random integer between 10 16 Working with Variable Data 219 0 and 30 in steps of 3 using the variable definition x range 0 30 3 See the tutorial on this topic Tut
318. lor specification takes precedence over shading specification regardless of the order of the options in the command The value can be in lowercase or uppercase style s This specifies how the surface is to be drawn where s is one of contour hidden line patch patchcontour patchnogrid point or wireframe Some of the options may not be available on some devices The default style is patch for colored surface patch rendering The value can be in lowercase or uppercase symbol s This option defines the symbol for points in the plot s is one of box circle cross diamond or point The value can be in lowercase or uppercase Note If the style is set to point the default symbol is plot device specific symbolsize n The size in points of a symbol used in plotting can be given by a positive integer This does not affect the symbol point The default symbol size is 10 thickness n This option specifies the thickness of lines in the plot The thickness n must be a non negative integer The default thickness is 0 tickmarks m n p If m is an integer then this option controls the number of tickmarks that are placed on the x axis If m is a list of numeric values then tickmarks are placed only at the specified values If m is a list of equations v t where v is a numeric value and t is a name or string then a tickmark with the label t is placed at v If m is the name default then the default tickmark placement is appli
319. luate the student response For Maple Formula answer field questions the system parses the student response and then passes the parsed result to Maple For Maple Syntax questions with the text entry response option the student response is passed unparsed to Maple For more information see Matching questions do not contain an answer The matching items are defined using pairs of statements field term i lt label_i gt term i def 1 lt correct_match_of_label_i gt where the values of i in a question must start at 1 and be consecutive Essay questions do not contain an answer They are not graded by the system field Ifa student response is incorrect the default system behavior is to display the answer field value For more information on this behavior see Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers page 212 To display custom feedback use the comment field See Also The Answer Field Evaluation and Requirements page 239 Basic Math Syntax in the System page 180 128 8 Authoring Methods for Questions The info Field The info field allows you to add information subfields to a question to indicate subtopic learning objective level of difficulty authorship ownership or other information The info field is not required The info field values e Allow sorting and filtering in the question repository and during assignment creation e Facilitate performance reporting by information field
320. m the Course Modules screen select the CM you want to work with from the list of available CMs in your class You can select multiple CMs for this action 2 Click View Details to proceed to a page that lists all the questions assignments and web resource folders that are contained in the selected CMs 3 Select the components to be deleted and click Delete 4 You can select all the questions assignments or web folders included in the CM by selecting the check box adjacent to the Name column headings Important When you use this method to delete elements from a CM the system deletes the selected element questions assign ments or web resource folders are physically deleted from the system and are unrecoverable Note If the elements you have deleted from one CM are used in another CM installed in your class they will not be permanently removed from your course but will be removed from only the selected CM To delete only the index file containing the record of the CM contents from the list of the available CMs click the Delete button Why Delete Only Part of a Course Module If you install a CM given to you by a colleague but want to duplicate only certain parts of the contents of that CM for example install only questions and web folders but not install the related assignments you first install the entire CM and then use the steps outlined above to remove the assignments 5 7 Deleting a Course Module 67 5 7 Del
321. mas answer sqrt 3 2 1 2 sqrt 3 end question Example 2 begin question FormulaList This question uses randomized variables qutext Find the slope m and the vertical intercept b of the line with the equation y var m x var b answer var m var b code ml int rint 9 2 St rint 2 m int switch t m1 m1 b int rint 20 1 The above code chooses random integer coefficients m and b m is an integer with an absolute value between 2 and 10 b is a positive integer between 1 and 20 end question See Also Coordinates of Points and Vectors Questions in LaTeX page 280 Formula Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Formula The Formula question type is the most general math question type Answers can be any kind of formula entered in calculator syntax or using the system Symbolic Editor entry mode Independent of entry method answers are encoded as MathML enabling the system to grade equivalent answers correctly Answers can include variables and standard functions Notes The answer field is a calculated field It must be in calculator syntax not in TeX Enter the answer as you expect the student to enter it although equivalent answers are graded correct e Ifthe answer is a number that is does not have any variables it is recommended that you specify in the question text whether an exact response or an approximation is required In the case of a
322. mation the margin of error must be specified in your correct answer This can be done by specifying a margin of error using the operator For example if the answer field were 2 34 0 01 any response between 2 33 and 2 35 inclusive would be graded correct In other words the number following the operator is the margin of error For more information on tolerances see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 See Also Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Equation page 137 Formula page 137 Restricted Formula Questions in LaTeX page 279 Vectors of Formulas Question Mode Ntuple qu x y mode Ntuple The Ntuple question type requires a vector of formulas a sequenced list in correct responses Use this for questions with vectors of formulas or numbers You can use the full range of functions in the formulas that is all trigonometric functions log In abs and sqrt e This is an ordered list The entries must appear in the same order as in the given correct answer The correct answer given should have parentheses such as 3 5 or 2 1 3 because this is indicated in the in structions under the answer box However a response is graded correct with or without the parentheses e This type is graded in the same manner as the Formula List type The only difference is the instructions given to the students 9 3 Applet Questions 151 In a test the input fi
323. mbedded Plots Example Script cceecceeceeeceeeeeeeee eee eeceeeeeeeeenees 297 Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions cccsceceeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 298 Short Phrase Question Example Script 0 cccecceecceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seca seca eeee esse eeaeeaeeeeneeeneeenegaes 300 True or False Question Example Script cceecceecceeceeeceeece eee eece cece eeae eee eeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeges 300 AcAdditional Information ese enn onstage on cba e a E cits bate E aie ites ba Sedat E E EE ASEEN 303 A l Copyrights and Trademarks 22 005 ccc cc cc cecissacee ceeds cv cicada decades vavecidand oegueteeccustiadecedhavedcuetieececetveeceues 303 Copyrights seiren en a ts ke gbtetscuhene saan shadeiachaed be webbed ethane ceva bbuas tabhone Leweted eaaa eE aE ESAN 303 Prada kS ie oic che beret ieee oh a tind Ss erties A eet Se vee ene oN lo a Ete ERA 303 Contents xi Ac2 System Requirements ieee ha cexdensnetdvh one ceseabuh oaveote Savdoueect weaeed A e aa a a anaa 303 Client Recommended Configuration Instructors Students and Proctors seceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 303 Windows 32 Diticcicvsdedecseeesecc te 35 Geo yes heat eRe Bats A EEE RE 304 Windows 64 bit science veee gates stewards coed R EEEE SE E IE ous ba E Sewesiwibes E Es 304 Macintoshien eee eaa a a a enue bouts a a aa ca wad aa a e a A 304 Linx lt 32 bi sic otesi e e An AE Py ets Cee as E ATTE A
324. me outs during Authoring Sessions page 77 When creating and editing question banks clicking Finish does not permanently save a copy of a question to a hard drive You must save your question bank to your hard drive as a qu plain text source file or install the question bank on the class web site hard drive See Also Creating a New Question or Editing an Existing Question page 76 Question Types Available in the System page 131 Clickable Image Questions in the Question Editor Clickable image questions can be authored only in the Question Editor The Question Editor provides a suite of graphics tools required to tag response areas in the source image files for correct answers To create a clickable image question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Clickable imagemap b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d To proceed to the Add Clickable Imagemap screen click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen a In the text box enter the question statement b In the URL text field enter the URL where the GIF image is located To upl
325. mula answer Sanswer editing useHTML 3 algorithm Sa maple randomize rand 100 200 Sb rint 10 50 Sanswer int a b Notes 1 This question uses both Maple based for a and Maple T A random variables for b 2 When referencing negative random variables in a maple variable definition be sure to place the negative variable in parentheses otherwise an error message will return e maple a b See Also Maple graded Formula Question Example Script page 293 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Maple Syntax Question Example Script page 294 Questions with Plots page 148 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX 11 1 LaTeX Authoring Overview You can author and edit all question types using LaTeX to generate plain text script files There are certain advanced question types that cannot be created in the Question Editor for example dynamically rendered plots in questions algorithmically generated labels in figures matrices and dynamic graph sketching For these questions you can use plain text script files or LaTeX It is recommended that you write and edit question banks using LaTeX only if you are an experienced LaTeX user Otherwise it is recommended that you edit script files using a text or HTML editor or use the Question Editor Requirements To use LaTeX to author Maple T A question banks you need e ed sty The Maple T A LaTeX macros You can download
326. n page 113 Adding and Editing Individual Question Parts of a Multipart Question page 113 e Partial Credit and Weighted Scoring page 113 For an introduction to multipart questions see Multipart Questions page 162 For instructions on creating a new multipart question see Multipart Questions in the Question Editor page 100 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 113 Editing the Top Level of a Multipart Question 1 In the Question Editor select the multipart question to edit Click Edit 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen edit the description solution or other options Click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Weighting screen you can e Edit the text to appear at the top of the question e Specify preferences for numbering the parts using the Numbering style drop down menu e Set question weighting for the parts 4 Click Finish Adding to and Editing Individual Question Parts of a Multipart Question If your question includes variables you must edit the plain text script file for it to preserve your variable definitions You can edit the script file by using the Question Editor Edit Source facility To edit using Edit Source In the Question Editor select the multipart question to edit Click Edit On the Question Name amp Type screen click Edit Source Edit the file To save your changes click OK On the Question Name amp Type screen click Next nH nA BP U NY On t
327. n x sig n x int x page 223 lsu n x See su n x page 226 sum varname start stop expr See sum var name start stop expr page 232 switch n a b c See switch n a b c page 232 See Also Rules for Naming Variables page 221 Inline Variable Expressions You can include a computed expression anywhere within a question statement comment or hint e Inline variable expressions can contain computations involving functions or algorithmic variables defined elsewhere in the question e The syntax is to enclose the expression in f For example you can include expressions like n 1 in place of defining a separate variable to hold n 1 This simplifies complex algorithms Example qu 1 1 question What is the derivative of x n qu 1 1 answer n x n 1 qu 1 1 algorithm n range 2 10 See Also mathml f page 226 Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 196 Simplified Math Expressions page 199 10 17 Generating Random Numbers in Questions 221 Rules for Naming Variables Follow these rules when naming variables A variable name must be of the form name or name The string name can consist of letters a z and A Z numbers 0 9 and underscore characters _ The first character of name must be an alphabetic character a z or A Z Ifthe name form is used spaces can also appear
328. n Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Multiple Selection Nonpermuting Multiple Selection The Multiple Selection and Nonpermuting Multiple Selection question types create a question and a list of choices which includes possibly more than one correct answer Notes e You can have as many or as few choices as desired Mark the correct choice s with an asterisk The order of the choices is permuted for the student To force the choices to appear in the order you specify use the Nonpermuting Multiple Selection question type Example 1 begin question Multiple Selection qutext Select all cities that are located in California List the choices and mark all the correct choices with an asterisk choice San Francisco choice Los Angeles choice Chicago choice New York choice Sacramento end question Example 2 begin question MultipleSelection qutext Select the equations of all lines that are vertical asymptotes of the graph of y sec x If the graph has no vertical asymptotes select No vertical asymptotes choice x 7 pi 2 choice x pi choice x pi 2 choice x 0 choice x pi 4 choice x 2 pi 3 choice x 5 pi 2 choice No vertical asymptotes end question Example 3 begin question MultipleSelection This question uses randomized variables qutext Select the equations of all lines that are vertical asymptotes of the graph of the fu
329. n approximation the margin of error must be specified in your correct answer This can be done by Specifying a margin of error using the operator 272 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX For example if the answer field were 2 34 0 01 any response between 2 33 and 2 35 inclusive would be graded correct In other words the number following the operator is the margin of error For more information on tolerances see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 Example 1 begin question Formula qutext What is the derivative of x 3 3 cos x 1 Use calculator syntax for the answer not TeX answer 3x 2 3 sin x end question Example 2 begin question Formula qutext Compute the exact value of f 2 if x x 3 3 cos x 1 answer 12 3 sin 2 Any numerical approximation is graded incorrect end question Example 3 begin question Formula qutext Compute f 2 if x x 3 3 cos x 1 Round your answer to 5 significant digits answer 9 2721 In this case a more or less accurate response is graded incorrect end question Example 4 begin question Formula qutext Compute f 2 if f x x 3 3 cos x 1 Your answer should be correct to an accuracy of at least 5 decimal places answer 9 27211 0 00001 Any response between 9 27210 and 09 27212 is graded correct The response 12 3 sin 2 is also acceptable end
330. n eesse ena E E E evs S ude dua benseganeners Wagevsonseeddaedeanenvest 289 Fill in the Blank Question Example Script cccceecceeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeea cece eece sess ees eeeeeeeneeeeeeenegaes 289 Graph Plotting Example Script essen ssena a a ca Ae e a deve diael Saa ocvadeudetvesees ides 290 Graph Sketching Question Example Script cccceecceeceeeceeeeeeeceeeceeeea cece eece cess eeseeeeeeeeeeeneeenegaes 290 Key Word or Phrase Question Example Script cccccecceeece cece cece eeceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeegas 291 Labeling Graphics in Questions Example Script ccccecceeceeeceeece cece eece cece eese esse eenseeeeeeeneeenegees 291 List Question Example Script rst sens cexgehsecsbehengedadobeastvehied Eeue lavicweceedocuel Pebued testbed sianed iee 292 Maple graded Formula Question Example Script ccceecceeceeeeceeceeeceeeteeeceeeeaeesaeeseeaeeeaeeeneeenaes 293 Maple Syntax Question Example Script cccccecececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeaeeeaneranes 294 Multipart Question Example Script ccccecccecceeceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea seca eeee sess ees eeeeeeaneeesesenegaes 295 Multiple Choice Question Example Script ccceccceccceccneceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeaeesseeseeaeeeaeeeanes 296 Multiple Selection Question Example Script cccecccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeneeenaes 296 Authoring Questions with E
331. n the gradebook perform a search for the assignment 2 Click the name of the assignment to edit the external grades 3 Modify the assignment name total points passing score if desired Modify student grades or comments 4 Save the results 4 8 Forced Grading To force the grading of an assignment 1 From the Class Homepage select the Gradebook menu and then select Class Grades 2 Select the Assignment name and in the Progress list select In Progress 3 Click Submit to perform the search An in progress assignment is indicated by the symbol beside the grade 4 In the search results click the assignment name link Class Grades Question Statistics Page 1 of 1Rows 1 50f5 Con Bonus Assignmpnt Demonstra ast Total points i Conner Sean 0 Day Jack May Ben 1 5 O Brien Jimm Poster Meg 5 In the Details area click the Force grade active assignments link 60 4 Working with the Gradebook Assignment Grades Bonus Assignment Y Bonus Assignment Current Total Points 9 0 Class Average 7 Attempts 3 Original Total Points 9 0 Last Modified 9 211104 13PM Average Attempts 0 5 Active Assignments 2 Force grade active assignments Question Statistics Histogram of Student Assignment Scores 6 The users that are currently taking the assignment are displayed Click Force Grade Important Ifa student is actively in the process of taking an assignment you cannot force grade the studen
332. n to create a subfolder For maintainability it is recommended that you place files in a subfolder 2 Click the Upload files s to this point icon 3 Click Browse to locate and select the file The following file formats are supported htm html gif jpg png pdf xls class jar js css shtml exe zip swf lib 4 Select the radio button next to Single File The system uploads the file to your class web site giving it the name that you specify The default name is the name of the file on your computer 5 Click OK to perform the upload and return to the list of files on your web site The uploaded zip file appears with the list of files in the web site explorer Important The maximum size of a file that can be uploaded is 5 MB Uploading Multiple Files You can upload multiple resource files to your class web site if you package them in a compressed zip file first The Zip Archive option is useful if you have many files to upload To upload multiple files 1 From the Web Site Editor navigate to an appropriate subfolder on the web site or click the Create new subfolder icon to create a subfolder For maintainability it is recommended that you place files in a subfolder 2 Click the Upload files s to this point icon 3 Click Browse to locate and select the zip file 4 Select Zip Archive The program extracts all of the files from the selected zip file and uploads them to the web site If the selected fi
333. name start stop expr Sums the expression expr with respect to the dummy variable varname between the values start and stop For example sum i 1 20 i 2 evaluates 1 2 2 2 3 2 20 2 and returns 2 870 s sum i 1 n i 2 calculates the sum of the squares of the integers from 1 to n Note Do not use a character for the dummy variable in the summation switch n a b c Given a whole number 0 1 2 and a list of items returns the nth item in the list the first item is in position 0 the second in position 1 and so on For example prime switch rint 5 2 3 5 7 11 sets prime to a random choice from the first 5 primes mont switch 1 red green yellow returns green See Also Tutorial List based Variables page 242 rank n a b c d page 230 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 230 10 19 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers 233 10 19 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers This is a list of mathematical and logical operators functions that you can use in internal directives within questions Some of these operators are also available to students in their responses to math questions in the system unreserved operations while others are reserved for instructor or question authoring use only Unreserved Operations These functions are available for use in both internal d
334. nction f x displaystyle frac var a x var b x 2 var cc If the graph has no vertical asymptotes select No vertical asymptotes choice x var c choice x var c choice x 0 choice x var d choice x var e choice No vertical asymptotes code 258 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Sa int rint 8 2 b int rint 8 2 Sc int rint 4 1 Scc int c 2 t rint 2 d1 int c rint 2 1 d int switch t d1 d1 Sel int d rint 2 1 e int switch t e1 e1 The above code chooses random integer coefficients a and b between 2 and 9 The value of cc can be 1 4 9 or 16 d and e are extra choices that do not duplicate the others end question See Also Multiple Selection Questions page 164 True or False Questions in LaTeX Question Mode True False The True False question type creates a question and a list of two choices True and False Example 1 begin question True False qutext Whales are mammals Mark the answer true or false true end question Example 2 begin question TrueFalse qutext The equation 2x 3y 2 4 defines a function with an independent variable xS false end question Example 3 begin question TrueFalse This question uses randomized variables qutext The equation var a x var b y 2 var c defines a function with an independent
335. nd using your own questions you can edit the Comments fields and mask the correct answer For details see Configuring Feedback Options page 43 2 Consider locking your class after an initial sign up period to prevent registration of students not in the class and creation of fake accounts You can also delete unwanted accounts For details Locking and Unlocking Class Regis tration page 10 and Deleting Student Records page 69 Proctored Exams 1 Proctors can authorize students to take and grade assignments This usually depends on class size and the number of teaching assistants available to act as proctors However this double checking approach keeps the environment totally controlled 2 Proctors can use the Proctor Tools utility to avoid entering their password in front of students For more information see Proctored Exams page 35 7 Integrating Maple T A with an LDAP Server 7 1 LDAP Overview for Instructors The LDAP integration in Maple T A allows you to integrate Maple T A with your campus database for user authen tication making the instructor s class administration even easier LDAP integration allows Maple T A users to log in with a username and password that are managed by your university s IT group in a central repository an LDAP Server Your Maple T A system administrator can give you more information on whether LDAP is used at your in stitution What LDAP means to the Maple T A course administrator
336. ndividual regions if you make a mistake d When you have completed the identification of regions within your image click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question See Also Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site page 87 Clickable Image Question Example Script page 288 Essay Questions in the Question Editor To create an essay question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Essay b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d Click Next 3 On the Question Statement screen a In the text box enter the question statement b Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question See Also Changing Grades and Adding Comments page 53 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 95 Free Response Fill in the Blank Questions in the Question Editor You can create two kinds of blanks questions by using the Fill in the blanks question type in the Question Editor The text type produces a text field in the question The student enters a
337. ndomTools Generate generate a particular random object For example return a random complex number with real and imaginary parts of a specified flavor or choose one of the entries in a collection with equal probability Note When using Maple s random number generator rand you must include randomize as the first part of the call This sets the initial state of the random number generator using a number based on the system clock instead of the default seed in Maple Without randomize each call to rand will produce the same sequence of values using the default randomization seed For an example that uses Maple randomization commands see Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 See Also Tutorial Algorithmic Question page 241 Tutorial List based Variables page 242 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 10 18 Functions and Arguments The system contains numerous built in functions for creating algorithmic variables You can create random integers or real numbers perform operations on lists of items or set conditions on variables This section describes the built in functions and gives the syntax and purpose of each function Most of these functions are for use in authoring questions but cannot be used in student responses For more information see Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 233 condition x condition x Imposes the condit
338. ne a custom list of units in a question bank use the TableOfUnits command in the LaTeX document s preamble that is before begin document and after usepackage ed The TableOfUnits command takes two required arguments in the following order tablename table name consisting of lower case letters a z with no spaces Use the table name to reference the table in the document units_list the list of acceptable units Units are defined with statements defining the units in terms of SI units or previously defined units Each statement must end with a semicolon For example cm 0 01m mm 0 1cm The base SI units are m meter kg kilogram s second A amp K kelvin cd Candela To use a custom list of units in a question use the units tablename command in the body of the question where tablename is the table name the first argument to TableOfUnits Import ant Because the system converts between systems of units using inexact conversion factors it is recommended that you accept responses in a margin of error in questions with units The Numeric question type has five distinct types of grading Descriptions are given below followed by usage instructions and examples 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 277 1 Exact value the student response must match the value given in the answer field There is no error tolerance If you do not specify any other commands this behavior is used
339. nificant digits and margin of error tolerance in questions Support for questions using Maple Support for questions that use plots generated by Maple Mathematics Question Types Maple T A offers 14 varieties of mathematical and scientific free response question types including formula numeric and questions that use the Maple mathematical software to grade and plot student responses Symbolic and Equation Question Types Maple graded Formula page 142 Maple Syntax page 143 Formula page 137 Restricted Formula page 150 Formula with Units page 139 Constants of Integration Questions page 136 Equation page 137 MultiFormula page 145 Formula List page 139 Vectors of Formulas page 150 Graph Plotting in LaTeX Questions page 259 Numeric Question Types Numeric page 146 including numbers with physical units Labeling Graphics in LaTeX Questions page 263 Matrix page 144 179 180 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions 10 2 Basic Math Syntax in the System Mathematical Expression Syntax page 180 Variable Names Syntax page 180 Operator and Function Syntax page 181 Writing Mathematical Expressions The basic syntax for entering mathematical formulas or expressions in the system enables you to quickly enter expressions using symbolic math You can type formulas using standard mathematical notation similar to that used for a graphing calculator and in general the system correctly i
340. ning Your Question Bank Project page 75 The Algorithm Designer page 80 Authoring Mathematical Questions page 179 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Questions with Plots page 148 8 4 Project Elements 75 8 4 Project Elements Authoring When to Use the Question Editor Use the Question Editor to e Create new questions or edit existing questions The Question Editor allows you to author many varieties of questions in the system e Author a limited number of new questions Scripting and LaTeX may be faster for large projects Use another method when authoring advanced question types involving interaction with for example applets See Also Online Authoring in the Question Editor page 92 Authoring When to Use LaTeX Use Question Banks Created from LaTeX Files e For an alternative to plain text script files when authoring several advanced question modes for example dy namically rendered plots in questions algorithmically generated labels in figures matrices and dynamic graph sketching e You must have LaTeX expertise and technical knowledge You must use the macro package and web based conversion service http www maplesoft com products mapleta latex2ta See Also LaTeX Authoring Overview page 247 Authoring When to Use Maple T A Plain Text Script Files Use Maple T A qu Plain Text Script Files e For full access to the power and flexibility of the system question banks and algor
341. ns that use the special variables response and or grade described below 2 Create assignments that use these questions in sequence Note The questions that use chaining must have an algorithm If this is not needed you can define a dummy variable This is demonstrated in the example See the line qu 1 2 algorithm x 0 To use question chaining variables e Ifa question has an id field set then you can use the id tag to refer to the response the student provided during an assignment Example 1 topic Question Chaining mode Blanks id foobar editing useHTML question Pick a number between 1 and 7 lt 1 gt blank 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 grader 1 formula extra PRPPRPRPP RP PRPPRPRPP RP mode Numeric editing useHTML question What is the sum of response fool and 17 algorithm x 0 answer num response foobar 17 answer units showUnits false grading exact_value name Exact answer Precision with system units editing useHTML qu 1 1 mode formula agaagaagga gdagaaa a PRPPHPHP PPP PR NNNNNNNNNDND To refer to the student response to one question in another question use the variable response foobar The referring questions need not be in the same question bank but they must use the correct ID code The contents of response foobar is a string Note response foobar can be used only in in line dynamic text it cannot be used in the algorithm section of
342. nsionless a pure number The operator is not available to students A student cannot specify a margin of error The above issues do not arise for students For more examples and information see Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions page 215 See Also Answer Tolerance Example Script page 285 10 4 Student Responses and Grading 185 Significant Digits in Maple Questions The Maple Digits environment variable controls the number of digits that Maple uses when calculating with software floating point numbers The default value of Digits is 10 The value of Digits is changed by using the assignment operator For example Digits 20 Using the evalf Command to Set the Value of the Digits Variable The parameter n which can be given as a second argument evalf expr n sets the value of Digits for a single computation To round the exact answer assign the exact answer to a dummy variable and then use the evalf expr n command in the evalb command to compare the student response to the rounded answer Example Calculate the quadratic mean of the following list of data 695 607 511 588 710 500 682 515 709 478 497 657 652 634 488 615 714 579 589 493 584 484 503 711 622 695 The answer requires 5 significant digits 1 First calculate the exact numeric answer 2 Round it to the required number of significant digits For example exact_answer evalf
343. nslator name in translation Include MathType data in translation Figure 10 2 MathType Translator to MathML Create your math expression using MathType Select the expression use Ctrl A to select all elements Copy the highlighted expression to the Windows clipboard use Ctrl C Open your qu plain text script file and position the cursor at the location for the MathML expression Paste the MathML expression into your plain text script file use CtrI V Save your qu script file according to the system requirements 0 ON DAN FR WwW Open your class web site and use the Question Editor to upload and install the new question bank with MathML intact See Also Editing with the Equation Editor page 188 198 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions MathML in the Questions MathML is used by the system for both the display of complicated math expressions as well as for content in math expressions mathematical meaning For small expressions you can use the mathml f function to create inline MathML expressions in effect to force the system to render an expression defined in calculator syntax as a typeset math expression Example qu 1 8 mode Formula qu 1 8 name Fractions qu 1 8 editing useHTML qu 1 8 algorithm a range 1 8 num Smathml x 2 a Sans Sa 2 qu 1 8 question Solve for x lt br gt Snum qu 1 8 answer Sans For larger expressions you can include the MathML co
344. nswer field to set a margin of error The plus or minus operator represents in ordinary math notation You can specify an absolute tolerance For example to accept 2 5 0 25 that is any response between 2 25 and 2 75 inclusive use 2 5 0 25 You can also specify a percentage tolerance To accept 5 12 5 that is any response between 4 864 and 5 376 inclusive use 5 12 1 0 05 Note The operator cannot be used in an algorithmic variable definition or other algorithmic statement For numeric and Maple graded questions you cannot use the operator For information on specifying a margin of error for a numeric question see Setting Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 86 To specify a margin of error in a Maple graded question use Maple code Consider the following when working with margins of error e Precedence of the Operator The operator is of the same precedence as and For example 2 3 0 5 is the same as 6 0 5 and 2 3 0 5 is the same as 6 1 e Units Because expressions with units have different dimensions from pure numbers you must specify a dimen sioned margin of error for a dimensioned answer To specify 2kg with a tolerance of 0 1kg enter 2kg 0 1kg or 2 0 1 kg To specify 50cm within 5 enter 1 0 05 50cm Important The expression 50cm 2 is invalid It is a mixed expression The left hand side has dimension length The right hand side is dime
345. nswer to the question mode Formula name Show only final calculated answer editing useHTML algorithm Smass rand 4 8 2 velocity rand 10 20 2 Sans sig 2 1 2 mass velocity 2 2222 10 11 Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers 213 qu 1 2 question What is the kinetic energy of a body of mass mass kg moving at velocity m s qu 1 2 answer Sans the system displays the correct answer as Correct answer 900 assuming that the algorithmically generated variables set mass 4 5 and velocity 20 In this case an incorrect response by the student shows only the correct numerical answer to 2 significant figures Displaying Both the Formula for the Answer and the Final Calculated Answer To show the student both the correct formula and the calculated answer combine these methods and use the comment field 1 Create a variable ans that holds the formula for the answer 2 Use the ans variable in the comment field along with the formula for the answer Example 3 Ifa student gives the wrong answer to the question qu 1 3 mode Formula qu 1 3 name Shows both calculated and formula answers qu 1 3 comment lt br gt This answer is derived according to the general formula lt br gt kinetic energy 1 2 mass velocity lt sup gt 2 lt sup gt lt br gt In this case the kinetic energy is lt br gt 1 2 mass S velocity lt sup gt 2 lt sup gt or Sans qu 1 3 editing use
346. nswer units showUnits true grading exact_sigd digit 3 mode Numeric name 2 70 exactly 3 significant digits editing useHTML ke fo g K NNNNNNNN eeeeeeee Z R This question grades correct the response 2 70 but grades incorrect equal values responses with a different number of trailing zeros for example 2 7 and 2 700 Ensure that lt n gt is greater than or equal to the number of digits in the correct answer the value in the an swer num field Otherwise all student responses are graded incorrect Ifthe correct answer is dimensionless and you set showUnits true the system displays the question with a Units text field Example 2 3 To specify an absolute margin of error use grading toler_abs and err lt tolerance gt where lt tolerance gt is a floating point number This question grades correct any answer within 0 001 of 3 14159 question Estimate pi to at least 3 decimal places answer num 3 14159 answer units showUnits false grading toler abs err 0 001 mode Numeric anaana 288 12 Plain Text Script Authoring qu 2 3 name Pi 0 001 qu 2 3 editing useHTML Example 2 4 To specify a precision and an absolute margin of error as a value in a significant digit use grading toler_sigd di git lt n gt and err lt tolerance gt where lt n gt is a positive integer specifying the number of significant digits required and lt tolerance
347. nt in the script file qu x topic lt topic_name gt e xis the topic number The other statements in a question script file define questions Each question consists of a series of related statements all containing the same prefix which indicates the topic and question numbers They are of the form qu x y lt field_name gt lt data gt e xis the topic number e y is the number of the question within the topic Each question has a number of fields that specify for example the text of the question the correct answer additional comments displayed when graded and hints Some fields are required others are optional e Question fields are populated with data that can span several lines of text The end of each data field statement must be marked with an character Questions and topics must be numbered consecutively and arranged in increasing order That is x starts at 1 and y starts at 1 for each new topic See Also Question Fields page 122 Question Modes Question Types page 124 120 e 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Opening a Saved Question Bank File While editing a question bank it is recommended that you back up your work by exporting it to your hard drive You can upload the saved question bank file plain text script file and then continue editing or save it in your class web site To open a question bank file that is saved on your hard drive 1 In the Question Repository page select the Qu
348. nterprets it For example the following formula is acceptable x 2 2x 1 2sin x x 2 1 e x 2 Note If a product includes one or more variables always use an asterisk For example specify 2 x y or 2 A For a Maple question you must always include an asterisk x 42 2 x 1 2 sin x x 2 1 e x 2 The most common mistake is to forget parentheses For example the expression 1 x 1 is different from 1 x 1 which the system interprets as 41 x Alternatively you can use MathML expressions which are supported for both display and content within the system Variable Names You can use any letter for a variable name Note The grading system is case sensitive with respect to variable names So if the correct answer is t 1 2 then the response T42 2T 1 is graded wrong but t 2 2t 1 is correct 10 3 Understanding the Math Capabilities in the System 181 Note Be certain that the case of letters like x and X or v and V in answers match the case of the variables in questions Operator and Function Syntax For multiplication use an asterisk Alternatively simply write e Two letters with a space for example x y e A letter and a number with or without a space for example 2x or 2 x Note that two letters without a space represents a single variable name e For Maple graded questions you must include an asterisk for example 2 x and n
349. ntial function exp Calculates the value of e to power of x where e is the base of the natural logarithm 2 718281828 Note The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Maple Syntax page 143 10 10 Using a Table of Units Default Table of Physical Unit Equivalents The system recognizes many but not all units To use equivalent units that are not recognized create a custom table of units for your question bank 206 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions The following tables give the default units recognized by the system Unit Definition Name Base Units m meter s second kg kilogram amp kelvin Derived Units ng 10 9 g nanogram ug 106g microgram mg 10 3 g milligram g 0 001kg gram Mg 10 6 g megagram Ib 453 59237 g pounds Avoirdupois Ibs Ib pounds Avoirdupois oz MN 6 lb ounces Avoirdupois deg Pi180 degree degree Pi180 degree degrees Pi180 degree rad 1 radian radian 1 radian radians 1 radian nm 10 9 m nanometer um 10 6 m micrometer mm 10 3 m millimeter km 10 3 m kilometer Mm 10 6 m megameter meter m meter meters m meter cm 0 01 m centimeter centimeter jcm centimeter centimeters cm centimeter ft m 0 3048 foot foot ft foot feet ft foot
350. number of the correct answer For information on setting a margin of error for a numeric question in the Question Editor see Setting Answer Tol erance in Numeric Questions page 86 For information on setting a margin of error for other question types see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 For related plain text script file examples see Answer Tolerance Example Script page 285 Note It is recommended that you develop a policy for the tolerance in responses at the beginning of a project so that every numeric question uses similar policies See Also Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions page 215 Isu n x page 226 184 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions decimal n x sig n x int x page 223 Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions Note Use the Question Editor s on screen dialog boxes for setting the margin of error in numeric and numeric with unit questions For more information see Setting Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 85 For an introduction to the concept of margin of error see Controlling Answer Tolerance page 183 The exact answer is not always required In Maple T A you can specify a margin of error within which student re sponses are graded correct for any mathematical question type You can specify a margin of error for answers that are static or defined using algorithmic variables Use in the a
351. o questions or assignment content in the parent class automatically update those questions or assignments in your child class This is not true about polices changes to assignment policies are not inherited You control the assignment policies for an assignment that you inherit from a parent class See Also Sharing Questions page 117 Shared Class Content Updates The following applies to changes you make to inherited questions whether you make changes to them individually using the Question Editor or if you use course modules to make global changes that affect inherited questions Editing Inherited Content or Installing Replacement Content with the Same Name If you install a course module that has a new version of a question or assignment with the same name as that in the parent class you break the link to the parent class version of the question or assignment The same rule applies if you edit a parent question or assignment and then save install it using the original name of the parent class If you want to refresh the content of your class to match that in the parent class or restore the link to the parent class version of the content you must save your new edited question or assignment under a different name or delete the edited modified version of the question or assignment The parent class restores the matching original question as signment automatically Implications If you modify questions or assignments that you in
352. o see how the question is graded Click edit to continue refining the question if necessary 8 5 The Question Editor 77 To edit a question 1 In the Question Repository search for the question 2 In the right pane click the Edit icon 4 beside the question 3 Click the Edit button 4 Make your changes to the question 5 Click Finish to save your changes Cloning Questions To add a question that is similar to an existing question in the repository you can save time by cloning the existing question and then editing the clone To clone a question 1 In the Question Repository find the question you want to clone 2 Click the clone icon 4 beside the question The question has now been cloned and the clone can now be edited See Also Sharing Questions page 117 Avoiding System Time outs during Authoring Sessions While you are working on a question the system client holds your changes to the working copy of the active question While authoring or editing a question if you click Finish the system places a copy of your question in the class web site cache If you do not interact with the system for about 30 minutes the system logs you out of your session and purges the question data losing any changes that have not been added to the web site cache When you log in you revert to the cached version of your question If the system server is restarted the cache is purged You revert to the last installed
353. oad or browse files you have already uploaded to your class web site Click the Browse button in the Question Editor Follow instructions in Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site Entering the path and image name populates the Enter the URL of an Image field c When you have located and identified the URL for your graphic image enter the text of the question and select Next 4 On the Define Correct Regions screen use the system s graphics tools to define the regions of the correct answer and any other responses 94 e 8 Authoring Methods for Questions a Define the approximate region of the correct answer Select New Region to engage the define tool and click one corner of your answer target Insert additional outlying points with mouse clicks and drag the connector lines to shape the final highlighted region Note The define tool essentially works like a peg board with rubber bands Place the pegs with a click of the mouse then click and drag the connecting lines while the system paints the interior of the shape you have created b When you are satisfied with the shape of the region you have defined click Set Correct to identify it as the correct response The system highlights the correct answer region in red c Use New Region to define additional regions When you have completed each individual region select New Region to disengage the define tool Note You can use Delete to clear i
354. odes devecdee essen 62 Course Module Creation and Shared Class Inheritance of Questions and Assignments 0 0eee ees 63 5 3 Exporting a Course Module i cccis6 cccsies recen oeei teeceuetd ee ocean EEE EEEE at oegeat EEE E 64 5 4 Importing and Installing a Course Module cccc cece cece ecceeeceeeee seen cece eeceeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeegaes 64 Requirements eiiiai ea Ban cedaae voces EAT E E AU cee el ee E ac ended vee E EEEE 65 Additional Notes siemenen eena e a tinea sheen A a A A Sek A cot ATE ERA sin 65 Course Module Installation and Shared Class Inheritance of Questions and Assignments 6 06 65 5 5 Viewing Details of a Course Module 2 2 00 cc cece cece cece cece cece cece ee ee eee ence eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee essa eeseegeeaeeeaeees 66 5 6 Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module cccccecce cece eeceeeceeece cece eee eeaeeeaeeeaneenaes 66 Addinig Course Module Content sissa an aenea a Wen EET E EENE EEA EE E ESER 66 Deleting Course Module Contents sessie ioie ei EE EEEE EE EE iaa 66 Why Delete Only Part of a Course Module cccecceecc ence ence ence eeeeeeee seca eese cece esse eee eeeeeenereneeenenies 66 5 7 Deleting a Course Module sssr rovere enep ee cence es es cede oc aa Epa E ca eege a vided EE A EEE 67 5 8 Relative Web References in Course Modules cecceeeeceeececeeeceueeeeeeeceaaeeeeueceeaeeeeaueeeeeeeeaeseeaeees 67 6 Administering M
355. oes not require proctor authorization It records student session results in the class Gradebook To change the assignment mode select one of the other options under Type of Assignment in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor For information on each assignment type see e Anonymous Practice Assignments page 35 e Homework or Quiz Assignments page 34 Proctored Exams page 35 Mastery Assignments page 36 Study Session Assignments page 37 Note If you select Mastery dialog assignment you should proceed to the Mastery Policies page to specify the criteria for your assignment 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor 43 Setting Mastery Policies If you select the Mastery type for the Assignment you can set learning objectives or competency levels that must be met before a student is allowed to proceed with the assignment To establish policies for your assignment 1 In the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor click the Edit mastery policies link below the Mastery dialog option The Set Policies Mastery Policies screen opens See Figure 3 12 2 Use the drop down fields to establish rules The field text provides guidelines Penalties apply to the selected topic and also to any preceding or controlling topics on which the selected topic depends The system returns students to the earlier topics where a learning need has been demonstrated until they reach your required level of competen
356. on capabilities you must use appropriate variable definitions data ranges parameters and other limiting conditions for each variable e Maple T A is automatically configured to recognize equivalent responses for numeric algebraic and numeric with unit dimension student responses however you can provide a question bank specific table of equivalent units or expressions as well See Also Question Types Available in the System page 131 Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers page 212 Controlling Display of Numbers within Questions page 239 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 Default Table of Physical Unit Equivalents page 205 8 5 The Question Editor Creating a New Question or Editing an Existing Question The Question Editor allows you to e Create questions e Edit existing questions e Add algorithms hints comments feedback solutions and information fields to questions To create a question 1 In the Question Repository page select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 Enter the content of your question See Question Authoring in the Question Editor page 92 3 Once you have completed the question click Finish 4 Choose the groups if any that you wish the question to belong to and click Submit 5 A preview of the question is displayed Provide an answer and click Grade t
357. on required Yes display can contain variables The question statement Can contain any com bination of text Math ML HTML tables or references to images or objects algorithm optional No internal directive Contains variable definitions for use in the question Must conform to the system formula and variable syntax answer required except in essay No internal directive Defines correct answer matching and Maple for use in grading If graded questions mathematical question must conform to the system math formula syntax 8 9 Question Banks e 123 qu x y Required or optional Can include Field Type Description Func HTML or tion lt field name gt MathML answer number required in numeric No internal directive Defines correct number A questions and units of answers in answer unit numeric questions maple required in Maple graded No internal directive Maple code to grade questions student responses and prevent cheating plot optional No internal directive Maple plot command grading optional internal directive that plots a student re sponse or related func tion Available in all Maple graded ques tions Defines grading mode in numeric questions Required in numeric questions units optional internal directive Reference to a custom ized table of units digit optional internal directive Number of significant digits
358. only exception is that when used to define a blank inside a Question Designer question any of the above question types may omit the question field because this is actually defined inline in the body of the larger question statement The Question Designer question type is a shell that is internally consistent with other questions Numeric blanks inside Question Designer questions for example will grade the same as single part numeric questions because the grading is actually done by the numeric question itself Likewise each embedded question type inside a Question Designer question supports all the features offered with that individual question type for example margin of error significant figures and tolerance Note The Question Designer question type supersedes the Inline question type See Also Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions page 298 9 16 Question Designer Questions 167 List Questions page 160 Authoring with the Question Designer The Question Designer is a powerful and flexible question container that can hold one or more graded answer regions or Response Areas A variety of grading behaviors can be combined and placed anywhere within the formatted html that defines the question For example questions can be placed inside tables formatted text bulleted lists and can include embedded images or media objects In addition to flexible question and response areas it provides an envir
359. onment similar to a word processor See Fig ure 9 11 Apply character formats such as bold italics and fonts using toolbar buttons You can insert images tables or links to other file resources When you are satisfied with the appearance of the question insert answer regions and then apply grading and other behaviors Text of the question BA la ti E AiB 7 U mje x e Aia ae Font gt Size X Figure 9 11 Question Designer Screen Features Questions authored in the Question Designer can contain e Any number of answer regions Parts of your question can require text numeric or formula answers while other parts can require multiple choice essay answers all in a single question e Standard HTML elements You can include character formatting HTML tables embedded images and media objects e Any number of images tables algorithmic variables and inline math expressions as required From the Question Designer screen you can view add or edit feedback algorithm information hint and solution fields Feedback Algorithm Solution Figure 9 12 Tabs for Specifying Feedback Algorithms and Additional Question Info 168 9 Question Types See Also Question Types and Properties page 169 Edit Insert Response Area page 170 Formatting Tips The Question Designer makes it easy to apply formatting to your question in many of the same ways you use your word processor There ar
360. ons restricting entry 279 Trigonometric Functions 204 True or False Questions 124 177 Creating 105 LaTeX 258 Script file example 300 Tutorial Algorithmic question 241 Basic Gradebook Searches 50 Formatting integers 214 List based variables 243 Maple based algorithmic variables 245 Margin of tolerance 215 Matrix questions 107 Multipart questions 112 Providing answers 213 Using the Assignment Editor 26 Types Comparison Table 132 Unevaluated forms 143 204 Ungraded Essay Questions 155 Unicode HTML 130 Units 132 139 146 179 183 184 Equivalents 205 nlocking class registration 10 nordered List 124 133 Formulas 145 ploading individual reference files 87 multiple reference files 87 Saved Question Bank File 120 ploading multiple files 18 ploading single files 18 RL Class Homepage 4 Use HTML 168 User manager register students 12 Registering students 10 User Manager LDAP 72 ser Roles 1 sername 71 mE gag aqa sing epsfig 262 sing Algorithms 265 sing Formula Syntax 188 sing Hints 128 sing Images File naming rules 87 sing Information Fields 128 sing Script Files Author Questions 283 Using Scripts 291 Create Multipart Questions 295 Create Multiple Choice Questions 296 Create Multiple Selection Questions 296 Create Short Answer Questions 300 Feedback in Maple Question 294 V Variable 133 134 180 217 219 228 233 Display 239 Names 221
361. oose the method that makes the most sense for you e When an instructor inherits or shadows a public question the instructor should expect it to be modified by the question owner at any time without notice However the question is likely to be a valid question with all resources images etc in place e When an instructor clones a question the instructor becomes the full owner of the clone and can be certain that it will not be edited by anyone else However there is a danger of losing resources images etc because the cloning process does not copy the resource files to the class web site therefore it is possible that the resources files may be deleted by the original author at any time 118 8 Authoring Methods for Questions To share a question 1 In the Question Repository find the question you wish to share 2 Click the share icon 6 located beside the question in the right panel of the question repository screen This method works well when you are sharing a limited number of questions Other methods for sharing content include using question banks and course modules and making your class a feature class To shadow a question 1 In the Question Repository select Public Questions 2 Use the search methods to find the public questions you wish to use 3 Add the question to one or more of your question groups by clicking the modify icon 8 beside the question Or select the check boxes beside the questions you
362. or each question Under Feedback select from Always If correct If incorrect or Never condition options for displaying the correct answer and question comment You can edit the grading message and feedback messages if you would like to use custom messages instead of the default messages Receiving Email Notification You can opt to receive an email whenever a student completes the assignment in Homework and Proctored Exam mode giving the name of the student and their grade To receive email notification select the Send email reports to check box and enter your email address Restricting Feedback You can restrict feedback so that feedback details are not displayed until a certain date Check the Restrict Feedback check box and click the calendar icon to choose a date See Also Security Issues to Consider page 69 Configuring Assignment Properties Assignment properties are configured in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor These include e Setting a Passing Score page 44 Setting a time limit page 45 Setting questions per page page 45 Setting the Maximum Number of Attempts page 45 Setting a Passing Score If you select the Practice Homework or Proctored Exam assignment types you can set a Passing score for the as signment If you set a score the system assesses each try at the assignment as either Pass or Fail and records this in formation in the Gradebook automatically The field shows the total
363. or example plotmaple plot3d sin x y x Pi Pi y 1 1 lightmodel light1 The options described below are supported Table 10 15 Option for 3 D Plots Option Description ambientlight r g b This option sets the red green and blue intensity of the ambient light for user defined lighting The values of r g and b must be numeric in the range 0 to 1 axes f This option specifies how the axes are to be drawn where f is one of boxed nor mal frame or none The default value is none The value can be in lowercase or uppercase color c or colour c This option defines a color value or function Note that color specification takes precedence over shading specification regardless of the order of the options in the command contours n This option specifies the number of contours or a list of contour values where n is a positive integer or a list of contour values The default value is 10 coords c This option specifies the coordinate system to be used The default is Cartesian filled truefalse If the filled option is set to true the region between the surface and the xy plane is displayed as solid This option is valid only with the following commands plot3d contourplot3d and listcontplot3d grid m n This option specifies the dimensions of a rectangular grid on which the points are generated equally spaced gridstyle x This option specifies a grid x as either rectang
364. order Students must select all correct answers to get full credit Otherwise the score is calculated using a formula that takes into account the number of correct and incorrect answers Numeric A numeric question compares a student s response to a given number with or without units You can require the student response to a certain precision or within a certain margin of error Palette A palette question enables you to program a customized palette of symbols for the entry of student responses Question Designer A Question Designer question is created through the Question Editor The Question Designer is a powerful and flexible question container that can hold multiple response areas The response areas are answer 131 132 9 Question Types regions supporting various question types all in a single question The Question Designer also provides a flexible layout environment making it easy to include images tables and so on in your question True or false A true or false question is treated as a class of multiple choice question featuring only two choices You can include a Maple plot in any question type including nonmathematical question types For more information see Plotting Using Maple page 201 For a complete list of question types nonmathematical and mathematical see Question Modes Question Types page 124 9 2 Math Question Types Math Question Types Overview Basic Question Types The f
365. ore _ Arrows in Equations Use the text gt lt lt gt for arrows 136 9 Question Types Expression Keys Other Operators Use for the center dot operator Use the sign in equations Use the sign to indicate ion charges No other operations are allowed in equations Physical States Be sure to include physical states in parentheses if your equation Ion charges and Parentheses requires them Use the and characters for polarity and ion charges Use parentheses to clarify interpretation of groups of characters See Also Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 98 Entering Chemistry Expressions page 186 Constants of Integration Questions Question Mode Formula Mod C qu x y mode Formula Mod C In the Formula Mod C question type student responses require a formula that matches the correct answer to within an additive constant C This type is designed for indefinite integration problems in which the answers differ by a constant of integration Do not include the constant in the correct answer In a test a note telling the student they do not need to include the constant of integration appears after the input field as shown in Figure 9 1 Evaluate fox H 5x 4xdx fi 274 IFW 272 This question accepts numbers or formulas Do not include a constant of integration in your answer Help Change Entry Style Preview Fi
366. orial Algorithmic Question page 241 e List based variables You can randomly select a set of data from lists and present to students a scenario with related variables For example you can create an astronomy question that randomly selects a planet in our solar system and then automatically assigns the acceleration due to gravity at the planet s surface to the answer variable See the tutorial on this topic Tutorial List based Variables page 242 You can use more than one type of variable in a question You can use any combination You can place conditions on variables For example you can specify that the value of a variable not exceed that of another Note You can create or edit variables and algorithmically generated data using the Algorithm Designer in the Question Editor Alternatively you can create questions without variable data using the Question Editor and then export the plain text script file with the file extension qu to your hard drive Add variables by editing the questions directly in your text or HTML editor See Also Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 221 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 233 The Algorithm Designer page 80 Using Script Files to Author Questions page 283 Functions within Algorithms Algorithmic definitions of variables are of the form qu x y algorithm variablel expression variable2 expression The use of the s
367. orkiQuiz Unlimited 2207 0 4 fv SAI ROS n z 3 0 HomeworkQuiz Unlimited 2 19 07 0 __ edit copy delete hide print summary 5 fq mastentest 17 0 Mastery Unlimited 29 07 0 6 y 1 0 Homework Quiz Unlimited 211 9 07 0 Figure 3 2 Options in the Assignment Editor From the list of assignments in the Assignment Editor you can modify and manage existing assignments To view the options hover your mouse over the assignment name The option buttons are displayed Edit assignments by clicking edit e Copy assignments by clicking copy e Delete assignments by clicking delete The delete option is not available for shared assignments e Hide assignments from student view in the Class Homepage by clicking hide Print assignments Clicking print displays the print preview of the assignment You then have the option to Print the assignment or click the Back button to return to the Assignment Editor e View a summary of the assignment by clicking summary e Force grade a locked assignment by clicking force grade The force grade option is only available for locked assignments Adding New Assignments To add a new assignment 1 In the Assignment Editor click the New button to create a new assignment The Assignment Editor screen is displayed with the Choose Name tab active 2 Follow the instructions in Overview Using the Assignment Editor page 26 Copying Assignments To copy an assignment 1 ND vn A W N
368. orming a basic gradebook search you can click any grade in the search results to view the detailed results for that assignment attempt The student assignment details report shows a summary of the results for this assignment attempt including the student s score out of the total points the session start and end times and duration A summary for student is also shown with the number of completed in progress and passed assignments for the student along with the number of assignments that need to be reviewed In the Student Assignment Details view you can e View the student s response for each question As part of this you can view the instance of the question that the student received for algorithmic questions Add instructor comments e Update student grades if desired Changing Grades and Adding Comments From the Gradebook you can modify student grades if needed You can e Grade essay questions e Change a student s grade on an individual question e Leave comments for the student on an individual question Changing Grades and Grading Essay Questions You might want to change a student s grade for several reasons e The system does not automatically grade essay questions so you must enter a grade for any essay questions included in your assignment If an assignment contains questions that have not yet been graded such as essay questions then an icon appears to the left of the score e You might choose to raise
369. ot 2x x y and not xy or x y and not x y which will be marked as incorrect For e Exponentiation use the caret Euler s Constant 2 718 use the letter e The exponential function is e x For Maple graded questions use the exp function exp 1 and exp x for e and e x e Scientific notation use the upper case letter E For example 0 078 is 7 8E 2 The trigonometric constant 3 141 use pi For Maple graded questions use Pi In the Equation Editor MathML Editor select Pi from the palette Common mathematical functions use the standard abbreviated names for example sin cos and tan The arguments of trigonometric functions remember they are measured in radians The square root function use sqrt x Alternatively use x 1 2 or x 0 5 In Text entry mode the square root function is sqrt x Alternatively you can enter x 1 2 or x 0 5 In the MathML Editor select the square root symbol from the palette The inverse trigonometric functions use the standard abbreviated names arcsin x arccos x and arctan x Note The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Editing with the Equation Editor page 188 Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 204 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 10 3 Understanding the Math Capabilities in the System The Maple T A system has powerful qu
370. ot all these options are available for all questions Inherited and shadowed questions cannot be edited deleted or shared However you can clone an inherited question to create a local editable copy of the question You can also perform operations on a set of selected questions using the buttons at the top of the search results The operations are Export Modify Groups Clone and Delete Export saves the selected questions to a question bank file qu file Organizing Questions in the Question Repository In the question repository questions are organized into groups You can add a new group rename a group add a child group or delete a group Note If you delete a group the questions in that group are no longer associated with a group To find such questions select Questions not in groups Deleting Questions from the Question Repository In the question repository you can delete a question To delete a question select the question and click Delete Alternatively click the ff icon beside your question To view the deleted questions in the Question Repository select My Deleted questions In addition to the standard actions there are these actions e Undelete e Permanently Delete e Cleanup 116 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Undelete restores the selected deleted questions The questions are restored to their original groups Permanently Delete removes the selected questions shown on the current page of the search
371. other advantage of the Blanks question type is that several blank macros can be included in a single question and different blank options can be mixed in a single question This makes the Blanks type powerful and flexible e Blanks must not appear in math mode A limited amount of error recovery exists For example x blank menu 0 1 2 converts correctly but x blank menu 0 1 2 8 and int_0 blank menu 1 2 x dx generate conversion errors Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 begin question Blanks qutext The Format blank menu correct choice other choices blank menu human canada goose garter snake housefly and blank menu chimpanzee emu frog electric blue hap are mammals end question begin question Blanks This question mixes the menu and formula options qutext The graph of the function f x x 3 2 is the same as the graph of g x x 2 shifted to the blank menu right left blank formula 3 units end question begin question Blanks This question uses randomized variables qutext The graph of the function f x var s1 var a x var h 2 var k is the same as the graph of 11 5 Basic Question Types in LaTeX 251 the function g x var s1 var a x 2 shifted blank menu to the left var h units to the right var h units up var h units down var h units and shifted blank men
372. our class web site use lt a href classes myclassurl subfolder filename gt where subfolder is the subfolder or subfolders specifying the subfolder path External Images or Reference Sources You can use any URL that points to a resource to reference provided the URL will be continuously available to you and your students However it is recommended that you use only images and references on your class web site For external resources enter the full URL Notes e File names can consist of only alphanumeric characters and a single period To include an image in a question comment hint or solution you must first upload the image file to the class web site on your server e Ifthe image is not uploaded to the class web site the question text appears with a lost image icon You cannot check the appearance and behavior of the question properly until you upload the files to your class web site e You can browse and tag images in your class web site during Clickable Image question creation or editing in the Question Editor Note If you upload a third party question you may need to edit the image reference URLs in the qu script file before installing it Also you must upload any image or reference files to your class web site See Also Questions with Plots page 148 Flash Movies and Java Applets in Questions You can use Flash movies or Java applets in questions The process is similar to using an image
373. out the URLs as follows Your questions will be scanned for URLs beginning with the following strings These references will be replaced with a system independent string that will make your module relocatable to classes on other servers When the CM is saved it replaces the source class specific URL information with relative references that are then localized upon reinstallation Typically you will not want to make changes to the system default behavior for URL replacements Click OK to continue The course module is prepared for download When prompted start the download A file download box will appear and the CM is saved to the default name Cm zip Note It is strongly recommended that you rename the CM replacing the default name Cm zip with a more mean ingful name When the file download save operation is complete you are returned to the main Course Modules screen 5 4 Importing and Installing a Course Module Note In the following discussion the term destination class refers to the class that you want to install the course module into and the term source class refers to the originating class for the CM contents To install a new course module into the destination class 1 6 Ensure that you have access to the saved course module from the source class on your hard drive a network drive or an Internet resource Click the Import button in the Course Modules screen To select a course module click Browse
374. ows you to edit existing assignments Editing Assignments page 25 Copy Allows you to copy existing assignments Copying Assignments page 23 21 22 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Options in the Assignment Editor main window Uses Delete Allows you to erase existing assignments Deleting Assignments page 24 Hide Show Allows you to hide the assignment from student view in the Class Homepage Assignment Visibility page 46 Print Generates a version of your test that is suitable for printing and distributing to students as a pencil and paper assignment Printing Assignments page 26 Summary Allows you to view a summary of the assignment properties Force Grade Allows you to force grading of an active assignment Forced Grading page 59 Drop down Arrow Use to sequence your assignment list Controlling the Sequence of Listed Assignments page 26 Shared Content Icon P Indicates the assignment is an inherited assignment Appears next to an assign ment in the list when the assignment originates in the parent class from which your class was created Adding New Assignments page 23 See also Shared Classes Overview page 13 E Locked Assignment Icon Indicates the assignment is locked because there is an active version of the as signment a student has started but not finished the assignment Warnings and Locking Mechanism
375. p of questions a Select questions using the check boxes b Enter a name for the Group name and click the Add as Group button Adding questions in question groups provides you with the added option of having the system select from within the questions at random according to the criteria you specify for example choosing three of seven questions from the group each time a new assignment is created for a student When assigning question weighting for a question group you set a single point value that controls the weighting of all questions drawn from the group See Figure 3 4 5 Optional e Change the default question weighting one point per question to match your requirements e Select the check box to scramble the sequence of question delivery when assignments are created e Reorder questions within your assignment e Merge individual selected questions to form new question groups in your assignment e Include annotations along with individual questions in your assignment Delete Merge UnMerge oO Scramble questions o Points E 1m gt Set1 1 m Randomly pick 3 of 5 questions in this group O 2 Solving Using the Quadratic Formula 2 bx d Laie F 3 al Solving Using the Quadratic Formula ax 2 be c Total Points 5 Total Questions 5 Figure 3 4 Select Questions Specify Order and Weighting of Questions When you have completed these steps proceed to Step 3 Setting Policies 30
376. pKa sort by matching editing useHTML P algorithm a switch rint 4 lt img src classes myclass pka pka01a01 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka01a02 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka01a03 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka01la04 gif gt b switch rint 4 lt img src classes myclass pka pka02a01 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka02a02 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka02a03 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka02a04 gif gt Sc switch rint 5 lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a01 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a02 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a03 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a04 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a05 gif gt d switch rint 6 age 162 9 Question Types lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a01 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a02 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a03 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a04 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a05 gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a06 gif gt Se switch rint 2 lt img src classes myclass pka pka05a01 gif gt classes myclass pka pka05a02 gif gt A 5 Q a B Q i term 4 def 1 d term 5 5 highest pKa Least acidic term 5 def 1 Se qu
377. part part part part _part 5 credit 1 1 0 part 6 grader exact part 6 editing useHTML _part 6 answer 4 Sir Isaac Newton part 6 question xx part 6 answer 3 Johannes Kepler part 6 answer 2 Stephen Hawking _part 6 answer 1 Albert Einstein part 6 mode List part 6 display menu _part 6 credit 4 0 0 part 6 credit 3 0 0 part 6 credit 2 0 5 _part 6 credit 1 1 0 1 1 algorithm n int rint 20 2 n2 n 1 qu 1 1 question lt p gt This single question demonstrates the power and flexibility of the inline question type There are 6 individual response cells included each of which requires a different type of student response lt p gt aggaaagaggaaaaaaaaagaadaaaaa lt p gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt lt b gt Notes lt b gt lt br gt Response cells can appear anywhere within the formatted question statement including within tables lt br gt Response cells can consist of any individual question mode including response cells that handle text lenient or stringent string matching numbers formulas or any other question variety lt br gt Partial credit can be allowed for exact graded text or menu style entry cells lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt Here is a question using a lt b gt symbolic formula lt b gt blank lt br gt Let lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt l
378. part of a multipart or question designer question the question score is multiplied by the question part weighting to determine the grade for the question Question part weighting is set in the question definition See Also Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 284 Multiple Selection Questions in the Question Editor page 101 9 15 Palette Questions 165 Multiple Selection Question Example Script page 296 9 15 Palette Questions Question Mode palette qu x y mode palette Palette questions enable you to create your own customized palette for student response entries e Before creating a new palette definition you should get familiar with the Equation Editor requirements and syntax e To add a new palette definition you need to create a question bank in plain text script format and add the toolbar definition at the beginning of the file using the qu env palette toolbarname structure see below You can add one or more toolbar definitions at a time You can add one or more palette entries to a toolbar definition e After importing the question bank you will add a palette question using the Question Editor and select from the list of available palettes you created in the Palette Style drop down menu Note Palette questions should only be created using the Question Editor Palette questions work by using an Equation Editor to generate Presentation MathML for the student response and compare it wit
379. ple Script comment Try again editing useHTML algorithm Sa int rand 3 100 b int rand 3 100 gcd maple gcd a b 1 question What is the greatest common divisor of a and b 1 maple evalb S RESPONSE SANSWER 0 1 maple_answer gcd a b 1 type formula 1 mode Maple 1 allow2d 1 sE 1 1 AGAGA See Also The Algorithm Designer page 80 Maple Syntax Question Example Script The following example script creates a Maple graded question using the Syntax subtype and using the text entry student response area qu 1 topic Maple Syntax Question Example Script qu 1 1 question What is the Maple syntax for the derivative of x 2 with respect to x Do not include the trailing semicolon 1 1 maple evalb S RESPONSE diff x 2 x or evalb SRESPONSE Diff x 2 x 1 1 type maple 1 1 mode Maple 1 1 allow2d 0 1 1 comment The correct answer is diff x 2 x 1 1 name Derivative Maple Syntax 1 1 editing useHTML a aag agag 1 2 question What is the Maple syntax for the integral of 2 x with respect to x Do not include the trailing semicolon 1 2 maple evalb RESPONSE int 2 x x or evalb RESPONSE Int 2 x x 1 2 type maple 1 2 mode Maple 1 1 allow2d 0 ray N comment The correct answer is int 2 x x name Integral Maple Syntax 1 2 editing useHTML aga agag To return feedback to a student if the response is incorrect you must use
380. plet Question 2 editing useHTML 152 9 Question Types Applet Question Authoring There are three steps to creating an Applet Question Steps 1 and 2 require some familiarity with Java programming 1 Create and deploy the Java applet 2 Create and deploy a Java class grading 3 Author the question Step 1 Create and Deploy a Java Applet The applet is required to do three things 4 Provide a getResponse method which can be queried to find the current student response 5 Call method getParameter response to read the response parameter for a string containing any previous attempt at a response to this question and initialize the applet to display that state 6 Call method getParameter locked to read the locked parameter and disable user modifications if the flag is set You can also make additional getParameter paramName values to read any additional parameters for initialization These are passed to the param fields in the question see Step 3 After creating the applet place it in the applets directory or an appropriate subdirectory if packages are used on the Maple T A server Step 2 Create and Deploy a Java Class for Grading This is a server side grader module that accepts the student response as prepared by the applet and compares it against the correct answer you will set in Step 3 Your grader class should implement three methods 7 An init String paramName String paramValue method with void r
381. pression enclosed parentheses e Maple code to create plot enclosed in quotes e Closing semicolon e width optional specifies plot width height optional specifies plot height e libname optional specifies path to Maple libraries To use multiple libraries place all libraries in the same directory and specify the path using the libname option See Also plotmaple text page 227 Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 244 204 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions 10 9 Mathematical Functions amp Operations The following tables provide a reference of mathematical functions constants and operators Table 10 5 contains general functions and numbers that can be used for both Maple T A and Maple questions Table 10 6 provides the function names for Maple T A and Maple questions for the hyperbolic and inverse hyper bolic functions Note that Maple T A and Maple use different notation for these functions Table 10 7 contains exclusive Maple notation For a complete list of Maple functions refer to Maple documentation Some Maple commands take unevaluated forms For a discussion on student use of unevaluated forms see Maple Syntax page 143 Table 10 5 Mathematical Functions and Operators Arithmetic Trigonometric Functions
382. ptive plotting where necessary subdivides these intervals to attempt to get a better representation of the function This subsampling can be turned off by setting the adaptive option to false By default this option is set to true and intervals are subdivided at most 6 times in trying to improve the plot By setting this option to a non negative integer you can control the maximum number of times that subintervals are divided axes f Specifies the type of axes one of boxed frame none or normal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase color n or colour n Allows the user to specify the color of the curves to be plotted coords lt name gt Indicates that a parametric plot is in the coordinate system specified by lt co ord_name gt discont s Setting s to true forces plot to call the function discont first to determine the dis continuities of the input or fdiscont if discont fails or if the input is not an expres sion and then breaks the horizontal axis into appropriate intervals where the ex pression is either continuous or contains only removable discontinuities 236 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Option Description filled truefalse If the filled option is set to true the area between the curve and the x axis is given a solid color This option is valid only with the following commands plot con tourplot implicitplot listcontplot polarplot and semilogplot labels x y
383. question Example 5 begin question Formula This question uses randomized variables qutext Find the formula for the inverse of the function f x var a xt var b answer x var b var a code Sa int rint 9 2 b int rint 9 2 The above code chooses random integer coefficients a and b between 2 and 10 end question Maple graded Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Maple The Maple question type allows you to create questions that are graded using Maple code Specify the grading code in the maple field For information about grading questions using Maple code see Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 273 Note Because student responses are graded by Maple there is no answer field The Maple question type has two subtypes Maple Formula page 273 e Maple Syntax page 273 Maple Formula Using the Maple Formula subtype type formula you can create formula questions A student can use Maple T A syntax which is converted to Maple syntax before passing the response to Maple for grading For more information see Maple Formula Example 1 begin question Maple qutext What is the derivative of x 2 type formula to allow the student to enter 2x allow2d 1 maple diff x 2 x end question Maple Syntax Using the Maple Syntax subtype you can create general questions All stud
384. questions very specifically You must set the value of each component part at the time of question creation See Multipart Questions in the Question Editor page 100 Maple graded Questions allow you to specify partial credit for certain answers See Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Many related approaches offer instructional advantages e Using Question Groups within assignments e Controlling Question Weighting within assignments e Using Mastery Mode assignments 28 3 Creating and Managing Assignments 3 2 Tutorial Using the Assignment Editor Assignment Editor Step 1 Choose a Name for the Assignment To name your assignment 1 In the Choose Name tab enter an appropriate assignment name for your assignment in the Choose A Name For Your Assignment field The assignment name is displayed to students on the Class Homepage 2 Optional To add assignment level page headers and text for the results page click the Advanced button Proceed to Step 2 Select Questions Assignment Editor Step 2 Select Questions In the Select Questions tab of the Assignment Editor you can e Add questions individually e Select by search criteria e Select groups of items and add them all at once either as individual items or in pools or groups of questions 1 To add questions to an assignment select a source question group from the Question Group drop down list Question Group Select Question Group 44
385. r 3 4 If these values are required write the question so that they display properly e Write the code so that if the student answers incorrectly the correct answer appears in a standard form In general you must use strings as shown in the final example 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX The LaTeX authoring method is ideal for creating sophisticated math question content This method supports the fol lowing math question types Formula Formula Questions in LaTeX page 271 Blanks formula option Mathematical Fill in the Blanks formula option page 268 e Numeric Numeric Questions in LaTeX page 276 Maple graded Maple graded Questions in LaTeX page 272 Formula List Formula List Questions in LaTeX page 271 e Matrix Matrix Questions in LaTeX page 274 Dimensioned Formula Maple Formula page 273 Other Math Question Features e Graph plotting applet graph and multigraph macros e Including graphics image macro e Labeled graphics labelgraphic environment See Also Overview Authoring Methods for Question Banks page 73 Math Question Types Comparison Table page 133 Restricted Formula Restricted Formula Questions in LaTeX page 279 Formula mod C Constants of Integration Questions in LaTeX page 269 Equation Equation Questions in LaTeX page 270 Ntuple Coordinates of Points and Vectors Questions in LaTeX page 280 MultiFormu
386. r once familiar with the syntax you may prefer to use a text or HTML editor For more information on setting the precision and margin of error in the Question Editor see Setting Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 86 12 2 Library of Example Scripts 287 Example 2 1 To specify that the student response must exactly match the value of your answer use grading exact_value qu 2 topic Numeric Math Questions question Round 2 76789m to three significant digits answer num 2 77 answer units m showUnits true grading exact_value mode Numeric name 2 77m exact editing useHTML anaaga ag Notes This question grades correct the response 2 77m and equal valued responses with trailing zeros for example 2 770m and 2 7700m e To specify the answer assign the numeric component to answer num and the units to answer units e Ifyou set showUnits false the system does not display the Units text field in the question Example 2 2 To specify that the student response must exactly match the value of your answer and contain specified number of significant digits use grading exact_sigd and digit lt n gt where lt n gt is a positive integer that defines the required number of significant digits qu 2 2 question A person counts 162 cars driving up a street in 1 00 hour How many cars drive up the street per minute Use the correct number of significant digits in answer answer num 2 70 a
387. r restricted access repeated attempts and other options Students answer questions one at a time and the system records their responses between questions Jumping from question to question within an assignment is allowed until students complete all questions or choose to ignore the warnings to do so and submit their responses for automatic grading For Homework Quiz and Proctored Exam assignments individual student results are recorded in the Gradebook For a summary of assignment attributes see Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Assignment Attributes Assignment Type Graded Recorded in Hints Available Solution Avail Gradebook able Anonymous Prac yes no yes no tice Homework Quiz yes yes yes no Mastery yes yes yes no 34 e 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Assignment Type Graded Recorded in Hints Available Solution Avail Gradebook able Proctored Exams yes yes yes no Study Session yes no yes yes Homework or Quiz Assignments Description e Students are presented with an assignment consisting of any number of instructor selected questions e Questions are delivered either in an instructor specified or scrambled sequence Student responses during sessions are recorded but not graded after every question so assignment sessions can be interrupted and returned to upon next login By default homework or quiz assignments can be attempted mul
388. r outside the argument to qutext Note The setImageBase directive has a global effect on your document You can temporarily override the image base with ignoreImageBase This macro takes no arguments Its effect is local so upon leaving the current group or environment the image base will revert to its previous value Example begin question Clickable Image qutext Find the dog in the picture below ignoreImageBase use empty image base in this group begin clickableimage http www YourDomain com images pose gif 192 288 region 139 32 144 40 137 58 115 68 109 101 132 155 138 209 155 273 148 281 52 282 44 266 29 224 33 198 36 176 61 108 59 57 74 37 93 29 region 149 87 168 90 172 148 151 122 region 153 157 186 152 185 212 158 218 149 185 end clickableimage image base returns to original value end question 11 5 Basic Question Types in LaTeX 253 Free Response Text based Questions in LaTeX The system supports three varieties of open text response questions e Key Words Essay ungraded Blanks text Question Mode Key Words The key words question type is an open response question The answer field consists of a segment of text in which the keywords are marked by enclosing parentheses Any student response that includes all the words in parentheses is graded correct If the question is not answered correctly the full answer text excluding the parentheses is display
389. rds Student Account Management and Proctored Exams Instructor Password Security page 69 Student Account Tricks and How to Foil Them page 70 e Secure Proctored Exams page 70 Instructor Password Change your password often Never allow a student to see it The instructor password grants access to all the grades in your class and enables you to change grades Use caution when entering it in front of students Your password is stored on the server in plain text This means that the system administrator can read it Therefore do not use a password that cannot be disclosed to a third party When you log in the time of your last login is given under your user profile Check this every time to determine if there are any unaccounted logins Access your profile by clicking the My Profile link above the Logout link 69 70 e 6 Administering Maple T A Student Account Management 1 Some students will log in to an assignment once or twice and click Grade without attempting any questions to make a printout of the feedback Using this feedback they complete the assignment There are three main solutions e Restrict the number of retakes allowed For details see Setting the Maximum Number of Attempts page 45 e Set the feedback level to score only rather than giving out answers or solutions This approach penalizes the good students too For details see Configuring Feedback Options page 43 Ifyou are writing a
390. response in the text box It is graded using string matching rules For more information see Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 The menu type produces a drop down box containing the correct response and any number of incorrect re sponses The student selects a response from the drop down box To create a blanks formula question use scripts or LaTeX To create a fill in the blank question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Fill in the blanks b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d Click Next 3 On the Question Statement screen a In the text box enter the question statement including the correct answer s b Select the radio button Textboxes or Menus corresponding to the appropriate question presentation A text box fill in the blank question has a text field in which the student enters a response c Click Next 4 On the Question Blanks screen a Select the words to be replaced by blanks in the question e To designate a word as a blank click the dots on either side of the word e To designate a phrase adjacent words
391. ress See Also Assignment Instructions page 38 Text Instructions Shown Upon Grading page 38 42 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Configuring Question Weighting By default each new question in your assignment is added with a weight of 1 point per question To change the weighting of individual questions change the point value in the Points column for the question The total points at the bottom of the column automatically adjust as you change individual question weights Note The question score values you assign here apply only to Assessment style assignments such as Homework or Quiz Anonymous Practice and Proctored Exam Mastery and Study Session Assignments do not use these settings because they employ other ped agogical scoring models Scrambling Question Delivery To automatically scramble the sequence of questions delivered each time a new assignment is presented to a student select the Scramble Questions option within the Select Questions tab Note In the Review amp Finish tab question scrambling is referred to as Versioning This term is used because scrambling the sequence of question delivery produces multiple versions of assignments Using algorithmically generated questions within assign ments creates multiple versions of questions as well Set Policies Tab Setting Assignment Types Homework or Quiz is the system default assignment type It delivers an assessment style session that d
392. results Note A question that is referenced by an assignment or by test results will not be removed You must use the Assignment Editor to delete the reference to the question see Assignment Editor Step 2 Select Questions page 28 and then save the assignment see Assignment Editor Step 4 Review amp Finish page 32 Cleanup performs a full cleanup of the question repository for the current class The Cleanup action will e permanently delete all deleted questions permanently delete all unused old revisions of all questions including earlier versions of active questions Note A question that is referenced by an assignment or by test results will not be removed Previewing a Question 1 In the left frame of the Question Repository search for a question group or type of question 2 In the right frame in the search results click the preview icon beside the question In Preview Mode you can interact with the question as a student for example enter a response to the question in the input cells or use check boxes and radio buttons To test the grading of the question select Grade If the Show Assignments check box is selected you can also preview the entire assignment that contains the question To preview the assignment click the preview icon beside the assignment Exporting Work to Your Hard Drive You can back up questions by downloading them to your hard drive The questions are saved as a question file a p
393. return random integers rint n The rint n function generates a random integer in the range 0 n 1 inclusive There are n numbers in that range Hence it is a selection of one number from a choice of n rint m n The rint m n function generates a random integer in the range m n 1 inclusive rint m n k The rint m n k function generates a random integer in the range m m k m q k inclusive where q is the largest integer such that m q k lt n k That is rint n rint 0 n rint 0 n 1 Examples rint 3 returns 0 1 or 2 rint 1 3 returns 1 or 2 rint 0 7 3 returns 0 or 3 rint 0 8 3 returns 0 or 3 rint 0 9 3 returns 0 3 or 6 Note The range function returns random integers in the range 0 n inclusive See Also Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k page 229 rand m n rand m n k page 228 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 221 10 18 Functions and Arguments 231 Statistical Operations binomial n r Computes the rth binomial coefficient of degree n This corresponds to the number of ways of choosing r objects from a set of n ignoring order It is used in system performance statistics but is also available for use in internal directives algorithms and answers For example binomial 22 3 returns the coefficient of x in 1 or 1 540 erf z Computes the cumulative probability probability that a variate assumes a value less
394. rked solution c Click Next On the Question Statement amp Answer screen a Enter the text of your question statement in the Question Text field b Select the palette style to use from the Palette Style drop down menu This drop down menu lists all of the palette definitions you defined in step 1 c Enter the correct answer in the correct answer region d The default behavior for grading palette question student responses is to perform string matching on the palette created expression For details see Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 Note Palette questions should only be created using the Question Editor Palette questions use an Equation Editor to generate Presentation MathML for the student response and compare it with the Presentation MathML of the answer However because there are many ways of making Presentation MathML for the same marked up expression creating expressions outside the Equation Editor may generate unpredictable results e Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question See Also Palette Questions page 165 104 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Question Designer Questions in the Question Editor 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Question Designer b It is recommended
395. rmining the content questions rules and policies you publish an assignment to the class web site for use by students Students can review their results of any previously completed assignments Gradebook After students complete an assignment you can view the results in a Gradebook or create downloadable performance reports that can be viewed in third party gradebook programs or Microsoft Excel With Maple T A you can generate comprehensive performance reports for individual students individual class sections or multiple class sections You can also perform statistical item analysis of questions 1 3 Getting Started Creating a New Class in Maple T A Your first step is to log in to the Maple T A system using the username and password that your system administrator or course coordinator has provided Once you are logged into the system you can create a new class if you have suf ficient privileges You can upload a student roster or set open registration so that system users can enroll themselves in your class For details on creating a class see Creating a New Class page 7 Working with Questions and Assignments in Maple T A Question Repository With Maple T A you create self scoring assignments with questions drawn from the question repository The system s assignments can help automate common learning activities that involve questions and problems in classes such as practice and proctored exams tutorial sessions homewor
396. rnal grades 1 Create a text file in the specified format The first column identifies the users This can be login names email addresses or student IDs e The remaining columns provide assignment data Assignment data consists of the following in order the as signment name the total points the passing score and the student scores Save the file as a text file with fields delimited by comma or tab characters From the Class Homepage select the Gradebook menu and then select External Import Click Browse to find the text file containing the grade roster 2 3 4 Specify whether the file is comma separated or tab separated 5 Click Submit 6 Preview the imported data Click Save External to save the external assignments to the gradebook You can now view this data in the Gradebook 4 8 Forced Grading 59 Adding External Grades Individually To add an external assignment manually 1 From the Class Homepage select the Gradebook menu and then select External 2 Enter the assignment name total points and a passing score 3 For each student enter the score they received on the external assignment and add an optional comment 4 Click Save to save this data to the gradebook 5 Click Save amp Add Another to add another external assignment to the gradebook You can now view this data in the Gradebook Modifying External Assignment Grades You can modify an external assignment in the gradebook 1 I
397. roduces an image tag pointing to graphic gif in the setImageBase directory Sample 3 image graphic pct Does not place the file graphic pet in the dvi output In production processing it produces an image tag pointing to graphic pct in the setImageBase directory Notes e While the epsfig macro allows various options for example width image does not support any options Encapsulated Postscript files appear at full size in the dvi file 11 6 Advanced Question Types in LaTeX 263 e The conversion tools do not provide graphic conversion services You must use third party tools to produce web image files Example begin question True False qutext The following graph is the graph of a function newline True or False newline image graphic true end question Labeling Graphics in LaTeX Questions Labeled Graphics labelgraphic Environment The labelgraphic environment allows you to add text labels to graphics gif and jpg files To add text labels to graphics in your LaTeX question 1 Select a location in your Maple T A class web site for graphics files It is recommended that you use a distinct folder for the images in each question bank Upload the graphic to your class web site For information on uploading see Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site page 87 2 Insert the setImageBase directive near the top of your question bank TeX source file to specify the path to this location For
398. rrect and even incorrect but expected answers e For each specified answer you can control the amount of credit awarded for each specified answer e For each specified incorrect answer you can define response specific comments feedback e You can define the display style for the student response input cells either text or menu style display for student response objects entry cells e Graders can be set to exact or the more lenient relaxed style Summary of Question Behaviors Graders e default grader exact e option relaxed set grader relaxed e option regex set grader regex This provides access to the student response set as a regular expression for interacting with custom graders Input Display Style e default display textbox e option menu To change the order of menu entries set display permute false Sizing of Textbox Blanks e blanks sizing based on max of answer length Full and Partial Credit e at least one answer field must give full credit e all other answers can be set for credit from 0 1 specified in decimal numbers Grading Algorithm Grading is done by comparing the student response with each answer in order until a match is found and the corres ponding credit is then returned Ifno match is found the credit is zero The emphasis on comparing in order is necessary 9 11 Matching Questions 161 because someone writing regular expression questions might start with a very specific criteria
399. rse module elements into your destination class 7 The new course module appears in the list of available course modules for your class and all of the elements you selected appear in their respective areas throughout your class web site Questions are listed in the Question Repos itory assignments appear in the Assignment Editor and web resources are displayed in the Web Site Editor Requirements e Course modules are files with a zip extension e Ifyou attempt to upload a ZIP file that is not a CM the system generates the following error message and you must make another attempt This file does not appear to be course module it has no manifest file e Each server has a maximum file size setting for uploads that is established by your system administrator The system default setting is to allow uploads of up to 1 MB If your file upload repeatedly times out or if you receive a message informing you that your upload exceeds the server limit contact your system administrator Additional Notes The most common element that will be flagged as a duplicate is the base class web site folder web_folders This is a common default destination for many web resources however because it is a folder name established for every course you may already have saved your own resources to the class web site folder in the destination course If this is the case you can either e Create a new subfolder in your destination class web site and reinstal
400. rst then the second row etc The required size macro gives the size of the answer matrix The format is size m n where m is the number of rows and n is the number of columns e Maple Syntax questions can also be used for questions that will have a matrix response and provide more flexibility than the Matrix questions in question authoring and grading Example 1 begin question Matrix qutext Find the transpose of the matrix A left begin array ccc 1 amp 2 amp 3 0 amp 1 amp 2 end array right Specify the number of rows of the answer and then the number of columns size 3 2 Use a comma separated list starting with the first row answer 1 0 2 1 3 2 The answer is formatted for readability but this is not required end question Example 2 begin question Matrix This question uses randomized variables qutext Find the transpose of the matrix A left begin array ccc var a amp var b amp var c var d amp var e amp var f end array right size 3 2 answer var a var d var b var e var c var f code Sa int rint 19 9 b int rint 19 9 c int rint 19 9 d int rint 19 9 Se int rint 19 9 f int rint 19 9 The above code chooses six random integer coefficients a b c d e and f between 9 and 9 end question Multi Formula Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Multi Form
401. rt 10 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook then select Grade Reports 11 Click Load to view the report 12 In the View panel select data to include in the results and then refresh the view of the grade report In a grade report bonus assignments are indicated with the bonus icon qj 58 4 Working with the Gradebook Publishing a Grade Report for Students You can publish a grade report for student viewing To publish a grade report edit the grade report and select the Visible check box 4 6 Exporting Reports and Performance Data You can export data from any gradebook search or for any grade report you generate in the Gradebook Exported performance data files are in comma delimited CSV format and can be opened in a variety of applications for example Microsoft Excel and are easily imported into many third party gradebook programs To export data from the Gradebook 1 In the gradebook perform a search or load a grade report 2 Click Export to CSV to open or save as a comma delimited file 4 7 Adding an External Assignment You can add external assignment grades to your Maple T A gradebook There are two ways to add external grades by uploading a roster of grades or through the gradebook interface Adding External Grades using a Roster Grade rosters are an efficient way to add a large number of grades at once By uploading a file you can add multiple external assignments at once To upload exte
402. ry To change the question type after you click Finish you must edit the question source using the Edit Source facility Important It is not recommended that you change the question type for a finished question If you introduce a syntax error when changing the question type the question will be unusable Testing the Grading of a Question 1 Preview the question by clicking the hyperlink of the question in the left pane of the Question Editor 2 Enter a response to the question as if you were a student 3 Click Grade 4 The system grades the question and displays the result 5 Click OK to return to the Display Question screen If there is algorithmic variable data the random values are re generated when the question is re displayed 6 To check the form of the question with different algorithmic variable data values in the left panel click the question name repeatedly Each time you click the name the question is regenerated with new random values Setting Answer Format in Numeric Questions When working with Numeric questions in the Question Editor you can specify acceptable formatting for student responses See Figure 8 3 Specify input format Accept 1000 separator p epa Select the style of negative numbers you want to accept I Accept scientific notation 1234 0 or 1234 0 I Accept signs 1234 0 f 1234 0 Accept arithmetic Figure 8 3 Specify Acceptable Answer Format in a Num
403. s If you want to share not just your questions but also images and assignments that you have created based on those questions you should use course modules Once you create a course module you can send it to other instructors who can upload it into their classes and use it as is or alter it to better suit their needs Course modules can be uploaded to other installations of Maple T A not just the one at your institution To create a course module Log in as an instructor and click on the class that contains the content you want to share Click Content Manager then Course Modules Click New Select the content that you want included in the course module Click OK A A UU N e Enter a name for the module Optionally enter a description for any of the items you have included in the module Click OK The course module now appears in the list of course modules for your class To open a module you need to import it and install it To import a course module Log in as an instructor and click on the class in which you want to import the content Click Content Manager then Course Modules Click Import Click Browse to locate the course module file zip on your computer A A U N eR Click Import The system will display the content from the course module If there are items that use the same name as those in your class they will be highlighted in yellow on the upload screen 6 Select the check boxes beside
404. s Short Phrase Question Example Script page 300 True or False questions True or False Question Example Script page 300 To use an example script 1 Save the question definition as a text file with the extension qu 2 Import the text file Creating Algorithmic Graphic Labels To author questions with algorithmically generated labels in figures you must use LaTeX See Also Labeling Graphics in LaTeX Questions page 263 Algorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Example Script The following example script creates a mathematical Formula question that has algorithmically generated variable data 1 topic Formula Question Example Script 1 1 mode Formula 1 1 name lt b gt Traditional formula lt b gt 1 1 editing useHTML 1 1 algorithm int rint 20 2 eaaaas qu 1 1 question Let lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt math gt What is the derivative of lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt math gt with respect to lt math gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt math gt qu 1 1 answer n x n 1 See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Example Script The following example script creates a Multiple Selection question with algorithmically generated data 1 topic Multiple Selection Question Example Script 1 1 mode Multiple Selection 1 name lt
405. s and applies a modified exact grader designed to recognize and enforce superscripts and subscripts as well as the order of certain superscript and subscript operators Math Grader Rules Each of the Formula question varieties as well as the Numeric question type apply question specific grading rules and support methods for setting margin of error and tolerance and equivalent unit dimensions at the level of the question See Also List Questions page 160 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 Key Word or Phrase Questions page 160 Palette Questions page 165 Short Phrase Questions page 177 Setting Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 86 160 9 Question Types 9 9 Key Word or Phrase Questions Question Mode key words qu x y mode key words The key words or phrase questions search the student s response for specified key words or phrases but ignore other text This question type is not supported by the Question Editor in this release You must author key words questions using scripts or LaTeX See Also Key Word or Phrase Question Example Script page 291 Free Response Text based Questions in LaTeX page 253 9 10 List Questions List questions are similar to Blanks menu style and Blanks text style question types in terms of their application except they only allow you to set a single response object in the question They also offer a few major enhancements e You can define multiple co
406. s page 7 2 2 Manage Proctors You can add a proctor to your class to ensure security in exam settings Proctors can log in to their own computer and perform proctoring duties using the Proctor Tools utility Proctors can authorize students to start and grade a test To authorize students the proctor must verify the student s identity and then enter his or her password to allow the student to begin or to grade the test A proctor can enter his or her password at the student s workstation local authorization or authorize the student from his or her own computer remote authorization The benefit of using remote authorization is that the proctor does not need to enter his or her password in front of students When a student attempts a test that is proctored an Authorize screen is displayed This screen indicates that the student requires authorization Typically a proctor is physically present in the same computer lab during testing sessions For convenience when notified by the student proctors can authorize a student exam session from their own work station using the Proctor Tools screen and then inform the student See Figure 2 2 2 2 Manage Proctors 15 A MapleT A Calculus 101 Proctor Tools A Map Maplesoft System Homepage Class Homepage Proctor Tools Welcome Bo Connors My Profile Actions Help Logout v User Search search for students registered in this class First Name Last Name User Login Student ID Email Match
407. s with questions organized by topic Questions consist of a series of related statements all containing the same prefix indicating the topic and question numbers e Topics must be numbered in ascending order starting at 1 e Questions and topics must be numbered consecutively e Each topic has a name which is a text string set using the line qu x topic lt topic_name gt e xis the topic number 8 9 Question Banks 119 The following example shows a question bank with two topics There are two questions in the first topic and only one in the second topic In general question banks contain many questions in each topic Example topic Differentiating polynomials mode formula question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 1 answer 2x 3 mode formula question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 3 lt SUP gt x 1 answer 3x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 1 topic Differentiating exponentials 1 mode formula 1 question What is the derivative of e lt SUP gt x lt SUP gt 1 answer e lt SUP gt x lt SUP gt 2 EN M H PHA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 aggagaaaas Question File Structure Details Questions are stored with embedded HTML and MathML tags in a text file called a question file qu plain text script file that consists of a list of topics In each topic is a list of questions Each question file contains one or more topics Each topic has a corresponding topic stateme
408. s homepage Students can register in your class if you allow for open enrollment otherwise you can add students by uploading a student roster or through the user manager Instructors access the Class Homepage to e Use pre existing question banks e Create publish and manage assignments e Manage student interactions e Access a Gradebook that records student work and assignment results 1 2 Overview Question Repository Assignments and Reports The variety of question types including sophisticated Math and Science questions that use the Maple computer algebra system range of assignment modes powerful tools and reports the system can generate make Maple T A an ideal productivity enhancement for instructors while giving students an individualized learning experience Question Repository Using Maple T A you create store and edit questions in the question repository Questions are the basis for self scoring assignments You can easily select questions from the question repository to create an assignment Assignments Maple T A assignments automate common learning activities that involve questions and problems You can create assignments for a range of purposes including e Self study practice e Mastery Homework amp Quizzes e Proctored exams requiring proctor validation 2 1 Getting Started When an assignment is created you specify assignment access grading parameters and feedback options After de te
409. s of the form 7 7 5 which is more complicated than the simplified form 0 To avoid these issues rewrite this example as follows using a new variable ans so that you return only the final answer to 3 decimal places Example 5 qu 1 5 mode formula qu 1 5 algorithm Sa rint 12 1 b rint 12 1 c rint 12 1 ans decimal 3 c b a qu 1 5 question Find the solution of the linear equation a x b c qu 1 5 answer Sans See Also Adding and Editing Comments page 78 10 12 Tutorial Formatting Integers and Reals This tutorial demonstrates the effect of applying various formatting options to the same expression in a question Consider a question that contains the text A dog weighs m kg The following table shows how different assignments of values to m are interpreted Table 10 8 Formatting Numbers with m Syntax Format Display m 15 27375491 A dog weighs 15 27375491 kg m sig 3 15 27375491 A dog weighs 15 3 kg 10 13 Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions 215 Syntax Format Display m int 15 27375491 A dog weighs 15 kg m decimal 1 15 27375491 A dog weighs 15 3 kg m decimal 0 15 27375491 A dog weighs 15 kg decimal n x Returns x expressed as a floating point number rounded to n decimal places sig n x Returns x expressed as a floating point number rounded to n significant digits int x R
410. s part of the graded assignment report they receive The editor allows you to format your text as well as include images links and color enhancements See Also Configuring Feedback Options page 43 Question Annotations page 40 Select Questions Tab Add Questions to Assignments You can add questions to your assignment by e Adding individual questions by using the Add as Items button or e Adding questions as a group by using the Add as Group button You can use any combination of selection methods when creating an assignment You can combine any number of individual questions and question groups in a single assignment Adding Individual Questions To add individual questions 1 In the Assignment Editor Select Questions tab select a source question bank from the Question Group drop down list 2 Expand the groups into individual questions 3 From the left frame of the Select Questions tab select questions using the check boxes 4 Click the Add as Items button to place the selected questions in your assignment Note You can select one question at a time and click the adjacent add link to place the individual question in your assignment See Also Question Annotations page 40 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor 39 Add Questions as a Group Questions added as a group are loaded into a single question pool You can use the drop down menu to specify the number of questions to be selected by
411. s the percent For example using perc 5 with answer 2 5 any response between 2 5 0 95 and 2 5 1 05 inclusive is graded correct For example 2 388888 is correct e Consider the following recommendations when using this question type 1 In general allow some tolerance in a student response 2 Provide a correct answer that is as accurate as possible 3 If the use of units is not an important part of the question that is you are not testing the student s ability to convert units do not include units in the answer field In this case instruct the students to enter a purely numeric response in terms of a unit you specify Example 1 begin question numeric qutext Compute the exact value of the function f x 3x 4 2x 2 1 at x 2 1 answer 48 5243 exact value grading end question Example 2 begin question numeric qutext Compute the value of log 45 Round your answer to 5 significant digits answer 1 6532 This question uses exact grading because digits is not used In this case a more accurate response is graded incorrect end question Example 3 begin question numeric qutext Compute the value of log 45 Your answer must be correct to at least 5 decimal places answer 1 653212514 err 0 00001 absolute tolerance Any numerical response between 1 653202514 and 1 653222514 is graded correct end question 278 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX
412. sary e Save saves your additions or changes to the algorithms and returns you to the Question Name amp Type screen 8 5 The Question Editor 79 Cancel Clear Show Designer Refresh Save Edit the code for your algorithm in the text box below or click Show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Variable Value No algorithmic variables defined Figure 8 1 Algorithm Editor 3 Add or edit algorithm statements variable definitions and variable control statements e If you know the system algorithm syntax directly add or edit statements in the algorithm text region If you don t know the system syntax click the Show Designer button to display the Algorithm Designer You can only add not edit statements using the Algorithm Designer When you have finished adding and editing variable statements click the Save button to save your changes and return to the Question Name amp Type screen To add your changes to the cached question proceed to the Question Display screen by clicking Next and then click Finish Note When refreshing the algorithmic variable with a plot statement you need to change the plot statement in order for the new image to appear Changing a plotdevice or plotoption entry will not update the plot See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 Plotting Using
413. screen a In the Question Type drop down box select Multiple choice Itis recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution Click Next 3 On the Question Statement amp Answer screen a In the text box enter the question statement c d e In the Choices for the answers boxes enter the possible choices To add additional choice text fields click the Add Choices button If the correct answer consists of multiple choices select the Allow more than one selection radio button Select the radio button s corresponding to the correct answer Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question To add response specific feedback for the student 1 On the preview screen click Edit 2 On the Question Name amp Type screen click Edit source 3 On the Edit Source screen for each choice listed in the source add a comment line of the form comment lt n gt lt comment_text gt where lt n gt in the comment line is the same as in the corresponding choice line choice lt n gt lt choice_text gt at the end of the source code 4 Click Save 5 On the Question Name amp Type screen click Next 6 On the Add Multiple Choice screen click Finish
414. se lt lt blank_num gt gt for example lt 1 gt to mark the location of the drop down box in the question statement Text option Free response text fields If you author in a text or HTML editor use the lines qu x y blank lt blank_num gt lt correct_response_1 gt lt correct_response_n gt qu x y grader lt blank_num gt text in the question script The correct responses are graded correct Use lt lt blank_num gt gt for example lt 2 gt to mark the location of the text field in the question statement Formula option Free response math cells If you author in a text or HTML editor use the lines qu x y blank lt blank_num gt lt correct_formula_1 gt lt correct_formula_n gt qu x y grader lt blank_num gt formula in the question script The correct formulas are graded correct Use lt lt blank_num gt gt for example lt 3 gt to mark the location of the formula cell in the question statement Examples of the three varieties of blanks questions are shown in Figure 9 8 Select red from the menu Click for List v Enter red or green in the box Enter 3 or 4 in the formula box Figure 9 8 Three Varieties of Blanks Questions Drop Down List Text Box and Formula Box 154 9 Question Types 9 5 Clickable Image Questions Question Mode clickable image qu x y mode clickable image A clickable image question presents an image with a number of hot spots Students are required to
415. se algorithmically generated variable data You must first upload an image to the class web site See Images and Reference Files in Questions page 87 To use the Label Image applet include the following HTML code in your question lt div align center gt lt applet code applets labelImage LabelImage width 50 height 50 gt lt param name image value classes class1 Imagel gif gt lt param name size value 1 gt lt param name label 1 x value 20 gt lt param name label 1 y value 20 gt lt param name label 1 text value text for label gt lt applet gt lt div gt where The div tags are optional The width and height tags specify the dimensions of the image in pixels To determine the width and height of the graphic use a third party graphics application for example Microsoft Paint The image parameter value specifies the path and filename of the image file The size parameter value specifies the number of labels You can specify zero or more labels The location and contents of each label are specified using three parameters 1 The label i x parameter value specifies the horizontal offset in pixels of the middle of the i label from the left side of the image 2 The label i y parameter value specifies the vertical offset in pixels of the baseline of the i label from the top of the image 3 The label i text parameter value specifies the content of the i label It can incl
416. sers to the LDAP directory When you import users with LDAP 1 The LDAP server is consulted to verify each user is in the LDAP directory Users that are not in the directory will not be imported 2 Matching of users is done by username 3 Profile information from the LDAP directory will override any corresponding information in the import file 4 Require User Validation if included is ignored with LDAP No validation is necessary on the user s next login 8 Authoring Methods for Questions 8 1 Advanced Instructor Help Question Repository and Question Types Question Types Math and Science Question Types Maple Question Types Question Repository Authoring Methods Using the Question Editor Question Authoring and Content Production Avoiding System Time outs during Authoring Sessions Using Plain text Script Files Using LaTeX 8 2 Navigating the Question Repository The Question Repository is used to create organize and search for questions To open the Question Repository From the Content Manager menu select Question Repository The Questions menu provides the following options e Select New Question to start a new question e Select Import Question Bank to upload a question file from your hard drive e Select New Search to search the Question Repository for questions For more information on the question repository see Question Repository page 114 8 3 Overview Authoring Methods for Question Ban
417. show the subfolder or upload icons for the root level of the web site the top level To close a subfolder 1 Click the triangle icon by the name of the subfolder You return to the root level 2 Click the triangle icon again to open the subfolder and work on its files Deleting Subfolders To delete a subfolder 1 Click the triangle icon by the name of the subfolder to open the subfolder 2 Click Delete 3 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK to delete the subfolder Note If you click Delete when you are at the root level that is when no subfolder is open an error message appears indicating that you cannot delete the Public_Html directory which is the main folder for the Class Web Site 20 2 Creating and Managing Classes 3 Creating and Managing Assignments 3 1 The Assignment Editor Assignments are created by selecting questions from the Question Repository The Assignment Editor allows you to create new assignments edit the content properties or appearance of existing assignments and copy print or delete assignments Assignment creation options enable you to create assignments in which Maple T A reorders questions generates questions or displays a subset of questions Each student viewing your assignment can potentially complete a unique set of questions The Assignment Editor lists assignments created for your class If you began your class registration by selecting a template or a shared class not an
418. siedecadatevecuvtiesceuenaee 219 Inline Variable Expressions areir ee tages cwehows cowedbune ce 4h cue dawede bed iveenyd cabs aegdetacbecciaaetends 220 Rules for Naming Variables sisirin iiics i E nE eden cad eaceceus cu ceeded weds EEE E EE E h 221 10 17 Generating Random Numbers in Questions cecc cece secceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea esse eeseeeaeeeaneeanes 221 10 18 Functions and Argument cocci ceiiiec es caccts EEE EEEE de venced oe oegedeteceugededccuediveccuehaedetes 222 CONGIMONX ofin a tactics a n eckancsdetetay ia lesbensededabeediesberd deat bedebextencadedsoeates 222 decimal n x sig my Xj IMK serenon eii esos ck a ieee waa EEE E ceeeciseds ceddbieeoddesteeweee 223 eq a b c a b slefa b me ay Dane inae eden ete E been teeth aes EE AON Shee ete es 223 FACt M eaoin ete ee gen e ea Eia dewecedbe EAE Cows EEE E EEEE dequtteudcuedae covebeuenwaeeuss beeqentareeueenaces 224 frac a D ronie eee tees owe tevedotel dubwed onencbede teetuas tees vubelstaeene sata shadsiabhecd be eebeles aa EN S LES Deus 224 ged a D ee ae ee ere 225 Contents ix sa bi Oa b cvcheneckvsensactastune ae a a aA a aaier 225 PCAs o AE e EEE S E S E AEE A S ead haa vad oe VA es 225 indexofk a b Cyd cejo ene eee ec eee 225 javalon ay byty den un iie o EEE EE EE EE E EEE EAE EE EE E es 225 SO V A a a E a a a R section e a a a a aa e eaa a 226 mapleltext inro Corecess i EA E AT E A E E A E EA cg vege EE E E E R ER Cees 226 matha
419. signments 26 40 Printing assignments 26 Proctor Adding 16 Deleting 17 Managing 15 Proctor Overview 15 Proctored exams Proctor types 35 Profile Edit 69 Properties 169 Public Questions 117 Q Qu x topic 118 Qu x y algorithm 219 Qu x y answer 213 Qu x y comment 213 Qu x y mode 124 137 145 Qu x y name 126 Qu x y solution 129 Question Adding 76 Deleting 115 Duplicating 77 Essay 169 171 Formula 169 171 List 169 171 Maple 169 171 Multiple Choice 169 171 Numeric 169 171 Permanently Deleting 115 Previewing 116 Question Annotations 40 Question authoring 95 Question Bank File Exporting 114 Opening 120 Question Bank File format Plain text 75 Question bank file formats Plain text script files 283 Question bank files 73 Question Banks 1 75 116 125 129 312 Index Authoring 73 Open 120 Reinstalling 121 Question Chaining Variables 233 Question Descriptions 126 Question Designer 167 Question Designer Example with List Questions 298 Question Designer Questions 175 Question Designer Questions in the Question Editor 104 Question Editor 75 92 113 Essay 94 Pop Ups 105 True or False 105 Question Fields 122 Question Mode 124 132 137 155 162 177 254 269 271 Redefining 85 Question Modes 131 133 134 139 163 250 Question parts 163 Sequencing Parts 163 Question Repository 115 Clean up 115 Question Statement 125 Question Types 9
420. sin x then the Answer field must contain the Maple code int sin x x By default the Maple code to grade the student answer is given evalb ANSWER RESPONSE 0 Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question Maple Weighting Answer referenced when grading as 4NS WER Grading Code is 4NSWER RESPONSE 0 Expression Type Optional Formula e g e sin x 2 Maple Syntax e g diff 2 f xLx Maple Repository Plotting Code Figure 9 17 Maple graded Response Area in the Question Designer e You can enter Maple code to plot the student answer For example enter an expression in x The Maple grading code is plot SRESPONSE x 0 10 You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions You must first upload your archive files into the class file space on the server When you create a Maple graded question you specify the location of the archive as part of the question definition When executing the Maple code associated with that question the Maple libname variable is set automatically to access the archive files specified Click the blank field in the Maple repository row and enter the Library location 174 9 Question Types Multiple Choice To create a Multiple Choice question 1 Enter a question in the Text of the question panel 2 Click Insert Edit Response Area 3 Select the Multiple Choice question type in the Edit Response Area dialog Multipl
421. sponses for example 2 499 and 2 5 are incorrect For example if err 1 digit 3 and answer num 27 18 the responses 27 1 and 27 2 are correct Although 27 3 is within 0 1 of 27 18 rounded to 3 significant digits it is incorrect because it is not within 0 1 of 27 18 Using a Question Bank specific Table of Units To use a table of units include the following statement qu lt topic_number gt lt question_number gt units lt tablename gt where lt tablename gt is a table of unit definitions in the question bank For more information see Using a Table of Units page 205 See Also Numeric Questions in the Question Editor page 102 Numeric Questions in LaTeX page 276 Formula with Units page 139 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 182 Controlling Answer Tolerance page 183 Questions with Plots Basic System Plots You can integrate basic function plotting or graphing components from algorithmic formulas in question statements or feedback You must use LaTeX or plain text script authoring to create these questions For more information see Graph Plotting Applet below 9 2 Math Question Types 149 Maple Plots Use the Maple computer algebra system to generate sophisticated two and three dimensional plots in your questions and feedback See Plotting Using Maple page 201 You can add a Maple plot using any authoring method Graph Plotting Applet The graph plotting applet is
422. ssignments Edit modify or expand existing questions Control the rules and policies surrounding your assignments including time limitations ability to retake assign ments feedback content and results reporting Publish assignments to your class specific web site Use the system Gradebook to monitor individual and class learning performance and export data to leading course management systems like WebCT Blackboard and Moodle Content and student records in the system are built in XML and MathML The system output is IMS QTI IMS Question amp Test Interoperability specification compliant improving interoperability with other systems and enabling you to attach additional information to your content Getting Help From the Help menu select Instructor You can access Proctor and Student help from the Other Help submenu Access Technical Support from Maplesoft Email your questions to support maplesoft com amp MapleTA Maplesoft 615 Kumpf Drive Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2V 1K8 6 1 Getting Started 2 Creating and Managing Classes 2 1 Class Manager Creating a New Class You begin using Maple T A by creating a class Within your class you have access to the question repository and as signments resource files and the Gradebook for the class It also gives you access to several system tools Note Your administrator may have already created a class for you If this is the case once you login yo
423. stem You can include a Maple plot in any question type including nonmathematical question types For more information see Plotting Using Maple page 201 In Maple questions you can specify Maple code to generate a plot based on the student re sponse For more information see Plotting a Student Response page 187 Other Math Question Types e You can limit the range of standard math functions available For example the question What is sin Pi 4 should accept the answers sqrt 2 2 and 1 sqrt 2 but not sin Pi 4 The Restricted Formula type limits the functions that the students can use to those commonly found on a non scientific calculator for example the arithmetic operators and sqrt The basic Formula type does not accept equations that is expressions consisting of two components separated by an sign For these questions for example to accept y 3 4 x 1 and y 4x 7 use the Equation type e Questions that have answers with an additive constant for example a constant of integration in indefinite in tegration questions have many valid answers that differ by the addition of a constant quantity The Formula Mod C type accepts all such answers as equivalent e To create a question that requires a response with multiple values or formulas in a specific order use the Formula List question type The Multi Formula question type accepts an unordered list of numbers or formulas separated by semicolons A question that
424. stion and Answer screen a Enter the text of the question Give the coefficient matrix of the following system x 2y 3z 1 T y t2254 To enter the system of equations click the Equation Editor icon gt in the toolbar and enter the expressions in the Equation Editor b In the Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer region enter printf MathML ExportPresentation Sans Note This generates MathML for the matrix presenting it in a nice format for the students For the purpose of grading the student response however you must use the ans variable not the MathML expression c In the Enter Maple code to grade the student response region enter LinearAlgebra Equal SRESPONSE Sans Note The default grading code evalb ans SRESPONSE 0 is not sufficient when working with matrices To check for matrix equality use the command LinearAlgebra Equal d From the Select the type of expression you want to accept field select Maple Syntax because students will be entering a matrix e From the Text Symbolic entry field select Symbolic entry only so that students can use the Equation Editor to create the matrix rather than having to enter the Matrix command See Figure 8 8 f Click Finish to save the question g Add the question to one or more question groups and then click Submit 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 109 Enter the text of the question aa i E 2
425. stions In LaTeX cirenean Cesena a hie Waa oe vate be ea Le sene ee sae A E R Se Sea gee ae 276 Restricted Formula Questions in LaTeX cccccccc cece cigis e itea aE E EER Sede EG esata EEG EG EEE EES 279 Coordinates of Points and Vectors Questions in LaTeX cccccccc cece cece ec eee eeeeeea ee eeea eee een essen essen eeeees 280 12 Plain Text Script Authoring cosine gis veccen ch eck pa ced E eeu a pe oa cs oes ha edd av ce Rae saweh eave Sees eae a aS 283 12 1 Using Script Files to Author Questions cccccecceece ence eecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeea secs ceases eeeeeeaeereneeenenees 283 12 2 Library of Example Scripts seis aoia ni Een EEEE we EEE EEEE EEEE EAE E E EEEE E 283 Creating Algorithmic Graphic Labels ccccecceecceecc ence ence eeeeeeceeeeeeeea esse eeae esse eeaeeeaeeeaeeeenerenegaes 284 Algorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Example Script 0ccceceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 284 Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Example Script cccecccecceeceneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeegs 284 Answer Tolerance Example Script cccceecceecceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cena eese esse eeu eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeges 285 Applet Questions eeni enres a a a levicuetdveteens ekand ed entbundlavbencedetshesiusheed oes 288 Clickable Image Question Example Script 1 0 0 cece cecccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea ees eeaeeeaeeeaeeenaes 288 Essay Question Example Scripts e
426. stions can be authored only by using scripts or LaTeX To ensure that this question type is appropriate consider the following e To create a question with inline entry cells for student responses use the blanks question type To create a question for which the use of a specific word or phrase is important but the overall structure of the response is not use the key words question type To create a question that is not automatically graded use the essay question type e To create a graded free response math or science question review the math science question types supported by the system See Also Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 List Questions page 160 Rules for Grading Free Response Questions page 158 Short Phrase Question Example Script page 300 9 18 True or False Questions Question Mode True False qu x y mode True False True or false questions are treated as a class of multiple choice question featuring only two choices See Also True or False Questions in the Question Editor page 105 Multiple Choice Questions page 163 True or False Question Example Script page 300 178 9 Question Types 9 19 Advanced Question Types The system supports the following applet question types To create these questions you must author the questions in LaTeX or in a text or HTML editor Dynamic figure label questions Questions with Labeled Images page 106 Labeling Graphics in
427. t math gt What is the derivative of lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt math gt with respect to lt math gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt math gt lt 1 gt lt br gt lt font face arial size 1 gt lt i gt Enter only the expression for the derivative omitting y lt b gt Try it lt b gt The answer is mathml n x n2 lt i gt lt font gt lt p gt lt p gt Here is a lt b gt numeric lt b gt blank style of question lt br gt 3 8 lt 2 gt lt br gt lt br gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt Numeric questions can specify margin of error and significant figure precision lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt The following numeric blanks question requires a lt b gt number and a unit dimension lt b gt in its response lt br gt If a cat walks 20ft in 2min how fast is the cat walking lt 3 gt lt br gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt Most standard equivalent unit dimensions are graded correctly by the system or you can specify your own table of unit equivalents to apply toa question lt p gt lt font gt lt i gt 300 e 12 Plain Text Script Authoring lt p gt This next question grades input in the form of a lt b gt text string lt b gt and can also be set to accept multiple correct answers so Einstein lt i gt or lt i gt einstein will be graded as correct as will Albert Einstein lt i gt or lt i gt aLbeRt einSTEIN lt br gt Who first developed the Gener
428. t OVER lt btn gt lt btn gt UNDEROVER lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep gt Lt a 10 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions 195 Palette Definition Palette lt btn gt TRIGPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt sin a lt btn gt SIN lt btn gt lt btn gt COS lt btn gt sin a cos a tan a lt btn gt TAN lt btn gt lt btn gt SEC lt btn gt lt btn gt CSC lt btn gt lt btn gt COoT lt btn gt lt btn gt ARCSIN lt btn gt lt btn gt ARCCOS lt btn gt lt btn gt ARCTAN lt btn gt lt sub gt sec a ese a cot a sin a cos a tan a lt btn gt ARROWPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 2 gt gt lt btn gt rarr lt btn gt lt btn gt larr lt btn gt lt btn gt harr lt btn gt lt btn gt rlarr lt btn gt lt btn gt lharu lt btn gt lt btn gt rharu lt btn gt lt sub gt l 1 Example Header Toolbar Palette Definitions qu env palette operator lt tb gt lt btn gt OPERATORPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 1 gt lt btn gt times lt btn gt lt btn gt divide lt btn gt lt btn gt middot lt btn gt lt sub gt lt tb gt qu env palette greek lt tb gt lt btn gt SYMBOLPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt lt btn gt alpha lt btn gt lt btn gt beta lt btn gt lt btn gt gamma lt btn gt lt sub gt lt tb gt 196 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions 10 7 Using
429. t Responses On an assignment students can opt to enter their responses in Symbol mode or Text mode This setting applies to any question type that supports both modes For other question types a specialized input field is presented to the students For more information on the input field for a specific question type see the section on that question type in Question Types page 131 For Maple syntax questions the instructor specifies Symbol mode or Text mode for responses in the question itself For more information see Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions Note You can use the Question Editor s on screen dialog boxes to set the answer format For more information see Setting Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 85 Student responses do not need to be formatted identically to your answer to be correct You can specify notations that the student is allowed to use Number Style Use the numStyle field to set the acceptable formatting for student responses List the acceptable number styles in a space separated list as the value The available number styles are e thousands responses containing commas as a separator are graded correct e scientific responses specified using scientific notation for example 2 0E2 are graded correct dollars responses containing a leading dollar sign are graded correct e arithmetic responses specified using t
430. t based variables 232 240 243 Lm 205 Ln 233 Load 120 Local proctor 35 Locked assignment icon 27 Locking class registration 10 Logical Operators 233 Login 1 Instructor 3 Using university logins 71 Lsu 183 226 Lux 205 Lx 205 M Macintosh 303 Managing Proctors 15 Maple 187 201 203 227 Maple Question 171 Maple Questions 140 RESPONSE variable 96 Boolean value 96 Digits 185 e 142 143 221 Feedback in Basic Question 294 in the Question Editor 96 LaTeX 272 Linking to a Maple Repository 90 Maple Formula Example Script 293 Maple Syntax 143 310 Index Maple Syntax Example Script 294 Maple graded Formula Questions 142 Partial Grading 96 Preventing Cheating 185 Unevaluated forms 143 Using a Maple Repository 90 Maple Repository 90 Maple Syntax 143 Preventing Cheating 185 Maple Syntax Questions Editing 107 Maple T A Using in the classroom 5 maple text 226 Margin of error 86 181 183 184 215 Margin of tolerance 86 183 184 215 Mastery assignments 36 Edit mastery policies link 43 Setting policies 43 Study Session and Mastery 36 Matching 161 254 in Question Editor 98 Math capabilities 181 Math Expressions 168 Authoring 198 From the Equation Editor 195 Using MathML 199 Math Functions 204 Math grading 169 Math Input Grading 181 Math Question Types 149 Math Question Types Comparison Table 133 Math Questions 133 184 Math Syntax in Questions 1
431. t equals lt btn gt lt btn gt ne lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep gt V A Jm a MRN Il t 194 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Palette Definition Palette lt btn gt LCGREEKPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt lt btn gt alpha lt btn gt lt btn gt beta lt btn gt lt btn gt gamma lt btn gt lt btn gt delta lt btn gt lt btn gt lambda lt btn gt lt btn gt mu lt btn gt lt btn gt nu lt btn gt lt btn gt psi lt btn gt lt btn gt phi lt btn gt lt btn gt sigma lt btn gt lt btn gt Delta lt btn gt lt btn gt Gamma lt btn gt lt btn gt omega lt btn gt lt btn gt epsilon lt btn gt lt btn gt zeta lt btn gt lt btn gt eta lt btn gt lt btn gt theta lt btn gt lt btn gt kappa lt btn gt lt btn gt rho lt btn gt lt btn gt upsilon lt btn gt lt btn gt xi lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep gt A TE lt con pret X2 wr KR ws He lt btn gt OPERATORPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 1 gt lt btn gt plus lt btn gt lt btn gt minus lt btn gt lt btn gt plusmn lt btn gt lt btn gt times lt btn gt lt btn gt middot lt btn gt lt btn gt divide lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep gt lt btn gt SUBSUP lt btn gt lt sub cols 2 gt lt btn gt FRAC lt btn gt lt btn gt SQRT lt btn gt lt btn gt SUB lt btn gt lt btn gt SUP lt btn gt lt btn gt SUBSUP lt btn gt lt btn gt UNDER lt btn gt lt btn g
432. t param name xMax value 10 gt lt param name yMin value yMin gt lt param name gridLines value 10 gt lt param name yMax value SyMax gt lt param name y1 value x Sa x b gt lt applet gt lt center gt qu 4 7 answer x a x b 298 12 Plain Text Script Authoring Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions This is an example of a question designer question containing response objects within the question statement Note The Question Designer question type supersedes the Inline question type Description CN i A GGG Question Designer questions are multipart questions You control question weighting You control formatting of the entire question including tables Blanks can be inserted inside tables to create fill in the blanks tables of data Multiple Choice and Multiple Selection Questions are set with response choices displayed horizontally rather than following the question This enables you to create survey style questions Individual response cells are indicated by angle brackets in the form lt gt where corresponds to the sequentially numbered part This question includes individual response objects embedded questions as follows PRP PPP PPP HPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PP PPP PP PRP PRP PPP PPP PPP PP PPP PPP PPP PP PPP PP PRP Blank 1 Formula question Blank 2 Numeric question Blank 3 Numeric question with required units Blank 4
433. t s assign ment If you attempt to force grade an assignment that any active users are currently taking a list of active users is displayed with the message that those assignments will not be force graded See Also Changing Grades and Adding Comments page 53 5 Course Modules Course Modules allow you to share your class content with others including related assignments and any web resources for example images used by your questions and assignments 5 1 Course Modules Overview When you create a course module CM the system packages the class elements you have identified producing a single ZIP file that can be archived or redistributed to other instructors using the system The instructors can have classes on the same server or on other Maple T A servers It is an ideal method for content management of entire classes full of related questions assignments and web references and allows you to include all or only specific parts of those classes in the CM package Using CMs is similar to the share class capability in that it allows you to share your class content however once a CM is distributed and installed in a new class location it does not maintain any synchronization with the original source class or its materials CMs ensure transportability of content from one class to another archiving of entire class contents and even portability of entire classes from one Maple T A server to another When you create a CM the web
434. tax mathml expr set expression in MathML using the defaults above mathml expr k set expression in MathML using the options from the table below Table 10 4 Options for the mathml Function k Include lt math gt tags Simplify math 0 Default yes yes 1 no yes 2 yes no 3 no no Turning off the lt math gt tags allows you to generate a MathML snippet with mathml that is to be used within a larger math layout that is generated either in raw MathML or from LaTeX For example in the LaTeX macros you can write int_1 infty var mathml at b x 2 1 dx to display simplified algorithmic math inside an integral See Also Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 196 mathml f page 226 10 8 Plotting Using Maple 201 10 8 Plotting Using Maple You can use Maple plotting features to display plots Maple provides many ways of representing data and mathemat ical expressions graphically using plots You can display a plot with any question type e Displaying a Maple Plot with the plotmaple Command Use the plotmaple command anywhere an algorithmic variable can be used that is in question text hints feedback solution and answer For more information see Dis playing a Maple Plot e Plotting a Student Response Use Maple plotting features to graph student responses or a function derived from a student response For more information see Plotting a Student Response page 187
435. ted property of each of the sixteen scenarios In this case the first related property is an image file depicting the molecular structure Create a new variable molecule1 that uses the index to select the appropriate indexed data value in this case the correct image molecule1x00 lt img src classes myclass chap15 image01 gif gt molecule1x01 lt img src classes myclass chap15 image02 gif gt molecule1x02 lt img src classes myclass chap15 image03 gif gt molecule1x15 lt img src classes myclass chap15 imagel6 gif gt Smoleculel switch k molecule1x00 molecule1x01 S molecule1x02 molecule1x15 3 Define the second related property for each scenario Create a new variable that uses the index to select the appro priate indexed data value Sproperty1x00 value Sproperty1x01 value Sproperty1x15 value Spropertyl switch k property1x00 S property1x01 property1x15 10 24 Tutorial List based Variables 243 4 Define additional related properties for each scenario and then select using the index and assign the appropriate values to new variables 5 The final set of variables is the answer field assuming that each different case has a different answer Select the appropriate answer using the index Sans00 50 Sans01 16 ans15 3 6 Sans switch k ans2x00 ans2x15 b Multiple Index Case It may be the case that your question requires mult
436. ters Ca aq CO aq gt CaCO s Symbol Mode For chemistry formula questions you can also use Symbol Mode entry which allows you to enter formulas in a WYSIWYG What you see is what you get editing window You can pick arrows symbols or operators from a palette and see your expressions appear as you type Select Equation Editor in the Edit Question window of the Mathematical Formula question type to display the symbol palette 10 4 Student Responses and Grading 187 Rules for Chemistry Expressions and Equations e Spaces are ignored in expressions e Parentheses may be used to clarify physical states compound groupings and application of ion charges Use the formula preview link to preview your expressions In grading equations any characters you enclose in parentheses for example ion charges superscripts subscripts etc are associated with the preceding term not the next term Example Pb 2 is Pb For numbers that are not super or subscripted that precede a compound or element the grader associates the number with the term that follows Example 2H_20 is 2H O See Also Chemistry page 135 Plotting a Student Response Maple T A uses Maple plotting features to graph student responses or a function derived from a student response for example the definite integral of the student response Maple provides many ways of representing data and mathemat ical expressions graphic
437. th a limited number of expressions and functions As such you do not need to explicitly check that the student response is a Maple command For details see the Syntax and Student Response subsections of Maple graded Formula page 142 See Also Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Maple Syntax page 143 Entering Chemistry Expressions There are two ways to enter the answer to a question of the chemistry question type Text Mode The system default mode is Text Mode in which you enter symbolic or numeric math expressions in a simple keyboard notation much like a graphing calculator Table 10 1 Guidelines for Entering Chemistry Expressions Rule Examples Superscripts and Subscripts Enter superscripts using the H_20 H O caret character and sub scripts using the underscore _ 4 Arrows in Equations Use the text gt lt lt gt for ar gt gt rows lt Other Operators Use for the center dot oper 7 ator Use the sign in equations nn Note No other operations are allowed in equations You can use the charges see below Physical States Be sure to include physical Ca 2 aq CO_3 2 aq gt CaCO _3 s Ion charges and Parentheses states in parentheses if your equation requires them sign to indicate ion Use the and characters for polarity and ion charges Use parentheses to clarify inter pretation of groups of charac
438. th multiple response cells in the same question use the multipart formula question type Note The multipart formula question type is different from the multi formula question type In a test the input field for the response appears as shown in Figure 9 3 Your answer fin In 2y This entry box accepts numbers or formulas Need more help on math syntax Figure 9 3 Input Field for a Formula Question Note e Ifthe answer is a number that is does not have any variables it is recommended that you specify in the question text whether an exact answer or an approximation is required In the case of an approximation the 138 9 Question Types margin of error must be specified in your correct answer This can be done by specifying a margin of error using the operator For example if the answer field were 2 34 0 01 any response between 2 33 and 2 35 inclusive would be graded correct In other words the number following the operator is the margin of error For more information on tolerances see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 184 The following sub types for this question type are available by specifying the grading field e Chemistry e Form Variant without simplification See Also Blanks formula page 134 Formula Questions in LaTeX page 271 Algorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Example Script page 284 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Editor page 9
439. than or equal to z for a standard normal distribution that is with mean 0 and variance 1 For example erf 0 0 5 erf 1 0 68 erf 2 0 95 erf 3 0 997 Other normal distributions can be modeled by re normalizing that is erf z m s is the probability distribution of a normal distribution with mean m and standard deviation s It is used in producing performance statistics within the system but is also available for use in internal directives al gorithms and answers inverf p The inverse function of erf z Let Z be a standard normally distributed random variable Then inverf p is the value of z for which P Z lt z p For example inverf 0 99 returns the value of z with probability 0 99 that Z lt z invstudentst k x Computes the inverse of the cumulative probability density of the Students t distribution with k degrees of freedom For example invstudentst 2 0 9 returns the value of x with probability equal to 0 9 studentst k x Compute the cumulative probability distribution at x of the Students t distribution with k degrees of freedom For example 232 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions studentst 2 1 55 returns the probability that X lt 1 55 strcat a b c d strcat a b c d Returns the concatenation of the strings in the list For example strcat a and b returns cats and dogs when a cats and b dogs sum varname start stop expr sum var
440. that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a worked solution d Click Next 3 On the Question Designer screen a In the text box enter the question statement b Click the Edit Insert Response Area button c The Edit Response Area dialog opens You can select from Formula Maple Multiple Choice Numeric List or Essay question types d Select a question type and define the properties for that question type Click OK e The properties are now displayed in the Text of the question panel f You can add multiple parts to a question using the Question Designer by inserting additional response areas g Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question A sample question is shown in Figure 8 6 Finish Text of the question E Source ee i 2 E GiB z U mj x Mo e E BiG A iT r i Font Size Use the function 2x4 E 4x and the following plot of the function to answer the questions below plott 1 Determine the first derivative of the function Maple Edit 2 Identify the maximum point s 1 4 13 54 015 3 38 Edit 3 Identify the interval on which the function is concave down Formula Edit 4 Determine the integral of the function Formula Edit F
441. the operator in the numeric answer answer num field for a numeric question You must use the specialized tolerance fields Variable definitions must reduce to one of the above You can round a variable value to any number of significant digits and then specify the variable as the answer Controlling Display of Numbers within Questions All random numbers generated by the system from variable definitions are floating point variables By default they are expressed to about 8 significant digits To control the display of numeric variables enclose expressions in an int statement to make them integers for example m int 14 5 5 or in double quotes to make them strings for example s 380 5 You can also control the appearance of numeric variables by enclosing random number generating statements and arithmetic operations with decimal n statement to express the result to n decimal places or by using the sig n statement structure to express the result to n significant digits See Also Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 230 decimal n x sig n x int x page 223 Variables within Variable Statements You can use variables as arguments in variable definition statements Since the algorithm generation works linearly you must define variables before referencing them in other variable definition statements or control sequences Example qu 3 7 mode Formula qu 3 7 algorithm
442. the evaluation of the student response e When writing a Formula question type you cannot use Maple code in the evaluation of the student response Viewing your source code reveals that for Maple graded questions both Maple Formula and Maple Syntax subtypes mode Maple while for Formula question types mode formula Note There is no difference for the student in syntax or range of expressions 9 2 Math Question Types 141 Difference Between Maple graded Formula and Maple Syntax with Text Entry Mode in Student Response These two subtypes are distinguished by a student s response e A student should not use Maple commands and expressions in a response to a question generated using Maple graded Formula For details see Maple graded Formula page 142 The student responds using other Maple T A formula question syntax e A student is required to use Maple commands and expressions in a response to a question generated using Maple Syntax with the Text entry response option For details see Maple Syntax page 143 Difference Between Maple graded Formula and Maple Syntax with Text Entry Mode in Syntax Checking These two subtypes are distinguished by syntax checking of the student response e The system verifies the syntax of a student response for a Maple graded Formula question using a basic syntax checker For details see Maple graded Formula page 142 The system does not verify the syntax of a student response for
443. the following order Table 11 4 Arguments and Option for a Multigraph gridlines option number of horizontal and vertical gridlines in addition to the axes default is 10 formulal formula of first function in calculator syntax not TeX formula2 formula of second function in calculator syntax not TeX xMin minimum x value on the x axis xMax maximum x value on the x axis yMin minimum y value on the y axis yMax maximum y value on the y axis Syntax graph gridlines formula xMin xMax yMin yMax multigraph gridlines formula1 formula2 xMin xMax yMin yMax Example begin question MultiFormula qutext What are the x intercepts of the graph shown Format graph gridlines formula xMin xMax yMin yMax graph 12 x 1 x 3 6 6 6 6 The choice of gridlines and scale here will ensure that the axes are labeled at the integers 6 5 1 1 5 6 answer 1 3 end question See Also Questions with Plots page 148 260 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Graph Sketching Questions in LaTeX Question Mode sketch The sketch question type displays introductory text accompanied by a set of axes The student draws a graph on the axes by clicking points to be used as interpolation nodes Use the sketch environment to configure the applet declaring the ranges of the axes a sample correct response and a list of criteria that t
444. the items you want to install and click Install The selected items are installed in your class 122 8 Authoring Methods for Questions Question Fields Each question must contain mode question and answer statements In addition there are many optional fields that can be added to questions to enhance functionality add comments or hints or otherwise define or expand the capabil ities of the question Table 8 5 lists the available question fields and summarizes related information Table 8 5 Question Fields qu x y Required or optional Can include Field Type Description Func HTML or tion lt field name gt MathML mode required No internal directive System command that identifies the question type type required in Maple graded No internal directive Specifies subtype of questions Maple question For Maple Syntax ques tions it is maple For Maple Formula ques tions it is formula allow2d optional in Maple graded No internal directive For Maple graded questions questions specifies the student entry mode Can be 0 1 or 2 For maple questions it can be 0 for text entry mode or 1 for symbol mode For formula questions it must be 1 name optional Yes display no variables Displays text that iden tifies the individual question editing optional No internal directive Indicates use of HTML editing in the question Set directly or automat ically by Question Ed itor questi
445. the links for the numbered hints for example Hint 1 and Hint 2 The hints will appear as hyperlinks below the question answer region Example mode formula question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 1 answer 2x 3 hint 1 Differentiate the expression term by term hint 2 The derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt is 2x hint 3 The derivative of the constant term is zero aagaga See Also Configuring Feedback Options page 43 8 9 Question Banks 129 Comments and Performance Feedback Providing performance feedback is a two step process in the Maple T A system Step 1 Create content using the comment field for each question For information on adding a comment using the Question Editor see Adding and Editing Comments page 78 This topic discusses this necessary first step Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits For more information on the sig function see decimal n x sig n x int x page 223 Step 2 When creating an assignment specify if and how feedback is displayed in Step 3 Set Policies of the Assignment Editor You can display information including the e Fin
446. the minimum total number of points to be generated default 625 25 2 The plot3d command uses a rectangular grid of dimension isqrt n 3 1 orientation theta phi This option specifies the theta and phi angles of the point in three dimensions from which the plot is to be viewed The default is at a point that is out perpendic ular from the screen negative z axis so that the entire surface can be seen The point is described in spherical coordinates where theta and phi are angles in de grees with default 45 degrees in each case projection r This option specifies the perspective from which the surface is viewed where r is a real number between 0 and 1 The 1 denotes orthogonal projection and the 0 denotes wide angle perspective rendering r can also be the one of the names fisheye normal or orthogonal which correspond to the projection values 0 0 5 and 1 respectively The default is orthogonal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase scaling s This option specifies whether the surface should be scaled so that it fits the screen with axes using a relative or absolute scaling where s is either unconstrained or constrained The default is relative unconstrained The value can be in lowercase or uppercase shading s This option specifies how the surface is colored where s is one of xyz xy Z zgrayscale zhue or none The default is device dependent The value can be lowercase or uppercase Note that co
447. the question comment After the assignment is graded M Show the final grade Foreach question Always show the correct answer Always show the question comment CI Send email reports to C Restrict feedback until clear Ifyou have chosen to display feedback details then this option will delay their display until after the end date Figure 3 6 Feedback Options Optional Set Assignment Properties You can set a passing score time limit the number of questions on a page for the assignment and the maximum number of attempts allowed Assignment Properties Passing score 20 out of 25 0 Edit feedback messages Ifyou have set a passing score the defined feedback will be displayed to the student Always Time limit 50 minutes Questions per page 1 Max attempts allowed a Figure 3 7 Assignment Properties Control Assignment Scheduling You can set a default start and end date and time for each assignment The default is no scheduled start and end date Scheduling Coordinated Universal Time Start Oct 21 2010 08 00 AM End Oct 25 2010 05 00 PM ah D E a 4 Figure 3 8 Scheduling 32 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Visibility of Assignment Clearing the Visible check box temporarily excludes the assignment from the list of assignments displayed to students on your class homepage Visibility Visible Assignment is visible to students when
448. this file at ht tp www maplesoft com products mapleta latex2ta by choosing the default category e A text editor e LaTeX installed on your system e Internet access Authoring Process To author in LaTeX 1 Write your question bank in LaTeX using a text editor 2 Run LaTeX on your text files Preview the output to ensure it is correct You may perform multiple iterations of the steps 1 and 2 3 Using the web based conversion service at http www maplesoft com products mapleta latex2ta convert your LaTeX format question file to Maple T A qu format Save the qu file when the conversion is complete 4 Import and save the converted question bank in your Maple T A class See Opening a Saved Question Bank File page 120 11 2 LaTeX Question Bank Document Structure Questions are grouped into topics Use the LaTeX topic environment to mark the beginning and end of topics Each question is wrapped inside a question environment The Maple T A question type must be provided as an argument to the opening statement You can include any number of questions The example format in Table 11 1 shows one topic containing two questions The LaTeX package epsfig is loaded by default The ed package is required Other standard LaTeX packages for ex ample amsmath can be included using the usepackage macro You can also define additional LaTeX macros as usual 247 248 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX To include gr
449. thmic variable in the plot command For example Smyplot plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi plotdevice gif plotoptions height 250 width 250 Note You must use the long form name for Maple package functions You can see a plot immediately using the Algorithm Editor 202 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions a range 1 5 myplot plotmaple plot a sin x x Pi Pi plotdevice gif plotoptions height 250 width 250 Variable Value a 5 myplot Figure 10 3 Plot with Algorithmic Variables Example Using An Essay Question Type The following is the source file for an Essay question type that displays a plot mode Essay editing useHTML algorithm Swave plotmaple plot sin x x 0 10 question Discuss the following wave lt br gt Swave Example Using A Randomly Generated Variable The following is the source file for a Maple graded Formula question type that displays a plot question Determine the expression in the following plot lt br gt Sgraph maple evalb SANSWER SRESPONSE 0 maple answer x n type formula mode Maple name Displaying a Plot editing useHTML algorithm S n maple randomize rand 1 10 graph plotmaple plot x n x 2 2 Example Using the Maple tubeplot Command The following is the source file for a True False question type that displays a tube plot 10 8 Plotting Using Maple 203 mode True Fals
450. tion Designer Questions Question Designer questions are a more flexible and extensible form of free response question that can include multiple response areas In this way they are similar to multipart questions in that they provide a shell structure in which to embed other questions Question Designer questions support the following features e Using the Question Designer you can enter question text and the correct answers wherever they appear e Questions can contain multiple response cells for example Fill in the Blanks questions The widest variety of types of response cells linked to specific question grader types anywhere in the body of a question Question types supported in the Question Designer e All Formula Question Types Formula Formula Mod C Restricted Formula Equation MultiFormula ntuple Formula List Chemical Equation e Numeric Question Types with and without required unit dimensions e Multiple Choice Non permuting Multiple Choice displayed vertically or horizontally e Multiple Selection Non permuting Multiple Selection displayed vertically or horizontally e List Questions including text or menu input styles exact or relaxed graders multiple correct or incorrect responses can be specified partial credit can be defined for each response e Maple graded Formula and Maple Syntax e Essay As in a multipart question each subpart of the Question Designer question must itself be a well formed question The
451. tion order is static Display of Choices in Multiple Selection Questions By default the system presents choices in a stacked vertical list If you want to set choices horizontally use the Question Designer question type and set your response object to multiple selection or non permuting multiple se lection For more information see Question Designer Questions page 166 Grading Multiple Selection Questions A multiple selection question is graded fully correct if the student selects all the correct answers and no incorrect an swers The grader applies negative credit for selecting incorrect answers The score is calculated using the following algorithm 1 Score 1 for each selected correct answer and 1 for each selected incorrect answer 2 Sum these scores If this result is negative then it is replaced by 0 3 Divide by the total number of correct answers 4 Multiply by the total points for the question defined during assignment creation That is for a multiple selection question the score is given by the formula selected correct answers selected incorrect answers Total of correct answers x Total of points with the exception that if the numerator is less than 0 it is set to 0 For example if the correct answers are a and b and the incorrect answers are c and d then selecting all four would score 0 and selecting a b and c would score 50 If the multiple selection question is included as a
452. tion to indicate subtopic learning objective level of difficulty authorship 8 5 The Question Editor 83 ownership or other information The information field values allow sorting and filtering in the question repository and during assignment creation and they facilitate performance reporting by information field category To add or edit the info fields In the Question Editor screen click Add or Edit in the Information Fields area Enter or edit field names and corresponding values in the Field and Value text boxes Each question can contain any number of information fields To add rows click the More button Click Save A A U N e To add your changes to the cached question proceed to the Question Display screen by clicking Next and then click Finish See Also The info Field page 128 Adding and Editing Hints When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit hints To add or edit the hints 1 On the Question Editor screen click Add or Edit in the Hint area 2 Delete the text displayed and enter your comment for hint 1 or edit the hint displayed Hints can include text HTML formatted text symbolic math expressions algorithmic variables inserted objects JavaScript code variables and more To add or edit HTML formatted text click the Source button in the menu bar 3 Each question can contain any number of hints To display a second hint click Enter to display a second entry of
453. tions 10 15 How Does an Algorithmic Question Work in an Assignment Authoring A BW N e 6 Create a static question a version of the question in which the variables have fixed values Edit the question All three authoring methods support algorithm authoring Click Edit in the Algorithmic Questions region Add variable s and click Save Click Next and replace the fixed values with variable names in the question Variable names must start with the dollar sign character Save your question bank Assignment Creation l 2s 3 Select algorithmic questions for inclusion in an assignment in the same manner used for other questions In the Assignment Editor each time you preview the question the system regenerates the variable values To preview the question with new variable values preview it again Save your assignment Assignment Use 1 Each time the assignment is instantiated generated for a new session by Maple T A new variable values are created in all the algorithmic questions New assignment sessions occur either when the same student is making a new attempt at the same assignment or when different students request sessions from the same assignment Until an assignment is submitted for grading variable data that is created for that particular session persists throughout the assignment session even when students navigate between questions To give individual students the abi
454. tions page 89 Finally you need to host the Flash movie in a Maple T A question using the Flash question type Flash questions must be authored in a plain text script file 156 9 Question Types For example the demonstrated code above is for a Flash question which asks students to move the disk to a specific point on the Cartesian plane 9 8 Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions Free response questions present students with a question and a response object or entry cell in which to express their response Upon grading the student response is evaluated against the correct answer defined for the question The system provides many styles of automatically graded free response question types that differ in terms of presentation accepted response types and the graders applied to student responses The range of question types includes questions that accept and grade symbolic and numeric mathematics chemistry expressions and a variety of text based responses List Questions and Blanks Questions There are two types of Text based free response or fill in the blank questions in the system Each evaluates student responses by comparing the student response text string to that of the correct answer as coded into the question e list questions blanks questions Input Style and Options 1 Inline Blanks Both List and Blanks questions allow you to display free response entry cell blanks inside the HTML question statement
455. tiple times for credit If you want to limit the number of attempts a student can make on a particular assignment configure the assignment properties e Results for every attempt at a Homework and Quiz assignment are recorded in the Gradebook for the class Rework the Same Assignment Option To present an exact version of an assignment each attempt Select the Always work the same assignment on return check box e Individual students will always return to the exact version of the assignment they were initially presented with even on repeated attempts regardless of whether the question was authored with algorithms for any attempt during the assignment s scheduled availability If questions contain randomly generated variable data the system instantiates the variables exactly one time To vary questions for each assignment attempt default setting Leave the Always work the same assignment on return option cleared e Students rework the assignment with newly randomized variables inserted in questions each time they attempt the assignment This enables instructors to create a template assignment and lets students rework it repeatedly with each session generating a different version of the algorithmic variables within the assignment but still covering the same skills Notes The system records graded results for every repeated attempt and instructors can control the grading policies taking the best score average score or another option Yo
456. to check whether factor expr is a command that calculates the expression for the student However a student response like factor x 2 1 would be interpreted as implicit multiplication and converted to f a c t o r x 2 1 As such the student response will be marked as wrong 9 2 Math Question Types 143 You may need to write Maple code for responses that are interpreted as formulas by Maple T A but are Maple com mands For example if you ask for the value of sin Pi 4 you must use code to ensure that the student does not simply enter sin Pi 4 which the Maple T A syntax checker accepts and passes to Maple The correct response is for example sqrt 2 2 which is also a Maple T A formula and a Maple command Variables The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Maple graded Questions in the Question Editor page 96 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 140 Maple Syntax Question Mode Maple qu x y mode Maple type maple Maple Syntax is a subtype of the Maple graded question type In this subtype the student is required to e Respond using Maple commands and expressions e Enter syntactically correct Maple expressions In a Maple Syntax question you must specify whether the response area is a text entry area or a symbolic entry area Example Uses The Maple Syntax subtype is particularly useful when the answer is to be expr
457. tyle presentation when you want to evaluate short or long text responses in true fill in the blank style You can set the grader to exact and enforce an exact match between the student response and the correct answer or you can set it to relaxed a more lenient grading style in which capitalization and punctuation are ignored e Alternatively you may want to constrain student input and test general knowledge by providing a longer excerpt with isolated phrases blanked out but using the menu style presentation to require that a student select from a drop down list of possible answers 2 Traditional Blanks Presentation Because you control the HTML formatting inside the question as well as the position of the blanks inside a List or Blanks question you can also use those question types to present a response cell on a separate line by inserting paragraph or line breaks inside the question statement Comparison of Question Types Supported The List question offers the widest variety of response objects Question Text Exact Text Re Text Menu Formula Numeric Multiple Multiple Selec Mode Grading laxed Choice tion Grading List Question Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Blanks Ques Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No tion 158 9 Question Types Comparison of List Questions vs Blanks Questions List and Blanks questions are very similar however List questions provide a greater diversity of graders
458. tz MHz GHZ megahertz C la S coulomb he fosse ooo nanocoulomb uc fose C microcoulomb mc 10 3C millicoulomb kC hosce kilocoulomb MC 10 6 C megacoulomb nA 109 A nanoamp uA 106 A microamp mA hossa milliamp kA 10 34 kiloamp MA fhesa gt megaamp v uc volt nv 10 9V nanovolt uy fose v microvolt mv 1043V millivolt kw ft kiovot MV fosy megavolt ohm VIA ohm nohm fosg ohm nanoohm 10 10 Using a Table of Units 209 210 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions nohm 109 ohm nanoohm uohm 10 6 ohm microohm mohm 10 3 ohm milliohm kohm 10 3 ohm kiloohm Mohm 10 86 ohm megaohm ohms ohm ohm S av siemens nS fogs nanosiemens us 10 6 S microsiemens ms 0X38 o0 millisiemens ks 10 38 kilosiemens MS 10 6S megasiemens F lon farad nF 1o 9 F nanofarad uF 106 F microfarad mF 1083 F millifarad kF fiosF kilofarad MF 106 F megafarad wooo VS weber nib fog Wh nanoweber ub 10 6 Wh microweber mb 103 Wh milliweber Kib 1043 Wh kiloweber Mb 106 Wb megaweber T W tinns2 tesla nT hoart ooo nanotesla uT 10 6 T microtesla IH a heny nH 10 9 H nanoheniy uH 10 6 H microhenry mH 10 3 H millihenry kH 10 3H kilohenry MH 10 6 H megahenry m cd fumen SS fix cdim 2 lux mal 6 02214199 10 23 mole moles 6 02214199 10 23 mole M mol L molar Molar mon moar SS Other Units degC T 273
459. u down var k units up var k units to the right var k units to the left var k units code tl rint 2 s1 if t1 Sa int rint 8 2 Sh int rint 8 2 k int rint 8 2 The above code selects random integer coefficients between 2 and 9 and allows the leading coefficient of the function f to be either positive or negative end question Example 4 begin question blanks This question uses randomized variables in the menu choices and other parts of the question qutext In the var q quadrant the graph of y var c var al x is blank menu var p1 var p2 the graph of y var c var a2 x code Sr rint 2 s rint 2 t int rint 8 2 q switch r first second pl switch r s above below above p2 switch r s below above below Sc int rand 2 30 Sa rand 1 1 12 1 2 Sal switch s a St a S a2 switch s a a St end question See Also Free Response and Fill in the Blank Questions page 156 252 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Clickable Image Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Clickable Image The Clickable Image question type displays an image and text As the student moves the mouse over the image various hot spots are selected The goal is to click the correct hot spot To write a clickable image question you must first upload the image 1 Select
460. u can access your class by clicking the link under the Classes I Am Instructing tab Use one of the following options to create your new class Create a New Empty Class Note that you can only create a class if you have been given the correct privilege by the Administrator If you cannot create a class contact your Administrator To create a new class in the system 1 From the System Homepage select the Actions menu and then select Add Class 2 Complete the class registration form and click Submit O Es A MapleT A Administer Classes M e aplesoit System Homepage Create Class Welcome Jack Day My Profile Help Logout Class Details Course ID Class Name Instructor Jack Day School Description URL Registration Locked M Featured Class Fl Inherit content from None y Cancel Submit Create a New Class 3 Your class is added to the list of Classes I Am Instructing 4 To access your class click the link to your newly created class to bring you to the Class Homepage 8 2 Creating and Managing Classes Create a Copy of a Shared Class To create a copy of a shared class to create that class that includes questions and pre populated assignments from the parent class 1 From the System Homepage select the Actions menu and then select Add Class 2 Complete the class registration form and select a class to Inherit content from See Figure 2 1 3 Click Submit
461. u can view results from all sessions including the unique randomized variable data for each assignment attempt a student makes The system records the student s best grade The system still produces algorithmically varied versions of the assignment for different students but each student sees only one version of the assignment regardless of re peated attempts Printable Assignments Option To make your assignments printable Select the Offer printable version of assignment option e With this option selected students login and the system generates a new assignment with algorithmically generated variable data where appropriate At the next step however students are offered the option to gen erate a printable version of the test suitable for printing and working offline e Printable assignments operate like a homework session that was interrupted before grading The student can log in again and enter responses for automatic system grading and recording scores in the Gradebook Or in structors may prefer to have students submit their completed assignments on paper for hand grading by instructors or teaching assistants 3 3 Assignment Types 35 Associated Assignment Properties You can set the passing score and time limit for an assignment These properties are set under Assignment Properties in the Set Policies tab e If there is a time limit set for the test in the assignment definition a pop up window warns students as the
462. ude algorithmic variables To add HTML code through the Question Editor click the Source button E Source in the menu bar You can also add a Label Image applet to a question using plain text script authoring by adding this code to the question field or any HTML field in the question definition in the qu script file See Also Images and Reference Files in Questions page 87 Questions with Plots page 148 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 217 Labeling Graphics in LaTeX Questions page 263 Labeling Graphics in Questions Example Script page 291 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor 107 Text Formatting in Questions You can use HTML 4 0 tags to control the display of character formatting in most question fields For a list see Special Characters in Questions page 130 To do so click the Source button Source in the tool bar of the text editor region of the question and include the appropriate format tags Note This requires an HTML or text editor and knowledge of HTML HTML Formatting Table 8 3 Examples of HTML Tags to Use for Formatting Text Function lt p gt Text of paragraph lt p gt Sets the enclosed text as a paragraph lt br gt Text of new line Sets a new line break carriage return in the current para graph lt b gt Text lt b gt Boldfaces the enclosed text lt i gt Text lt i gt Italicizes the enclosed text lt sub gt T
463. ue or False Questions in the Question Editor ccccccccccc cece eee ce eee cece ae ee ee eeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeneen ees 105 Creating Pop Up References in Questions cceeceeecceeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeaeeee seca eese esse eeaeeeeeeenesenegees 105 Q estions with Labeled Images kinn an a ot sate aes eek oi ee 106 Text Formatting in Questions siir c2cceidecccees t ieii Eie EAEE od ov cehs aden gusacoedeaviewenees deeccdeeevecubaseccades 107 Tutorial Maple Syntax Questions with Matrices ccccccceeeceeece cece eece ees eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeegas 107 Tutorial Working with Multipart Questions ccecccecceece cece cece cece eece eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeegas 112 8 7 Question Repository eese an Ea SO oso eae eee ae E nee ea tin SEAE E a eet Da 114 Searching for Questions in the Question Repository c cceecceeceeecceece cece cece cess eeaeeeaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeges 114 Organizing Questions in the Question Repository ccccecce cece eeceeece cece cece eeae cess eeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenenaes 115 Deleting Questions from the Question Repository cccccceeeceeece cece eeceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeseneegas 115 Previewing a Question rosei ma vencee a A aati om a amp eae E iol leah a EA vest Geeks 116 Exporting Work to Your Hard Drive ccceecceeceeecceeceeeceeeeeeece cece eeseeese eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeegeeeaeegas 116 8 8 Sharing Quest Ons is lt ivck ces a edeteddes
464. uestion annotations and set the annotations to display at the top or the bottom of the page in which the question is loaded your annotations appear as a page level header or footer rather than immediately before or after the question Note Mastery and Study Session assignments automatically serve one question at a time This is part of their instructional design and this setting cannot be changed for these assignment types Tip If you are concerned about students ability to access complicated questions over a slower online connection it is recommended that you accept the default setting for questions per page which is one at a time Loading one question at a time usually allows a student to move through the assignment effectively but also saves each question response as it is completed Setting the Maximum Number of Attempts You can set the maximum number of times a student may take an assignment If the student attempts more than the maximum amount a message is displayed indicating the restriction It is possible to allow an exception in a particular case to the maximum number of attempts restriction To authorize an exception when the student sees the restriction message the student clicks Exception A proctor or the instructor can then provide authorization Scheduling Assignments Using the calendar function under Scheduling in the Set Policies tab you can set Start and End times for each assign ment These tim
465. ugh equivalent answers are graded correct Do not include C in the answer Example 1 begin question Formula mod C qutext Calculate int 6x 2 dx Use calculator syntax for the answer not TeX answer 2x 3 Note The response 2x 3 1 is also graded correct end question Example 2 begin question Formula mod C This question uses randomized variables qutext Calculate int var a x var b dx 270 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX answer var a2 x 2 var b x code al int rint 9 2 t rint 2 a2 int switch t al al Sa int 2 a2 b int rint 20 1 The above code chooses random integer coefficients a and b a is an even integer with absolute value between 4 and 20 b is a positive integer between 1 and 20 end question Equation Questions in LaTeX Question Mode Equation The Equation question type accepts an equation two formulas separated by an sign as an answer Notes e One side of the correct answer must be in the form of only a single variable for example y or z However the student response does not need to be in this form Any equivalent equation is graded correct The answer field must be in calculator syntax not in TeX Example 1 begin question Equation qutext Find the equation of the line that passes though the points 3 4 and 6 1 One side of the answer given must be a single var
466. ul statements in this case are Table 11 7 Statements for Additional Sketch Criteria slope_at xval return the slope of the curve at the x value xval value xval return the y value for the x value xval expri expr2 return true if expr1 is equal to expr2 Otherwise it returns false expri lt expr2 return true ifexpr1 is less than expr2 Otherwise it returns false expri gt expr2 return true if expr1 is greater than expr2 Otherwise it returns false true boolean constant false boolean constant booll amp amp bool2 return true if booll and bool2 evaluate to true Otherwise it returns false 11 6 Advanced Question Types in LaTeX 261 bool1 bool2 return true if bool1 or bool2 or both evaluate to true Otherwise it returns false For example value xcoord ycoord is equivalent to goes_through xcoord ycoord More than one check statement can appear in which case every criterion must be satisfied That is check criterion1 check criterion2 check criterion3 is equivalent to check criterionl amp amp criterion2 amp amp criterion3 Syntax begin sketch gridlines option xMin xMax yMin yMax example lt point list gt check criterion1 check criterion2 check criterion3 end sketch Example 1 begin question sketch qutext Sketch the graph of the function y x 1 begin sketch 4 2 2 2 2 example 2 1
467. ula The Multi Formula question type accepts an unordered list of numbers or formulas separated by semicolons 11 8 Math Question Authoring using LaTeX 275 Notes e This is an unordered list The entries in the student response do not need to appear in the same order as in the correct answer e This type is commonly used for solutions of equations e This type can also be used for unordered lists of ntuples questions requiring coordinates of points or vectors e A question that has a single formula answer is graded correct if you use this type For example consider the question of finding all solutions to a given equation that has only one solution but is of a type that may have more It is recommended that you use the Multi Formula type because the Formula type indicates to the student that there is only one solution Example 1 begin question Multi Formula qutext Find all roots of the polynomial x 2 2x 24 Separate multiple entries of the answer with semicolons answer 6 4 Note The response 4 6 is graded correct end question Example 2 begin question Multi Formula qutext Find all exact solutions of the following system of equations begin align x 2 y 2 4x amp 0 x y amp 4 end align Note The amsmath package is needed to use the align environment answer 2 2 4 0 end question Example 3 begin question Multi Formula This question uses randomi
468. ular or triangular This option is not available for all 3 D plot objects labeldirections x y z This option specifies the direction in which labels are printed along the axes The values of x y and z must be horizontal or vertical The default direction of any labels is horizontal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase The axes option must be set to boxed frame or normal labels x y z This option specifies labels for the axes The value of x y and z must be a string The default labels are the names of the variables in the original function to be plotted The strings must be entered using left single quotes light phi theta r g b This option adds a directed light source from the direction phi theta in spherical coordinates with red green and blue intensities given by r g and b The values of r g and b must be numeric in the range 0 to 1 lightmodel x This option chooses a predefined light model to illuminate the plot Valid light models include none light1 light2 light3 and light4 The value must be in lowercase 238 10 Authoring Mathematical Questions Option Description linestyle n This option controls the dash pattern used to render lines in the plot The linestyle can be specified as either an integer between 1 and 4 or a name from the following list SOLID DOT DASH and DASHDOT The value must be in uppercase numpoints n This option specifies
469. ultiple choice Multiple choice questions in the system can have any number of choices You can also add incorrect choices after questions are initially created When making assignments you choose to permute the choices with each delivery multiple choice or maintain a static choice order non permuting multiple choice You can provide response specific feedback That is you can provide a distinct comment for each choice For every choice in your question add a comment line of the form qu x y comment lt n gt lt comment_text gt where lt n gt is the same positive integer as in the corresponding choice line qu x y choice lt n gt lt choice _n gt 164 9 Question Types To enter response specific feedback use a text or HTML editor LaTeX or the Question Editor Edit Source function ality See Also Multiple Choice Questions in the Question Editor page 101 Multiple Choice Question Example Script page 296 9 14 Multiple Selection Questions Question Mode multiple selection non permuting multiple selection qu x y mode multiple selection qu x y mode non permuting multiple selection Multiple selection questions are similar to multiple choice items However they can require the user to identify more than one correct answer You can create as many choices as you want In multiple selection questions the selections are permuted each time they appear In non permuting multiple selection questions the selec
470. um choice 6 decreasing choice 7 concave down choice 8 inflection point choice 9 concave up sarees ees See Also Multiple Selection Questions page 164 Authoring Questions with Embedded Plots Example Script To author applet graphing questions you must use a text or HTML editor or LaTeX to produce script files For details on using LaTeX to generate questions that display graphs see Graph Plotting in LaTeX Questions page 259 You can also embed Maple plots in questions using the Question Editor For more information see Questions with Plots page 148 The following example script creates a question that generates graphs using algorithmically driven data qu 4 7 mode Formula qu 4 7 name Algorithmically generated graph qu 4 7 comment The correct answer is lt math gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt 2 lt mn gt lt msup gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt B lt mn gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt C lt mn gt lt math gt e qu 4 7 editing useHTML qu 4 7 algorithm Sa int rand 8 5 Sb int rand a 2 10 SyMin 5 int 0 25 b a 2 5 5 SyMax SyMin B int a b C int a b qu 4 7 question Give a formula for the quadratic equation shown in the graph below lt p gt lt center gt lt applet code applets grapher Graph archive graphing jar width 250 height 250 gt lt param name xMin value 10 gt l
471. undamental math question type is Formula This appears as a question statement followed on a separate line by a single free response entry cell that accepts a math formula that is an expression consisting of numbers variable names and the standard arithmetic operators and functions The system grades it by comparing it with the correct answer If the student response and the correct answer are algebraically or numerically equivalent the response is graded correct To require that the response have a specified form use the form subtype To create a formula question with multiple input cells to hold closely related responses to the same question statement use the multipart formula question type The Blanks formula question type is closely related to Formula It uses the same grading and entry options but presents the response cell as an in line entry cell for students to complete The Numeric question type accepts numeric quantities or numeric quantities with units in student responses and automatically processes scientific notation expressions The Dimensioned Formula question type accepts a combination of numeric quantities and physical units It recognizes equivalent physical units For example if 500g is specified as the correct answer 0 5kg is also graded correct e Any math question type can include algorithmically rendered plots The Maple graded question type vastly expands the math and scientific visualization capabilities of the sy
472. up in an assignment To merge questions 1 In the right frame displaying the selected questions select the questions or question groups you want to merge 2 Click the Merge button to combine all the selected questions into a single question group Previewing Questions for Selection When you select a question group its structure is displayed in the left frame directly below the question group list To view brief descriptions of individual questions expand the groups and view the question description If no question description accompanies the question its question type is displayed for example Multiple Choice Formula and Fill in the Blanks 40 3 Creating and Managing Assignments To preview individual questions for selection e In the left frame click the link of the question you want to preview A preview window opens You can also preview a question after it is added to the assignment by selecting the question link in the right frame Previewing Questions in Assignments After questions have been added to an assignment you can preview the questions To preview a question in an assignment 1 In the right frame of Select Questions tab select a question 2 Click the link in the highlighted question description The question preview includes the information fields and the Annotation Editor Question Annotations Question Annotations in the form of HTML or unformatted text can be added to individual questions in ass
473. using the Question Editor to author numeric questions You can specify whether arithmetic is allowed in student responses Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recom mended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits Single or multiple numeric questions can be included along with other response objects within a Question De signer question Example qu qu 1 1 mode numeric 1 1 question lt question_text gt aganaga 1 answer num lt numeric part of the answer for example 3 gt 1 answer units lt units part of the answer for example m s gt 1 showUnits lt true or false whether to display the question with a Units text field gt 1 grading lt grading mode see below gt 1 units lt optional reference to external table of units see below gt 1 1 digit lt sig digits positive integer required for exact_sigd and toler _sigd grading PRPRPRPRP modes gt qu qu 1 1 err lt error tolerance required for toler_sigd and toler _abs grading modes gt 1 1 perc lt percentage error tolerance required for toler perc grading mode gt Grading Modes Using the grading mode you can control the precision or margin of error in the student responses gra
474. ution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits For more information see Setting Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 86 and decimal n x sig n x int x page 223 e Specify the acceptable input formats for student responses See Setting Answer Format in Numeric Ques tions page 85 f Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question 8 6 Question Authoring in the Question Editor e 103 See Also Authoring Mathematical Questions page 179 Using a Table of Units page 205 Understanding the Math Capabilities page 181 Numeric page 146 Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions in the Question Editor To create Palette questions that integrate your customized palette 1 Create a question bank in plain text script format and define a palette definition s at the beginning of the question bank For information on specifying a palette definition see Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax page 192 You should also include at least one question in the question bank This question is simply a place holder at this point Import the question bank Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed On the Question Name amp Type screen a From the Question Type drop down list select Palette based symbolic editor b You can add a comment algorithms information fields hints or a wo
475. variable x false code Saa int rint 11 2 s rint 2 Sa int if s aa S aa b int rint 11 2 Scc int rint 11 2 St rint 2 c int if t cc cc The above code chooses random integer coefficients with absolute values between 2 and 12 b must be positive but a and c may be positive or negative end question See Also True or False Questions page 177 11 6 Advanced Question Types in LaTeX 259 11 6 Advanced Question Types in LaTeX Graph Plotting in LaTeX Questions Graph Plotting Applet graph and multigraph Macros The graph macro embeds a graph in a question You can also embed Maple plots in questions using the Question Editor The graph has its center at the origin x and y axes and horizontal and vertical gridlines The axes are labeled at each gridline The macro takes one option and five required arguments in the following order Table 11 3 Arguments and Option for a Graph Plotting Applet gridlines option number of horizontal and vertical gridlines in addition to the axes de fault is 10 formula formula of the function in calculator syntax not TeX xMin minimum x value on the x axis xMax maximum x value on the x axis yMin minimum y value on the y axis yMax maximum y value on the y axis The multigraph macro plots two curves on the same axes This macro takes one option and six required arguments in
476. ve names for any web folders you have selected Question and assignment names cannot be changed 6 Click OK to create your Course Module according to the specifications you have indicated You return to the Course Modules main screen and your new Course Module has been added to the bottom of the list of installed course modules for your class Note Click Cancel at any time to return to the Course Modules main page See Also Exporting a Course Module page 64 Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module page 66 Viewing Details of a Course Module page 66 Course Module Creation and Shared Class Inheritance of Questions and Assignments CMs can only include content that is local to the source class e Content inherited from another class cannot be included The course module creation screen will not show any inherited content See Also Shared Class Content Updates page 13 64 5 Course Modules 5 3 Exporting a Course Module Click Export to save the selected CM from your source class to your hard drive This is a required step if you want to redistribute or install your CM into a new class 1 2 Create a CM Select the CM you want to save to your hard drive by selecting the check box adjacent to it in the list of available CMs in your class Click the Export button The next page displays all the related URL information that is referenced in the CM you have selected You will see a message ab
477. vhous sdedeseestveteecedsabgedaidebune igsdehees inekaedsdssegeds ioekeor E N TAa 117 8 9 Question Banks seire cock ieste i tab cbt cw ec E EE PSUS Sa OAM a ba Uae E OOS OU Ea Va ECoG Raed GEENA oes bade a 118 What isa Questions Bank me Sees ety a wack sabe res ote A ae hw is REDON EM 118 Topic Structure within Question Banks cccccecc cece eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee essa ees eeseeaeeeaneenaes 118 Opening a Saved Question Bank File ccccecc cece cece ence eece ee eeeceeeeeeeceeeea seca eeaeeeae eeu eeeseeeneeeneeeeeges 120 Saving a Question Banks oep niee EE EEEE sdaue es evedies devas th leevcads Seacudtiv ec cea A E a 120 Saving to a File versus Reinstalling a Question Bank ccecceecceeece cece cece cece esse eee eeueeeeseeeeeeeeenaes 121 Creating and Opening Modules 20 ccccac ccccete cece cece ve cascade covccuees cecied edoecessdevenchindcegsateeveavag ed ocasttvecduet 121 Question Fields eNe a aa a ebbed aad aa neinei 122 Question Modes Question Types esesssssssseeersserersersresrseesrsserersresresersresesertrsserreserseesesetese 124 Required Question Elements s i cinn T EEA E at eked aE aha 125 The name Field Using Question Descriptions cccccecceeec cece cece eece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseaeegas 126 Thesans wet Field iecere e a dase Shee oweboed a e sevhant N a N teed ask zeny 127 The info Fields eain oaei ets setae A eae ed ane ec eae ee ee a EEA 128 Hints Coach
478. wers 127 Equivalent Units Creating New Table 211 Erf 231 Error Margin 184 Essay Question 171 Essay Question Example Script 289 Essay questions Grading 53 Essay Questions 155 289 Creating in the Question Editor 94 Euler s Constant 180 Example Script Library of Example Plain text script files 301 Maple Formula 293 Maple Syntax 294 Excel 58 Export Course Module 64 Export Question Bank File 114 Exporting Grades 58 External Assignment 58 Extra credit Gradebook 57 ex 180 F F 205 Factorial 224 Featured Class 9 Features xvii Feedback 30 43 128 Feedback for Maple graded questions 140 Feedback Options Configuring 129 Field Type 122 Figure Labels 284 Fill in the blank 95 153 158 159 169 create 289 Fill in the Blank Question Example Script 289 Fill in the Blank Questions 153 159 308 Index Final grade 43 Finishing assignments 47 Flash movie 89 Flash Questions 155 Folders 19 Force grade 59 Formatting 168 Formula 171 179 188 213 219 228 233 239 284 Blanks 134 Blanks in LaTeX 268 in Question Editor 98 Multipart 146 Restricted 150 Restricted in LaTeX 279 Unordered List 145 Vectors 150 with unit dimensions 139 Formula Form Variant 138 Formula List 124 139 271 280 Formula list Questions 271 Formula Mod C 124 136 269 Formula Questions 132 137 271 Multipart 146 FormulaList 271 frac 224 Free Response 95 159 Functions within
479. xt question If they answered incorrectly they can view the Hints and then return to make another attempt at the question or they can view the solution and proceed to the next question Students can also skip questions and leave the test at any time 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor Choose Name Tab Assignment Name The name you give your assignment in the Choose Name tab of the Assignment Editor is displayed to students in your Class Homepage Name assignments using unique and informative terms that make it easy for students to identify each assignment and its instructional objective For example although the rules for grading and access are enforced automatically you may want to indicate the type of assignment in the name for rapid identification 38 3 Creating and Managing Assignments Assignment Instructions This feature is useful for providing instructions viewed by students during an assignment 1 In the Choose Name tab click Advanced 2 In the first text box enter text that will appear at the top of every page in your assignment 3 You can also enter information to be shown on the results page Details are in the section Text Instructions Shown Upon Grading Text Instructions Shown Upon Grading To include text or instructions 1 In the Choose Name tab click Advanced 2 Enter text or instructions in the Text to show on the Results Page field This information is displayed to students after grading a
480. y approach the time limit They are not allowed to answer additional questions once they exceed the time limit however they can submit their work up to that point for grading e When the student has completed the assignment and submitted it for grading the system displays a graded as signment report that includes the score for example 6 out of 8 as well as details on the grading of each question along with comments or feedback for all of the questions These options can be configured Proctored Exams Proctored Exams are similar to Homework or Quiz assignments but with an additional security measure to confirm the identity of the student taking the test All Proctored tests require a proctor to authorize students submitting their test for grading e You can require proctor authorization to validate student identity and grant assignment access at the start of a proctored exam Select the Also require proctor sign in to start session option in the Set Policies tab e Students must be registered in your class Types of Proctors There are two types of proctors Global and Local e Global proctors are defined by the System Administrator and can give authorization for any class e Local proctors are defined by the nstructor and can only give authorization for a particular class Location of Proctor Proctors can give authorization directly at the student s computer or remotely through Proctor Tools In both cases the proctor must
481. y correct and incorrect responses as well as success rate p value d value p biserial and r biserial To perform a gradebook search From the Class Homepage select Gradebook from the menu bar Select Search and the type of search Class Grades or Item Statistics In the Search Panel select the assignments you want to include in the search 1 2 3 4 Specify additional search criteria 5 In the View Panel select the data to include in the search results 6 Click Search to perform the search To start a new search from the menu bar select Gradebook gt Search again and then select Class Grades or Item Statistics Setting Search Criteria The search panel is used to request data from the database To perform a search you must specify the assignment or assignments to include You can select assignments by name or by assignment type To include all assignments select All If desired customize your gradebook search using the options in the Advanced Search Panel e Classes search within the current class or any child classes e User search for a user by login name e List specify whether to show all enrolled users or only users with grades e Results specify which user roles students instructors and proctors to include in results e Show Results select from best average most recent earliest all best all most recent or all earliest If you let students attempt an assignment multiple
482. you are essentially creating web pages Not all file formats are supported by all browsers or will run on all platforms If adding an image file make sure that it is widely supported by various browsers such as GIF JPEG or PNG Do not for example use bitmap image files in Maple T A Which Method is Best for my Project Choose the best method for your project e To edit a few existing questions Use the online Question Editor e To reorganize question repository topics and questions within Group questions in the question repository topics e To work with algorithmically generated variable data in my Use the Algorithm Designer within the Question Editor questions e To work with math intensive content See Authoring Mathematical Questions e To edit or author many questions If you are an experienced LaTeX user you can use LaTeX to quickly generate questions To work with information fields Use the Question Editor To work with symbolic expressions chemistry foreign lan Use LaTeX or the Question Editor guages mathematics logic To create specific advanced question types Use LaTeX or plain text script files e To use Maple to grade or generate plots in questions See Maple graded Question type and Questions with Plots See Also Authoring When to Use Maple T A Plain Text Script Files page 75 Authoring When to Use LaTeX page 75 Authoring When to Use the Question Editor page 75 Plan
483. ys 4 Inherit a question from a parent class Child classes automatically inherit questions from their parent class Instructors can use an inherited question in their assignments but cannot modify the question Only the original owner creator of the question can modify the question and those changes will be automatically propagated to all subscribers question groups This is similar to the Question Bank inheritance rules in Maple T A 4 0 5 Shadow a public question from another class Instructors can use a shadowed question in their assignments but cannot modify the question Only the original owner creator of the question can modify the question and those changes will be automatically propagated to all subscribers question groups 6 Clone a question public or private from the question repository This operation creates a local copy or clone of the original question and sets the owner to the instructor who made the clone Instructors who clone a question can edit the cloned question No one other than the instructor who created the cloned question will be able to modify the clone Changes made to the original question will not be visible in cloned questions When you inherit shadow or clone a question it is available in the question repository for your class and you can use it in assignments To determine which method of obtaining questions is appropriate for your class take the following behaviors into consideration and ch
484. ystem administrator creates user accounts The system administrator can give instructors the ability to create user accounts Contact your system administrator for more information Locking and Unlocking Class Registration You can close registration for your class to prevent students from registering for your class To lock class registration 1 From the Class Homepage select the Actions menu and then select Class Info 2 Click the Edit Class button 3 Select the Registration Locked check box This is selected by default See Figure 2 1 4 Click Submit To allow open registration for the class you can leave the class unlocked for the first two weeks of class and then lock it If you do not want to allow open registration you can lock the class from the start 2 1 Class Manager 11 O eee oS Ma lel A Jack s Class Class Manager amp Map Maplesoft System Homepage Class Homepage Class Summary Edit Class Welcome Jack Day My Profile Help Logout Class Details Course ID jacktest Class Name Calculus 101 Instructor Jack Day School Maplesoft Description URL Registration Locked Mi Featured Class Oo Cancel Submit Locking Class Registration Class Rosters You can use class rosters to e Upload a class roster to the system from a text file Ifa user is not in the system and you have create privileges the student will be added to the system and registered in the class
485. zed variables qutext Find all roots of the polynomial x 2 var b x var c answer var p var q code Sp int rint 5 1 q int S ptrint 4 2 b int q p c int p q The above code chooses random integers p and q and then calculates the coefficients b and c Note b and c are both positive and b is not equal to 1 end question 276 11 Authoring Questions in LaTeX Nume Questi ric Questions in LaTeX on Mode Numeric The Numeric question type accepts either a number in decimal or scientific notation or a number with units for an answer You must specify units as an optional argument to the answer macro For example answer m s 2 9 8 Because it is natural to specify the units after the number you can use the format Notes answer 9 8 m s 2 In the correct answer the number must be enclosed in braces The units must be enclosed in brackets If you do not specify units in the correct answer that is if you do not specify an argument to answer the system presents the student with a single text field in which to enter a response without units If you specify an argument to answer that argument is taken as the correct answer s units In this case the system displays two text fields A student must enter the numerical part of the response in the first field and the units in the second field You must use recognized units To defi

Maple T.A. User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents